Vauxhall Vectra Owner's Manual

©Copyright by Vauxhall Motors Ltd., England.

Reproduction or translation, in whole or in parts, is not permitted without prior written consent from

Vauxhall Motors Ltd.

All rights as understood under the copyright laws are explicitly reserved by Vauxhall Motors Ltd.

All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this manual are based on the latest production information available at the time of publication.

The right is reserved to make changes at any time without notice.

Edition: July 2007.

TS 1557-A-08

Owner’s Manual

VECTRA

Operation, Safety and Maintenance

VAUXHALL Vectra

Operation, Safety, Maintenance

Data specific to your vehicle

Please enter your vehicle’s data here to keep it ea sily accessible.

This information is available under the section "Technical da ta " as well as on the identification plate and in the Serv ice Booklet.

Fuel

Designation

Engine oil

Grade

Viscosity

Tyre pressure

Summer tyres

Tyre size

Winter tyres

Weights

Permissible Gross Vehicle

Weight

– EC kerbweight

= Loading

Front with up to 3 people

Rear

Front Rear

Front with full load

Rear

Front Rear

Your Vectra is an intelligent c om bina tion of forwardlooking technology, impressiv e safety, env ironmenta l friendliness a nd economy.

It now lies with you to drive your vehicle safely and ensure that it perform s perfectly. This Owner’s Manual provides you with all the necessary information to that end.

Make sure your pa ssengers a re awa re of the p ossible risk of accid ent and injury which may result from im proper use of the vehic le.

You m ust always comply w ith the sp ecific laws of the c ountry that you are travelling through. These laws ma y differ from the inform ation in this Ow ner’s Manual.

When instructed to consult a w ork shop, we recomm end that you consult your

Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.

All Vauxhall Authorised Repairers provide first-class service at rea sonable prices.

You will receiv e q uick , reliab le and individual service.

Experienced mechanics, trained by

Vauxhall, work a ccord ing to specific

Vauxhall instructions.

The Owner’s Manual should always be k ept in the v ehicle: Rea dy to hand in the glove compartment.

Make use of the Owner’s

Manual: z The "In brief" section will give you an initial overv iew. z The table of c ontents at the beginning of the Owner’s M anual and within the individual chapters will show you where everything is. z Its index will help you find what you want. z It w ill fa miliarise you with the sophisticated technology. z It w ill increase your pleasure in your vehicle. z It w ill help you to handle your vehic le expertly.

The Owner’s Manual is designed to be clearly laid-out and easily understood.

This symbol signifies:

6 Continue read ing on next pa ge.

3 The asterisk signifies equipment not fitted to all v ehicles (model variants, engine op tions, models specific to one country, optional equipment, Genuine

Vauxhall Parts and Acc essories).

9

Warning

Text marked 9 Warning provides information on risk of accident or injury.

Disregard of the instructions may lead to injuries or endanger life. Inform your passeng ers accordingly.

Yellow arrows in the illustrations serve as points of reference or indicate some action to be performed.

Black arrows in the illustrations indicate a reaction or a second action to be performed.

Direc tional da ta, e.g. left or right, or front or back, in the descriptions always relate to the direction of travel.

Thank you for choosing a Vauxhall. We wish you many hours of plea surable driving.

Your Vauxhall Team

Contents

Comm itment to customer satisfaction:

Our aim: to k eep you happy with your vehicle. All Vauxhall Authorised Repairers offer first-class serv ice a t competitiv e prices. Experienced, factory-trained technicians w ork according to factory instructions. Your Authorised Repa irer can supply you with GEN UINE VAU XHALL-

APPROVED PARTS, which hav e und ergone stringent quality and precision chec ks, and of course useful and a ttrac tiv e

VAUXHALL-APPROVED ACCESSORIES.

Our nam e is your guara ntee!

For d eta ils of the

Va uxhall Authorised Rep airer Netw ork, please r ing this number; 0845 090 2044

In b rief ........................................................ 2

Keys, doors, w indows, sunroof .............. 26

Seats, interior .......................................... 50

Instrum ents, controls .............................. 98

Lighting ................................................. 128

Infotainment system ............................ 137

Clim ate c ontrol ..................................... 140

Driving and op eration ......................... 168

Self-help, vehicle care .......................... 228

Service, maintena nce ........................... 268

Technical data ..................................... 282

Index ...................................................... 314

2 In brief

In brief

To unlock and open vehicle:

Press button

q

, pull door handle

6 Door locks, child safety locks – see p age 41, keys – see page 26, electronic im mobiliser – see pag e 27, remote control – see page 28, central locking – see p age 30, mechanical a nti-theft locking system 3 – see p age 30,

Vauxhall a la rm system 3 – see pag e 38.

To unlock and open the luggage com partment:

Press button

q

on remote control, press button on boot lid/tailgate and for Estate, pull catch under handle

6 Remote control – see page 28, central loc king – see page 30,

Vauxhall alarm system 3 – see page 38, electrically op erated tailgate 3 – see page 35.

In brief 3

To adjust front seats:

Pull handle, slide seat, release handle

6 Seats – see page 50, seat p osition – see page 52, electrically a djustable front sea ts – see page 52.

9

Warning

Important: Do not sit nearer than

10 inches (25 cm ) from the steering wheel, to permit sa fe airbag deployment.

To adjust front seat backrests:

Turn handwheel

Move seat backrest to suit seating position.

Do not lean on seat b ackrest whilst adjusting it.

6 Seats – see pag e 50, seat position – see page 52, folding d ow n front passenger’s seat backrest – see page 66, electrica lly adjusta ble front seats – see p age 52.

To adjust front seat height

3

:

Operate lever on outboard side of seat

Pump a ction of lever

Upwa rds:

Downwards:

Seat higher

Seat lower

6 Seats – see page 50, seat position –see page 52, electrically adjustable front seats – see page 52.

4 In brief

Adjusting front seat inclination

3

:

Operate front lever on outboard side of seat

Pump action of lever

Upwards:

Downwards:

Seat steeper

Seat flatter

6 Seats – see page 50, seat p osition – see page 52, electrically a djustable front sea ts – see page 52.

Electric seat adjustment

3

:

Operate switch on outboard side of seat

1 Adjusting the longitudinal position

2 Adjusting the inclination

3 Heig ht adjustment

4 Seat back rest adjustment

5 Lum bar supp ort 3

6 Seats – see pag e 52, seat position – see page 52, electrica lly adjusta ble front seats – see p age 52.

To adjust head restraint height

3

of front and outboard rear seats:

Press button to release, adjust height, engage in position

6 Head restraints – see page 55, hea d restraint position – see p age 56, rear head restra ints – see p age 55.

In brief 5

To adjust head restraint angle

3

of front and outboard rear seats:

Swivel bottom edge of head restraint forwards or backwards

6 Head restra ints – see p age 55, head restraint position – see pag e 56, rea r head restraints – see pag e 55.

To apply seat belt:

Pull out seat belt smoothly from inertia reel, guide it over the shoulder and engage in the belt buckle

The seat b elt must not be twisted at any point. The lap belt m ust lie snugly a gainst the body. The bac krests m ust not be tilted back too far (recommended m aximum tilting a ngle approx. 25°).

To relea se belt, press red button on belt buckle.

6 Three-point seat belts – see page 72, airbag systems 3 – see page 81, seat position – see page 52.

Adjusting interior mirror:

Swivel mirror housing

Swivel lever on underside of m irror housing to reduce d azzle at night.

6 Mirror – see page 44, automatic a nti-daz zle interior m irror 3 – see page 44.

6 In brief

To adjust exterior mirrors:

Four-way switch in driver’s door

If the outer m irror switch (1) is pressed, the four-wa y switch operates the driver’s and front passenger’s mirrors 3 , a nd if the inner mirror switch (2) is pressed, it only operates the front passenger’s m irror.

6 Mirrors – see pa ge 43, aspherical exterior m irrors 3 – see pa ge 43, automatic anti-dazz le exterior m irrors 3 – see page 43, heated exterior m irrors – see pag e 13, electric seat adjustment 3 – see p age 54.

Steering column lock and ignition:

Turn key to position 1.

Move steering wheel slightly to release steering column lock

Positions:

0 = Ig nition off

1 = Steering free, ignition off

2 = Ig nition on, for diesel engines:

Preheating

3 = Starting

6 Starting – see page 15, electronic im mobiliser – see pag e 27, parking the v ehicle – see page 16.

Steering wheel adjustment

3

:

Move lever down, adjust height and distance, move lever up, engage

Adjust steering wheel only when vehicle is stationary and steering colum n loc k is released.

6 Airb ag systems 3 – see page 81.

In brief 7

Turn light switch:

7

8

= Off

= Parking lights

9

= Dipped or main beam

AUTO = Automatic dipped beam activation

3

Press button:

> r

= Front fog lights

3

= Fog tail light

6 Lighting – see pa ge 128, head lig ht control indicator – see pages 100, 126, 128.

Headlight flash, main beam and dipped beam:

Headlight flash

= Pull stalk towards steering wheel

Main beam = Push stalk forwards

Dipped beam = Push stalk forwards again or pull towards steering wheel

6 Main beam, headlight flash – see p age 129.

Switch on turn signal lights:

Right

Left

= Stalk up

= Stalk down

6 Turn signal lights – see page 130.

8 In brief

Page

1 Side air v ents .................................. 142

2 Front pa ssenger’s airbag ............... 81

3 Centre air v ents ............................. 142

4 Infotainm ent system 3 ................. 137

5 Central information display for time, date, outside temperature,

Infotainm ent system 3, check control 3, trip computer 3,

Electronic Climate Control 3 ......... 108

6 Turn signal lights................................. 7

Headlight flash, dipped beam a nd main beam .........7

Door-to-door lighting 3 ................. 133

Parking lights ................................. 134

Cruise control 3 .............................. 200

7 Steering wheel remote c ontrol 3 .. 137

8 Instruments .......................................98

9 Horn ..................................................11

Driver’s airb ag ................................. 81

Pa ge

10 Windscreen wiper, wind screen wash system, headlight wash system 3 and rear window w ash system 3 ........... 11

11 Pa rk ing lights, dipped beam ........ 128

Instrument illumination ................. 134

Fog tail lig ht ................................... 131

Front fog lights 3 ........................... 130

Head lig ht range adjustment 3 ..... 131

12 Unlock ing the bonnet .................... 228

13 Starter switch with steering colum n lock ....................................... 6

14 Ac celera tor pedal ......................... 184

15 Brake peda l ........................... 185, 208

16 Steering wheel adjustm ent .............. 6

17 Clutch ped al 3 ............................... 185

18 Heated seat (right) 3 and seat climate control 3 ...................144

Vauxhall a la rm system 3 ............... 38

Rear w indow blind 3 ...................... 49 and

Electronic Stability Programme 3 196

SPORT mode 3 ............................. 198

In brief 9

Page

19 Ashtrays .......................................... 94

20 Stowa ge c om partment with AUX input 3 .......................... 138

21 Cigarette lighter 3 or socket ......... 93

22 Clim ate c ontrol ............................. 163

23 Heated seat (left) 3 ...................... 144

Haz ard warning lights ................. 131

Parking distance sensors 3 .......... 202

24 Glove compartment ............... 95, 135

25 Fusebox .......................................... 246

10 In brief

Control indicators

O Turn signal lights, see pages 7, 98, 130.

I Eng ine oil pressure, see page 98.

R Brake system , clutch system, see pages 99, 209, 276.

p Alternator, see page 99.

v Airb ag systems 3 ,

belt tensioners 3, see pages 74, 86.

W Coola nt temperature, see pages 100, 106.

8 Exterior lights, see pages 100, 128.

1 SPORT mode of autom atic

tra nsm ission 3, see pages 100, 178, 179.

T Winter progr amm e of

autom atic transmission 3 or

Easytronic 3, see pages 100, 172, 180.

( Door open 3, see page 100.

j Easytronic 3,

starting the eng ine 3, see pages 100, 169.

t Bulb replac em ent 3, see p ages 100, 252. s Open lugg age comp artment, see p ages 34, 101.

> Front fog lights 3 , see p ages 101, 130.

C Main beam , see p ages 7, 101, 128.

r Fog tail light, see p ages 101, 131.

r Pa rking distance sensors 3, see p ages 101, 202. u Continuous Dam ping Control 3 ,

SPORT m ode, see p ages 101, 198.

X Seat belt 3, see p age 101.

A Engine electronic s, transmission

electronics 3, diesel fuel filter 3 , immob iliser, see p ages 27, 101, 192.

!

H

Pr eheating for diesel engines 3,

diesel p artic le filter 3, see p ages 102, 194.

Coolant level, see p ages 102, 275.

v

B u p y

S m

Y

Z w

Anti-lock Bra ke System (A BS), see page 210.

Electro-hyd raulic p ower assisted steer ing, see page 103.

Electronic Stability Prog ramm e

(ES P® Plus ) 3 , see pages 103, 196.

Seat occupancy recognition 3, see pages 87, 103.

Engine oil level 3 , see pages 103, 272.

Cruise control 3, see page 200.

Fuel level, see pages 103, 106, 228.

Exhaust g ases 3, see pages 104, 192.

Tyre p ressure monitoring

system 3, see pages 104, 204.

Ad aptive Forwa rd Lighting

(AFL) 3, see pages 104, 132.

In brief 11

Hazard warning lights:

On = Press

¨

Off = Press

¨

again

6 Hazard w arning lights – see pa ge 131.

Activate horn:

Press

j

in centre of steering wheel

6 Airbag system s 3 – see pag e 81, remote control on steering wheel 3 – see p age 137.

Windscreen wiper:

Gently push stalk upwards

§

= Off

$

= Adjustable timed interval wipe

%

= Slow

&

= Fast

Press the stalk down from position §:

Single swipe.

6 Windscreen wiper – see page 126, adjustable wiper interva l 3 – see pa ge 126, wiper blades – see pages 277, 278, vehicle c are – see page 264.

12 In brief

Automatic wiping with rain sensor

3

:

Gently push stalk upwards

§

= Off

$

= Automatic wiping with rain sensor

Autom atic wiping $:

Low sensitivity: Move adjuster wheel to the left

High sensitivity: Move adjuster wheel to the right

6 Windscreen wiper – see page 126, wiper blades – see pages 277, 278, vehic le care – see p age 264.

Operating windscreen and headlight wash systems

3

:

Pull stalk towards steering wheel

6 Windscreen wa sh system and headlight wash system 3 – see page 127, further information – see pag es 264, 278.

Operating rear window wiper

3

and wash systems

3

:

Wiper on = Push stalk forwards

Wiper off = Push stalk forwards again

Wash = Hold stalk in fully forwards position

6 Rear window wiper 3 and rear window wash 3 systems – see page 127, further inform ation – see pages 264, 277,

278.

In brief 13

Heated rear window, heated exterior mirrors:

On = Press Ü

Off = Press Ü again

6 Air c onditioning 3 – see page 140, heated rear window, heated exterior mirrors – see page 143.

To demist or defrost windows:

Set air distribution to l, turn rotary knob for temperature and airflow clockwise;

Air conditioning system

3

:

Press buttons

n

and

V

;

Automatic air conditioning system

3

:

Press buttons

n

and

V

, turn rotary knob for temperature clockwise, airflow to A;

Electronic Climate Control

3

:

Press button

V

6 Clim ate control – see pa ge 140.

Setting automatic m ode of


3

:

Press AUTO button, set temperature for driver’s and front passenger’s sides using left and right rotary knobs

6 Electronic Climate Control 3 – see page 156.

14 In brief

Manual transmission:

Reverse gear: with vehicle sta tionary, pull the ring up three seconds after depressing clutch ped al and engage gear.

If the gear does not engag e, set the lever in neutral, release the clutch pedal and depress again; then repeat gear selection.

Easytronic

3

:

N

o

= Idling

= Drive position

-

+ = Higher gear

= Lower gear

A/M = Switch between

Automatic and Manual

R mode

= Reverse gear (with selector lever lock)

The selector lever must always be mov ed in the appropriate direction as far as it will go. Upon release, it autom atically returns to the centre position. Pay heed to the gear/mode ind icator in the transm ission display.

The footb rake must b e depressed when starting.

6 Easytronic 3 – see page 168.

Automatic transmission

3

:

P = Park position

R = Reverse gear

N = Neutral position (idling)

D = Automatic gear selection

Selector lever in D to the left:

Manual mode

+ = Higher gear

= Lower gear

P or N must b e engaged when starting .

In order to leav e P, switch on ignition, depress footbrake and press b utton on selector lever.

To engag e P or R, press button on selector lev er.

P Only with vehicle stationary, apply ha nd brake beforehand.

R Only if vehicle is stationary.

6 Automatic transmission 3 – see page 176.

In brief 15

Before starting-off, check:

z Tyre pressure and condition – see pages 204, 211, 299. z Engine oil level and fluid levels in engine compa rtm ent – see p ages 271 to 279. z All windows, mirrors, exterior lighting and number plates a re free from dirt, snow and ice and are operational. z No objec ts are placed in front of the rear window, on the instrument p anel or in the area in w hich the airbags infla te. z Seats, seat b elts and mirrors are correctly adjusted. z Brake opera tion.

To start engine:

Operate clutch and brake pedals, automatic transmission

3

in P or N,

Easytronic

3

: Depress brake, do not accelerate,

Petrol engines: Turn key to 3;

Diesel engines: Turn key to 2, when control indicator

!

goes out

1)

, turn key to 3; release key once engine is running

To restart or switch off the engine, turn key bac k to 0.

To switch on the ignition, only turn the key to 2.

6 Electronic im mobiliser – see pag e 27, diesel fuel system – see page 228.

1) Preh eatin g system sw itches on o nly if outside tem perature is low .

16 In brief

Releasing the handbrake:

Raise lever slightly, press release button, lower lever fully

6 Handbrake – see pag e 209.

Parking the vehicle

z Always ap ply the ha nd brake firmly without pressing the release button; to do this, fold up the armrest 3. Apply handbrake as fully as possible on an uphill or downhill incline. To red uce the amount of force required to activa te the handbrake, depress the footbrake at the same time. z Sw itch off the engine; to do this, turn the ignition key to 0. Remov e the ignition k ey and turn the steering wheel until the steering colum n lock (anti-theft protection) enga ges. In v ehicles with automatic transmission 3, the key ca n only be removed when the selector lev er is in P. z If the vehicle is parked on a flat surfa ce or an uphill incline, engage first gear before switching off the ignition if you have manual transmission or

Easytronic 3 ; if the vehicle has automatic transmission 3, place the selector lever in P. On an uphill incline, also turn the front wheels away from the kerb.

If the vehicle is on a downhill incline, eng age reverse gear before switching off the ig nition if you have ma nual transm ission or Easytronic 3; if the vehicle has automatic transmission 3, place the selector lever in P. Also turn the front wheels towards the kerb. z Lock the doors and luggage compartment and ac tiv ate the Vauxhall alarm system 3 by pressing button p on the remote control.

To activate the mechanical anti-theft loc king system 3 , press button p a gain no more than 15 seconds after locking.

Advice when parking:

z Do not park vehicle on easily ignitable surfaces, since the hot exhaust system temperatures could cause the surfa ce to ignite.

z On v ehicles with Easytronic 3 , control ind ic ator R fla shes for a few seconds after the ignition is switched off if the ha nd brake ha s not been a pplied – see page 174. z Close windows and sunroof 3 .

z The eng ine cooling fans m ay run after the eng ine has been switched off – see page 271.

6 Remote control – see page 28, central loc king – see pag e 30,

Vauxhall alarm system 3 – see page 38, vehicle d ecommissioning – see page 281.

In brief 17

That was a brief overview of the most important information for your first drive in your vehicle.

The other pages of this chapter contain a summary of the interesting functions in your vehicle.

The remaining chapters of the

Owner’s Manual contain important information on operation, safety and maintenance as well as a com plete index.

18 In brief

Airbag system

The a irb ag system c onsists of several separate systems.

Front airb ag system

The front airbag system will be triggered in the event of a serious ac cident involving a frontal impact and forms safety cushions for the driver and front passenger.

The forward movem ent of the d riv er and front passenger is check ed a nd the risk of injuries to the upper body a nd head are thereby substantially reduced.

Side airb ag system 3

The side a irb ag system triggers when a side-on collision occurs a nd provides a safety barrier for the driver and/or front passenger in the respective front door area. This reduc es the risk of injury to the up per body considera bly, in the event of a side-impact.

Cur tain airbag system 3

The curtain a irba g system triggers in the event of a side-on collision and provides a safety barrier in the head area on the respective side of the v ehicle. This red uces the risk of injury to the head considera bly in the event of a side-on collision.

6 Airb ag systems 3 – see page 81.

In brief 19

Active head restraints

3

at front seats

In the event of a rear-im pact, the active head restraints tilt forwards a little. The head is more effectively supported by the head restraint and the d ang er of injuries caused by whiplash in the neck area is red uced.

Active head restraints are id entified by the lettering ACTIVE on the head restraint guide sleev es.

6 Head restra ints – see p age 55.

Operating menus in the information display

3

Menu options are selected using menus and using the buttons/four-way button or the multi-function knob of the

Infotainment system 3 or the left-hand adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel.

The respective menu options a re show n on the display.

To select w ith four-way button:

Press the four-way button up, down, right or left.

Selec tion using multi-function knob:

Rotate and press multi-function knob.

To exit a m enu, turn the m ulti-func tion knob left or right to Return or Main and select.

20 In brief

Ü

Board Computer

BC 1

19,5° 19:36

All values

BC 2

Timer

Tyres

Ø

257.0

40 miles mph

7.0

gal.

Ø 31.0

miles/ gal.

Coolant level ch eck

OK

Selection using left-ha nd adjuster wheel on steering wheel:

Rotate and press adjuster wheel.

6 Information display – see page 108.

Trip computer

3

The trip computer provides information on driving data, which is continually recorded and ev alua ted electronically.

Functions: z Range, z Instanta neous consum ption, z Distanc e travelled, z Average speed, z Effective consumption, z Average consumption, z Stop watch, z Tyre pressure 3.

6 Trip comp uter 3 – see pages 114, 120.

Check control

3

The check control softwa re monitors: z Fluid levels, z Tyre pressures 3 , z Remote control battery, z Vauxhall alarm system 3, z Important exterior lights, inc luding cables and fuses.

6 Check control 3 – see pa ge 124.

In brief 21

Remote control on steering wheel

3

The functions of the Infotainm ent system 3 and the information display can be opera ted with the buttons and ad juster wheels on the steering wheel.

Further information is available in the

Infotainm ent system operating instructions.

6 Remote control on steering wheel 3 – see page 137,

Infotainm ent system – see page 137.

Twin Audio

3

Tw in Audio p rov id es rear seat occupants with the opportunity to listen to a different audio source tha n the one selected by the driver on the Infotainment system 3 .

Only a n audio source tha t is not currently active on the Infotainm ent system c an be controlled using Twin Audio.

Tw o headp hone connections are a vailable, with separate volum e c ontrols.

Further inform ation is av ailable in the

Infotainment system opera ting instructions.

6 Twin Audio 3 – see page 138.

FlexOrganizer

3

The side walls contain retaining strips, where va rious components can be attached to divide the lugg age compa rtm ent or fasten loads.

The system consists of: z Variable partition net, z Variable partition wall, z Partition rod, z Mesh pockets for the side walls, z Hooks.

6 FlexOrg aniz er 3 – see page 69.

22 In brief

Travel Assistant

3

The Trav el Assistant contains: z Arm rest, z Stowage compartments, z Waste container, z Drink holders, z Acc essory sockets, z Connection console e.g. for DVD p la yer 3, z Elec tric cool box, z Foldaway tables, z Tw in Audio (rear audio module) 3 or stowage compartm ent.

The Trav el Assistant is installed on a console above the c entre seat in the rear.

6 Trav el Assistant 3 – see page 58.

Adaptive Forward Lighting

(AFL)

3

On vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlights, AFL improves illumination of: z Curves (curv e lighting), z Intersec tions and tight turns (turn lighting).

Cur ve lighting

The Xenon light b eam pivots based on steering wheel position and vehicle speed, from app rox. 6 mph (10 km/h).

The headlights shine at an angle of up to 15° to the right or left of the direction of travel.

Turn lig hting

An add itional light illuminates at certain steering w heel settings (a fter approx. 90°), turn signal settings and speeds up to app rox. 25 mph (40 k m/h).

The lig ht beam projects at a 90° angle to the left or right of the v ehicle up to a distance of a pprox. 30 metres.

Motor way lighting

At higher speeds and continuous straight ahead travel, the dipped bea m automatically raises slightly, thereby increa sing hea dlight rang e.

6 Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) 3 – see page 132.

In brief 23

Ü

Board Computer

BC 1

BC 2

Timer

Tyres

Parking distance sensors

3

When rev erse gear is selected, the pa rk ing distance sensors switch on automatically.

The p arking dista nce sensors ca n also be activated at speeds of less than 15 m ph

(25 k m/h) by pressing the r button on the instrum ent panel.

If the vehicle approaches a n ob stacle to the front or rea r, a series of signals is audible in the vehicle interior. The interval between the signals becomes shorter a s the d istance is reduced. If the dista nce is less than 30 cm , the signal will b e continuous.

6 Park ing distance sensors 3 – see page 202.

SPORT mode

3

To activate

Press the SPORT button. The LED in the button illuminates.

SPORT mode is used to cha ng e damping 3 , steering 3, throttle application and the shifting tim es and shifting p oints for Easytronic 3 and automatic tra nsmission 3 whilst driving.

Damping and steering 3 b ecome more direct and provide better contac t with the road surface. The engine reacts more quic kly to ac celera tor m ovem ents.

With automatic transmission 3, the shift tim es are reduced and g ear changes occur at higher eng ine speeds (not w hen cruise control 3 is a ctive).

6 SPORT mode 3 – see page 198.

Tyre pressure monitoring system

3

The tyre p ressure monitoring system continuously monitors the pressure of all four tyres while the vehicle is being driven.

A pressure sensor is insta lled in ea ch wheel.

The tyre p ressures of the indiv idua l tyres are transmitted to a controller, where they are compared.

The current tyre pressures ca n be displayed on the Gra phic al Inform ation

Display or the Colour Inform ation

Display 3.

Deviating tyre pressures are displayed in the form of messages on the information display whilst driving.

6 Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 – see page 204.

24 In brief

Electrically operated tailgate,

Estate

3 z To op en:

– Hold down remote control button r

(see page 35, Fig. 17548 J) for a pprox.

1 second.

- or -

– When the k ey is inserted in the starter switch and the handbrak e is app lied, hold down the x button in the driver’s door for approx. 1 second .

- or -

– Unlock the tailgate and open by pulling the ca tch beneath the handle.

z To close:

– Hold down the r button on the rem ote control until the tailgate is closed.

- or -

– When the key is inserted in the starter switch and the handbrake is applied , hold down the x button in the driver’s door until the ta ilg ate is shut.

- or -

– Press the F button in the tailgate.

6 Electrically operated tailgate 3 – see p age 35.

Towing equipment with pivoting coupling ball bar

3

The relea se lev er is in the left stowag e compa rtm ent in the lugga ge compa rtm ent. Open cover. z Pull release lever downwards.

– The LED on the lev er is illuminated w hile the coupling b all bar is not engaged.

– In ad dition, a warning buzzer sounds and the coupling ball bar pivots downwards. z Piv ot the coupling ball b ar backw ards until it engages.

– LED m ust extinguish,

– Warning buzzer must cease,

– Otherwise, repea t the procedure.

6 Tow ing equipment with pivoting coupling ball b ar 3 – see page 222.

Diesel particle filter

3

The d iesel pa rticle filter system removes polluting soot particles out of the engine exhaust ga ses. The system includes a self-cleaning function that op erates automatically whilst driving. The filter is cleaned by burning the trapped soot particles at a high temperature. There ma y be an increase in fuel consumption, exhaust smell, and engine cooling fan opera tion 3 during the self-clea ning opera tion.

The self-cleaning function cannot operate automatically during c ertain driving situations where the engine does not reach its norma l operating tempera ture.

An example of this would b e driv ing only short distances in cold weather.

If the filter needs cleaning and rec ent driving situa tions did not allow the function to autom atically operate, then control indica tor ! will flash. If this occurs, then you may continue to drive the vehicle normally. The vehicle will not be damaged and does not req uire service.

The self-cleaning function will autom atic ally operate whilst driving after the engine has reached its norma l op erating temperature. Control indica tor ! will continue to flash until the self-c leaning operation is complete. This may ta ke up to 20 minutes of driving.

The time will be shorter at higher vehicle speeds.

6 Diesel particle filter 3 – see page 194.

In brief 25

26 Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

Keys, doors, windows, sunroof

Replacem ent keys ............................... 26

Loc k cylinders ...................................... 26

Ca r Pass 3 ............................................ 26

Key with foldaw ay key section 3 ....... 26

Electronic immobiliser.......................... 27

Store and activate personal vehicle settings using the remote control .... 28

Remote control .................................... 28

Central locking system ........................ 30

Fault when locking or unlocking......... 33

Lug gage compartment ....................... 34

Vauxhall alarm system 3.................... 38

Child safety locks ................................. 41

Universal remote c ontrol in mirror housing 3........................................... 41

Exterior mirrors..................................... 43

Interior mirror ....................................... 44

Electric windows 3 ............................... 45

Wind ow s in rear doors ........................ 47

Sunroof 3 ............................................. 47

Electrically operated rear window blind 3 ............................................... 49

Sunblinds for rear door windows 3 .... 49

Replacement keys

The key number is specified in the vehic le docum ents and in the Car Pass 3.

The key is a c onstituent of the electronic immobiliser. Ordering keys from a Vauxhall

Authorised Repairer g uarantees problem free op eration of the electronic immobiliser.

Keep the sp are k ey in a safe plac e.

Locks - see pa ge 266.

Lock cylinders

Designed to free-wheel if they are forcefully rotated without the correct k ey or if the correct key is not fully inserted.

To reset, turn cylinder with the c orrect key until its slot is vertica l, remove key and then re-insert it. If the cylinder still free-wheels, turn the key through 180° and rep eat op eration.

Car Pass

3

The Ca r Pass contains a ll of the vehicle’s data and should therefore not be k ept in the vehicle.

Have your Ca r Pa ss to hand when consulting a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.

Key with foldaway key section

3

Press button to extend. Press button to retrac t and audibly engage key sec tion.

Electronic immobiliser

The system checks whether the vehicle m ay be sta rted using the key that has been inserted. If the k ey is recognised as

"authorised" the vehicle can be started.

The c heck is carried out via a transponder in the k ey.

The electronic imm ob iliser activates automatically when the k ey is removed from the starter switch.

The c od e number of the electronic immobiliser is giv en in the Car Pass.

Control ind icator for imm obiliser

Control indica tor A illuminates briefly when the ig nition is sw itched on.

If the control indicator flashes w hen the ignition is on, there is a fault in the system; the engine cannot be started. Switc h off the ignition and then rep eat the start attempt.

If the control indicator A continues to flash, try to start the engine using the spare key and conta ct a workshop for assistance.

Keys, doors, windows, sunroof 27

If c ontrol indicator A illuminates a fter the engine is started, there is a fault in the engine elec tronics or transmission electronics 3 (see pages 101, 174, 182,

192) or there is water in the diesel fuel filter 3 (see page 274).

Note

The immobiliser does not lock the doors.

Therefore, after leaving the v ehicle a lways lock it and switch on the Vauxhall alarm system 3 – see p ages 30, 38.


Store and activate personal vehicle settings using the remote control

The last settings selec ted for: z Instrument illumination, z Central locking, z Memory function 3 for driver’s seat and mirror, z Elec tronic Climate Control 3 are automatically stored depending on the vehic le key used .

Different settings are stored for each rem ote control. Use of a remote control will activate the settings associa ted with it.

The settings for five remote controls can be stored.

Remote control

The remote control is integrated in the key.

Used to operate: z Central locking system, z Mechanic al anti-theft locking system 3 , z Vauxhall alarm system 3, z Electrically operated tailgate, Estate 3.

In a ddition, electric windows 3 and electric sunroof 3 can be closed using the remote control.

The remote control has a range of approx.

5 metres. This rang e ca n be a ffected by outside influences. Aim the rem ote control at the vehicle to operate.

Handle the remote control with care, protec t it from moisture and high temperatures a nd avoid unnecessary operation.

The ha zard warning lights illuminate to indicate that the remote c ontrol is operational.

Centra l locking system, see page 30.

Mechanic al anti-theft locking system 3 , see page 30.

Boot lid or ta ilgate, see page 34.

Vauxhall ala rm system 3, see page 38.

Electric w indows 3 , see page 45.

Electrica lly op era ted sunr oof 3, see page 47.

Fault

If the central locking system cannot be opera ted with the remote control, it m ay b e due to the following : z The range of the rem ote control has been exceeded. z Remote control b attery v olta ge is too low. Battery replac ement - see next column. z Freq uent, rep eated opera tion of the remote control outside the reception ra nge of the vehicle (e.g. too far from vehicle, rem ote control is then no longer recognised). Remote control synchronisation – see end column. z If the centra l loc king system is ov erloaded as a result of repeated op eration at short interv als. The power supply is c ut off for a b rief period. z Interference from higher-power radio waves from other sources.

To elim inate the cause of a fault, we recom mend contacting a workshop for assistance.

Manual unlocking and locking using the vehic le key - see page 33.

Rem ote control b attery rep lacement

Replace the battery as soon as the range of the rem ote control becom es reduced.

Extending the key – see page 26.

Open the remote c ontrol. Replace the battery (b attery type – see page 307), noting insta lla tion position. Close the remote control.


Mak e sure that you dispose of old batteries in accordance with env ironmental protec tion regulations.

Remote control synchronisation

After a battery change, unlock door with key in lock - see page 33. Inserting the key into the lock sync hronises the remote control.


Central locking system

For doors, b oot lid/tailgate and tank flap.

To unlock

Press button q on rem ote control.

To lock

Press button p on remote control.

Mechanic al anti-theft locking system 3

9

Warning

Do not use the system if there are people in the vehicle. The doors cannot b e unlocked from inside.

All doors must be c losed . Press button p on rem ote control again no more tha n

15 seconds after locking.

Lock buttons on all doors are positioned such tha t doors ca nnot be opened.

If the ignition wa s on, the driver’s door must be opened and closed once so that the vehicle can be secured .

Program ming unloc king m ode 3

When the vehicle is delivered from the factory, the remote c ontrol is preset so that a single press of the q button op ens all of the d oors and the luggage compartment.

The unit c an be config ured so that a single press of the q button unlocks the entire vehic le or just the driver’s door.

Change to presetting:

Hold b utton q on the remote control and button m in the driv er’s door depressed simulta neously until a double buzzer sounds. Afterwa rd s, only the driver’s door will be unlocked when b utton q is pressed once.

The entire vehicle is then unlocked by pressing button q on the remote control twice.

To restore the origina l settings, hold button q on the remote control and button m in the driv er’s door depressed simulta neously until a buz zer sound s.

The current setting is stored for the remote control - see page 28.

Central loc king sw itch for loc king a nd unlocking the d oors from inside the vehicle

Press button m in the driver’s door:

Doors and luggag e comp artment are lock ed.

Press button ) in the driver’s d oor:

Doors and luggag e comp artment are unlocked.

In the Estate with electrically operated tailg ate 3, the doors and lugga ge compartment are locked and unlocked with button m.

When the mechanical anti-theft locking system is active 3 (see p age 30), the doors cannot b e unlocked with this b utton.

If the v ehicle is locked using the remote control, b uttons m and ) in the driv er’s door are inopera ble.


Autom atic locking 3

The central locking ca n be set to lock automatically at a certain sp eed.

To activate the function, hold button p on the remote control and button m in the driver’s door dep ressed simultaneously until a double buzzer sounds.

The doors and lugga ge c om partment a re unlocked by switching off the ignition or by pressing button ) or, for Estate with electrically op erated tailgate 3, b y pressing button m in the driv er’s door.

Individ ual doors can b e unlocked by pulling the lock button.

To deactivate the function, hold button p on the remote control and button m in the driver’s door dep ressed simultaneously until a buzzer sounds.

The current setting is stored for the rem ote control - see page 28.


Note z If the driv er’s door is not closed properly, the central lock ing system will unlock again immediately after locking. z 30 seconds after unlocking using the remote control, the doors automa tic ally lock again 3 if neither a door nor the lugga ge c om partment has been op ened. z To lock the doors from within (e.g. to prevent undesired acc ess from outside), press the central lock ing button m. z If they are locked, the doors and the lugga ge c om partment unlock automa tic ally in the event of an a ccident of a certain sev erity (to permit outside assistance). Prerequisite: Ignition must not be switched off.

Closing the windows 3 a nd sunroof 3 from outside using the remote contr ol

9

Warning

Take care when operating the electric windows 3 a nd the sunroof 3. Risk of injury, particularly to c hildren.

Vehicle passeng ers must be informed accordingly.

Keep a close watch on the windows and sunroof when c losing them. Ensure that nothing becomes trapped in them a s they move.

The electric windows 3 can be closed from outside: hold d own button p on the remote control until all windows are closed.

The sunroof 3 can be c losed from outside: hold down button p on the remote control until the roof is fully closed.

Vehicle with electrically retrac ta ble exterior mirrors 3:

When closing the windows using the remote control, the exterior mirrors will also be retracted. The mirrors w ill be folded bac k out when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote control.

If the mirrors a re retracted using the button in the driver’s door, they remain in this position w hen the doors are unlocked.

Autom atic closing 3

If the mec hanical anti-theft lock ing system 3 is activated , the elec tric windows 3 and sunroof 3 are automatically closed and the electric ally retractab le exterior m irrors 3 are automatically retracted as soon as the rain sensor 3 detects water on the windscreen.

To safeguard the battery from discha rge by the rain sensor 3, after four hours the electric windows 3 a nd sunroof 3 are automatically closed and the electric ally retractab le exterior m irrors 3 a re automatically retracted .

For further information on electric windows 3 and the sunroof 3 – see pages 47, 49.

Fault

If the central locking system cannot be opera ted with the remote control, it m ay b e due to the following : z The c entral lock ing system is ov erloaded as a result of repeated operation a t short intervals. The power sup ply is cut off for a brief p eriod. z Defective fuse in fusebox – see pa ge 246.

Seek the assistanc e of a workshop to rectify the ca use of the fa ult. To open the driver’s door with the k ey - see the following section.

Fault when locking or unlocking

Rem ote control fa ult

To unlock:

Insert key into lock in driver’s door and turn tow ards front of vehicle as far as it will go.

Turn key b ack to v ertical position a nd remove from lock. Unloc k d riv er’s d oor with central locking switch - see page 31.

The mechanical anti-theft lock ing system 3 is d eactivated when the key is inserted in the starter switch.

To lock :

Open front p assenger’s door, close driver’s door, lock vehicle using central locking switch (see page 31), close front passenger’s door.


Ma lfunction in centra l locking system

To unlock:

Insert key into driver’s door lock and turn towards front of v ehicle a s far as it will go.

Turn key back to a v ertical position a nd remove. The other d oors can b e unlocked by pulling the interior lock b utton (unless the mechanical anti-theft locking system 3 has been ena bled). The luggage compa rtm ent and the tank flap remain locked .

To lock:

Lock front pa ssenger’s door and rear doors by pressing the interior lock b utton. Lock driver’s door with key in lock. Turn key towards rea r of vehicle as far as it will go, turn key to a vertical position and remove.

The unlocked tank flap and the lugga ge compa rtm ent cannot be locked .


Luggage compartment

To unlock

Press button q on rem ote control.

To op en

The luggage compartment of the Saloon /

Hatch is opened by pressing the button, and the luggag e com partment of the

Estate is opened by pulling the ca tc h beneath the handle.

Illum ination of control ind icator s indica tes that the b oot lid/tailgate is open.

For notes on open boot lid /tailgate - see p age 37.

Elec trica lly operated tailgate, Estate 3 – see next pag e.

To close

There is a handle on the inside of the boot lid/tailgate for closing the luggag e compa rtm ent.

With the Estate, do not operate the catch beneath the ha ndle when closing, otherwise the luggage compartment will be unloc ked again.

To lock

Press button p on the remote control

– or –

Press central locking b utton m in d riv er’s door when the doors are closed.


Electrically operated tailgate, Estate 3

In Estate vehicles w ith a n elec trica lly op erated tailgate, the tailga te can b e electrica lly opened and c losed after unlocking.

9

Warning

Mak e sure there is more tha n 2 m etres clearance b efore operating the electric tailgate. Observe the pivoting z one of the tailgate during operation and d o not enter the p iv oting zone.

To op en:

Unlock the vehic le by pressing button q on the rem ote control; the tailga te is opened electrica lly by pulling the catch beneath the handle.

– or –

Briefly press button r on the remote control to unlock the tailgate (the doors remain locked .) The tailga te is opened electrically by pulling the catch beneath the ha ndle.

– or –

Hold down button r on the rem ote control for more tha n 1 second (the doors remain locked); the tailgate is unlocked and opens electrically

– or –

6


With the key in the starter sw itc h and the handbrake applied, hold button x in the d riv er’s door depressed for app rox.

1 second; the tailgate opens electrically.

To close:

Hold d ow n button r on the remote control until the tailgate is closed.

– or –

Hold down button x in the driver’s door when the k ey is inserted in the starter switch until the tailga te is closed.

– or –

Press button F in the tailgate; the tailgate closes electrically.

To lock, press button p on the remote control.

Tailgate opening and closing is indicated by the rea r turn sig na l lig hts flashing three times.

If the luggage compartment is not closed within 20 minutes of opening, the button in the tailgate is deactivated.

Interruption of tailgate op ening/closing proced ure

The opening or closing p rocess is immediately interrupted by: briefly pressing button x in the driver’s door,

– or – button r on the remote control,

– or – the external button beneath the hand le,

– or – button F in the ta ilg ate.

The tailga te remains in this position for

10 second s a nd then slowly reopens.

Safety function

The tailgate has an obstruction detection fa cility. If the tailgate encounters resistance during the automatic closing movem ent, the closing procedure is stopped imm ediately and the tailgate is slowly op ened again.

Vehicles with towing equipment 3:

When tow ing a carava n/trailer, the tailg ate c annot be opera ted using button r on the rem ote control or button x in the driver’s d oor.

Fault in electrically op erated tailgate

If the electronic drive should fail, the tailg ate c an be op ened and closed manually, although more force is required to close the tailgate.

Opening the tailgate when the doors a re lock ed via the central locking system

If the doors are loc ked via the central lock ing system, the tailgate can be op ened by pressing button r on the rem ote control and pulling the catch beneath the handle.


Open boot lid , open tailgate

9

Warning

Do not drive with the boot lid or tailgate open or ajar, e.g . when transporting bulky objects, since toxic exhaust gas could penetra te the interior.

Also, the num ber p late of the Estate cannot be clearly read unless the lug gage compartment is closed.

Fitting accessories to the boot lid/tailgate will increase its weight. If it becom es too hea vy, the boot lid/tailgate w ill then not stay open.


Vauxhall alarm system

3

Monitors: z Doors, luggage compa rtm ent, bonnet, z Passenger compartment, z Vehicle tilt, e.g. if it is raised, z Ignition.

To activate

All doors, w indows, the sunroof 3 and the bonnet must b e closed. Press button p on the rem ote control.

If the ignition wa s switched on, the driver’s door m ust be opened and closed ag ain so that the anti-theft alarm system can be activated again.

Activation without monitoring of pa ssenger comp artment a nd vehicle tilt

Activate e.g. when animals are left in the vehicle.

1. Close boot lid/tailgate and bonnet.

2. Press b utton Ä; LED in button flashes

(maximum of 10 seconds).

3. Close doors.

4. Switch on anti-theft alarm system .

LED illuminates. After a pprox.

10 seconds, the system is activated without monitoring of the passenger compartment or vehicle tilt. LED fla shes until system is switched off.

Light emitting d iode (LED)

During the first 10 seconds of anti-theft alarm system activation: z LED illuminates z LED flashes quick ly

=

=

Test, switch-on d elay.

Door, luggag e com partment or bonnet op en, or system fault.

After the first 10 seconds of anti-theft alarm system activation: z LED flashes slow ly

= System switched on. z LED illuminates for approx.

1 second

= Switch-off function.

If a system fa ult occ urs, contact a work shop for assistance.


To deactivate

Press button q on the remote control

– or – turn on the ignition.

If there is a fault in the remote control, unlock vehicle as describ ed on p age 33.

If the alarm is triggered w hen the driv er’s door is opened, d eactivate the anti-theft alarm system by sw itc hing on the ignition.


Estate with electrically operated

tailgate 3 :

To open and close the lugga ge compartment when the anti-theft alarm system is active:

1. Briefly press button r on the remote control – lugg age compartment is unlocked (see page 34), and monitoring of the passenger c om partment and vehicle tilt is d isabled.

2. Open lug gage compartment – see pa ge 34.

3. After the luggage compartment is closed, monitoring of the passeng er compa rtm ent, luggage comp artm ent and v ehicle tilt is reactivated after a

5 minute d elay and the tailga te is locked. To override the delay, p ress button p on the rem ote control.

Note z Changes to the vehicle interior, such as the use of extra seat covers, could imp air the function of passeng er comp artm ent monitoring. z Disable passenger compartm ent monitoring if the vehicle interior is being hea ted.

Alarm

An alarm can be triggered w hilst the a ntitheft alarm system is active, indicated by: z an acoustic sig nal (horn) and z a v isual signal (hazard w arning lights).

The number of alarms and the d uration thereof are stipulated by law.

The alarm can be silenc ed b y pressing a button on the remote control or by switching on the ig nition. The anti-theft alarm system is d eactivated at the same tim e.

Ala rm siren with integrated b attery 3

The alarm siren monitors the on-board voltage network and triggers an ala rm if this network is manipulated (e.g . if the vehicle’s ba ttery is disconnected by unauthorised persons). The alarm siren ha s its own power supply and is therefore not dependent on the vehicle’s battery.

If the vehicle’s battery is to be disconnected (e.g. for maintenance w ork ), the alarm siren must be dea ctivated as follows: sw itch the ignition on then off, disconnect the vehicle’s battery within

15 seconds.

To switch off alarm siren:

Switc h ignition on then off.

Child safety locks

9

Warning

Use the child safety locks whenever children are oc cup ying the rear seats.

Disreg ard may lead to injuries or endanger life. Vehicle passengers must be informed accordingly.

Turn rotary knob nea r rear door lock from the v ertical position using key; door cannot be opened from inside.

Universal remote control in mirror housing

3

To op erate up to 3 different remotelyop erated systems (e.g . garage door, domestic alarm system, dom estic exterior lig hting).


The p rogram med universal remote control can replace the individual remote control units of the systems to be operated . Three buttons on the und ersid e of the mirror housing ca n be used to operate various systems.

Consult your Vauxhall Authorised Rep airer for details on comp atible system s.

9

Warning

Ensure that no persons, animals or objects are in the movement zone of the system to be opera ted (e.g. a garage door). Vehicle pa ssengers m ust be informed of the haz ards.

Basic program ming of the univer sa l remote control system

1. Switch on ignition.

2. When programming for the first time, press both outer buttons on the m irror housing , until the control ind ic ator along side the b uttons fla shes rapidly

(after approx. 20 seconds).

3. Hold the ma nual remote control unit at a distance of 0 to 30 c m from the control button area of the mirror housing.


4. Press the button on the manual remote control unit while pressing and holding the desired button of the univ ersal remote control.

5. The control indica tor in the mirror housing will flash slowly at first. As soon as it flashes rapidly, release b oth buttons. The universal remote control system is now programmed for the chosen system .

6. To prog ra mme other buttons with other system s, repeat steps 3 to 5.

If a system cannot be operated after rep eated programming, and the control indicator flashes ra pidly for a short time after the relevant button has been pressed and then illuminates for 2 seconds, the receiver may be equipped with a variable code system - see next column.

Prog ramm ing the universal remote control system for variable code systems

1. Perform b asic prog ra mming – see prev ious pag e.

2. Activate synchronisation m ode of system (see system manufac turer’s opera ting manual) and briefly press the pre-prog ra mmed button on the universal remote control three times within 30 sec onds.

3. The universal remote control system is now programm ed for v ariable c od e systems. To program me other systems for variable codes, repeat steps 1 and 2 for the other buttons on the universal rem ote control.

Using the universal remote control system

With the ignition on, press the required universal remote control b utton and the control indicator in the mirror housing will illuminate. The pre-programm ed system can now be operated using the universal remote control system .

Reprog ramm ing individual button settings

If a button that has already b een programm ed is to b e used for a different system, repeat steps 3 to 5 of the ba sic programm ing procedure described previously.

Clea ring all progra mmed button settings

Before selling the vehicle, it is a good id ea to erase button setting s.

Button setting s ca n only be erased all at once. It is not possible to erase ind iv idual button setting s. Buttons can, however, be individually reprogrammed - see

"Reprogramming indiv idua l button settings".

In order to erase the programm ing of all

3 buttons, press both outer buttons and release a s soon as the LED begins to flash

(after approx. 20 seconds). All button settings have now been clea red and can be programm ed a new at any time.


Note

Keep replac ed m anual tra nsmitters for possible reprogram ming. The manua l transm itters can also continue to be used.

If, after repeated a ttempts at execution of the a bove steps, a system cannot b e actuated with the universal remote control, seek the assistance of a workshop.

During programming, the vehicle should be within the range of the receiver. Under no circumstanc es should the vehicle be in the movement zone of a system (e.g . garage door).

Do not programme a system without an automatic safety stop (m anufactured before April 1982).

Take note of the system manufacturer’s safety instruc tions for drives and manual rem ote control units.

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting exterior mir rors 3

Ad justment using the four-way switch in the driver’s door: If the outer mirror sw itch

(1) is p ressed, the four-way switch opera tes the driver’s and front passenger’s mirrors 3. If the inner mirror switch (2) is pressed, it only operates the front passenger’s mirror.

The glass of the mirror is adjusted in the relev ant direction in accordance with the op eration of the four-way switch.

Elec trica l seat adjustment with

Memory function 3:

If the inner m irror switch (2) is pressed, the front passenger-side exterior mirror is pointed automatically at the rear tyres after rev erse g ear is eng aged, in order to assist parking (not if tow ing a carav an/ tra iler) 3.

Sw inging in exterior mirror

Manually: The exterior mirrors can be folded in by gently pressing the outer edge of the housing.

Electrically 3 (both mirror sw itches must not be latched into position):

Push four-way switch to the right: outside rear view mirrors swivel in.

Push four-way switch to the left: outside rear view mirrors swivel out.

Return the mirrors to the driving position before starting-off.

The mirrors can b e retra cted from the outside: Press button p on the remote control approx. 1 second . The m irrors will be extended the next time the vehicle is unlocked.

Swivelling only a llowed at speeds of up to

4 mph (7 km /h).


Automatic anti- dazzle exterior mirror 3 on the d river’s side

Dazzle from following v ehicles at night is autom atic ally reduc ed.

The mirror does not reduc e da zzle when: z the ig nition is sw itc hed off, z rev erse gear is eng aged or selector lever set to R, z the interior lights are on, z a d oor is open.

For the safety of pedestrians, the exterior mirrors will swing out of their normal mounting p osition if they are bumped with sufficient force. Reposition the m irror by applying slight pressure to the mirror housing.

Aspherical exterior mirror 3

The asp herical m irror g lass m akes the blind angle smaller. The curva ture mak es objects look smaller, making it more difficult to estimate how far away follow ing vehicles are.

Interior mirror

To adjust, swivel mirror housing .

Swivel lever on underside of m irror housing to reduce dazzle from following v ehicles at night.


Autom atic a nti-dazzle interior mir ror 3

Dazzle from following vehicles at night is automatically reduced .

The sensor is located at the bottom of the housing. In the c ase of vehic les with a p osition memory for electrically opera ted front seats 3 or a universal remote control 3, the sensor is located at the top right of the m irror g la ss.

The m irror d oes not reduce dazzle when: z the ignition is switched off, z reverse gear is engaged or selector lever set to R, z the interior lights a re on, z a door is open.

Electric windows

3

9

Warning

Take care when operating the electric windows. Risk of injury, especially for children. Vehic le occupants should be inform ed according ly.

If there are children on the rear seat, switch on the child safety system 3 for the elec tric wind ow s.

Keep a close watch on the windows when closing them. Ensure that nothing becomes trapped in them as they move.

The electric windows can be used: z with ignition on, z within 10 m inutes of switching ignition off, z within 10 m inutes of opening or closing the driver’s door, z within 10 m inutes of inserting or rem oving the ignition key.

Readiness for operation stops when the vehicle is lock ed.

Operation via 2 rock er buttons in the driver’s door. Additional rocker buttons in the front passenger’s d oor a nd the rear doors 3.

To operate window in stages, tap switch.

For autom atic opening or closing, keep switch pressed for slightly longer; to stop window m ovement, tap switch ag ain.


Vehicles with rea r electric wind ow s 3 have a slide switch b etween the buttons in the driver’s door z Up:

The front w indows ca n be operated using the b uttons. z Down:

The rear wind ows can be operated using the buttons.

Safety function

If the window glass encounters resistance above the middle of the window during automatic closing , it is immediately stop ped and the window op ened again.

If the windows do not move easily (e.g. on account of frost), keep pressing the switc h for the window in question until the window has been closed in stages.

Child sa fety system for r ear window s 3

Switch z in the driver’s door z Press (switch z illuminates in red): rear windows cannot be operated using the buttons in the rear d oors, z press again (switch z no longer illuminates in red ): rear w indows ca n be opera ted using the buttons in the rea r doors.

Closing window s from outside using the

remote control 3

The wind ow s c an be closed from outside using the rem ote control:

Depress the p button until the wind ow s are closed.

Autom atic c losing 3

See page 33.

Overload

If the wind ow s are rep eatedly operated at short interv als, the power supp ly is briefly cut off.

The system is protected by fuses in the fusebox – see page 246.

Fault

If the windows cannot be opened a nd closed automatically, activate the w indow electronic s as follows:

1. Close doors.


3. Window com pletely open.

4. Close window and press on button for at least 3 seconds.

5. Repeat for eac h wind ow .

Windows in rear doors

Turn crank 3 towards the front or rear.


Sunroof

3

9

Warning

Caution when opera ting the sunroof. Risk of injury, particula rly to children. Vehicle passeng ers must be informed accordingly.

Keep a close watch on the sliding roof when closing it. Ensure that nothing becom es trapped as it moves.

The electric sunroof can be operated z with ignition on, z within 10 minutes of sw itc hing ignition off, z within 10 minutes of opening or closing the driver’s door, z within 10 minutes of inserting or removing the ignition k ey.

Readiness for operation stops when the vehicle is locked.


Operated using rotary switch in the overhead control panel.

To open

Turn the rotary switch to any position between d a nd ü. The sunroof will automatically move to the desired position.

When the switch is in position ü , the sunroof is fully opened .

Com fort position

Set rotary switch to position f. With the roof in this position, w ind noise is reduc ed.

To close:

Turn rotary sw itc h to d.

To raise

Turn the rotary switc h to any position between d and e. The sunroof w ill autom atic ally m ov e to the d esired position.

When the rotary switch is in position e, the sunroof is fully raised.

To lower

Turn rotary switch to d.

Position memory

After the ignition has been switched on, the sunroof c an be autom atic ally returned to its last position b y briefly pressing the rotary sw itc h.

Safety func tion

If the sunroof encounters resistance during autom atic closing, it is im med ia tely stopped and opened again, as long as the vehicle is stationary.

9

Warning

If when the vehicle is being driven the sunroof encounters resistance during automatic closing, because of the higher closing forces inv olv ed the protectiv e func tion ca nnot be guaranteed, a nd there is a risk of injury.

If the sunroof mov ement is stiff, e.g. due to frost, turn rota ry switch to d a nd keep it pressed until the sunroof is closed.

Closing sunr oof from outside

To close the sunroof from outside with the remote control: Press button p until the sunroof is closed.

If the electric windows 3 are to be closed from outside the vehicle, but the sunroof is to be left op en, briefly press the rotary switch before sw itc hing off the ignition.

Autom atic closing 3

See page 33.


Sunshade

To red uce the sunlight in the interior with the sliding roof closed or raised.

Open or close sunshade as req uired.

When the sunroof is opened, the sunshade is also op ened.

Overload

If the system is overloaded, the power sup ply is automatically c ut off for a short time.

Fault

If the sunroof no longer assumes the desired position automatically, programme sunroof electronics as follow s:


2. Press the rotary switch until the sunroof is shut, then k eep it pressed for a t least a further 3 seconds.

3. Turn rotary switch to ü and keep it depressed until the sunroof is open.

4. Turn rotary switch to d and keep it depressed until the sunroof is c losed .

5. Turn rotary switch to e and leave there until the sunroof is fully raised.

6. Turn rotary switch to d and keep it depressed until the sunroof is c losed .

Electrically operated rear window blind

3

Reduces intensity of sunlig ht shining on to rear seats. Operation w ith ignition switched on.

To ra ise = Press N

To low er = Press N again

Do not operate blind if there are objects lying in front of the rear w indow.

Sunblinds for rear door windows

3

To reduc e sunlight a t the rear seats.

Pull the blind upw ards using the grip and eng age it at the top in the door frame.

50 Seats, interior

Seats, interior

Manually a djustable front sea ts ........ 50

Electrically a djustable front sea ts 3 .. 52

Head restraints .................................... 55

Armrest 3 between the front sea ts.... 57

Rear seat armrest ................................ 57

Travel Assistant 3 ............................... 58

Lug gage compartment extension ..... 65

Lug gage compartment cover 3......... 66

Safety net 3, Esta te............................. 67

Lashing eyes ........................................ 69

Reversible carpet 3 ............................. 69

FlexOrganizer 3................................... 69

Notes on loading the vehic le .............. 71

Three-stage safety system.................. 72

Three-point seat belts ......................... 72

Belt tensioners...................................... 73

Using the seat belts............................. 76

Child restraint systems 3 .................... 77

Airbag system ...................................... 80

Ciga rette lig hter 3 ............................... 93

Accessory sockets 3 ............................ 93

Ashtray ................................................. 94

Stowage comp artm ents...................... 95

Drink holders ........................................ 97

Sunvisors............................................... 97

Manually adjustable front seats

9

Warning

Never adjust seats during driving, as they can m ov e uncontrollab ly.

Imp ortant: Do not sit nea rer than

10 inches (25 cm) from the steering wheel, to perm it safe airba g deployment.

Adjust seat longitudinally

To adjust seat position, pull handle a t front of seat, move seat and then release ha ndle.

Ad justing the bac krest

To adjust, turn sid e handwheel on the seat while releasing the load on the b ackrest.

Move bac krest to suit sea ting position.

Seats, interior 51

Adjusting the seat height 3

To adjust height of sea t, op erate rear lever on outb oa rd sid e of seat.


Upwards: Seat higher

Downwards: Seat lower

To adjust seat incline 3


Upwards: Seat steeper

Dow nwa rd s: Seat flatter

Ad justing the lumb ar support 3

To adjust, activa te the lever on the bac krest, relieving pressure on the backrest as you d o so.

Adjust lum bar sup port to suit personal requirements.


To adjust thigh support 3 on the sports

sea ts 3

To adjust, press button in recessed grip located in the centre benea th the adjusting cushion and m ove the thigh support.

Adjust thigh support to suit personal req uirements.

Seat position

Ad just driver’s seat such that with the driver sitting upright the steering wheel is held in the area of its upper spokes with the driver’s arm s slightly bent.

Push front passenger’s seat as fa r back as possible.

The seat b ackrests must not be tilted too fa r back (recommend ed m aximum tilting angle ap prox. 25°).

9

Warning

Failure to observe the descriptions could lead to injuries whic h could be fata l.

Vehicle passeng ers must be informed accordingly before starting-off.

Electrically adjustable front seats

3

9

Warning

Care must be ta ken when operating the electric ally adjustable seats. There is a risk of injury, partic ularly for children, and a danger that articles could become tra pped .

Keep a close watch on the seats when adjusting them .

Vehic le pa ssengers m ust be inform ed accordingly.

Ad justment

The seat position can be a djusted by means of switches on the outb oa rd side of the seats.

Adjusting the inclination

Move switch 1 upwards/downwards at front.


Adjusting the longitudinal position

Move switch 1 forwards/backwards.

Height adjustment

Move switch 1 upwards/downwards at rear

Seat back rest adjustm ent

Turn switch 2 forwards/bac kwards.

Operate switch until desired sea t position is rea ched. Seat position – see pa ge 52.

After ad justing the seat, adjust height of seat b elt – see p age 76.

Electrically operated lumba r support 3 on driver’s seat

Ad just lumbar support using four-way switch on outboard side of driver’s seat.

Ad just lumbar support to suit p ersonal requirements.

Moving support up and down: press button up or down.

Increasing and decreasing sup port: press button forwards or back wards.

Thigh sup port 3 on driver’s seat

See pag e 52.

Seat position

Adjust driver’s sea t such that with the driver sitting upright the steering wheel is held in the area of its upper spokes with the driver’s arms slig htly bent.

Push front passeng er’s seat as far bac k as possible.

The seat back rests m ust not be tilted too far ba ck (recom mended maximum tilting angle approx. 25°).

9

Warning

Failure to observe the descriptions could lead to injuries which could be fatal.

Vehic le pa ssengers m ust be inform ed accordingly before starting-off.


Memory function 3 for electrically adjustable driver’s seat and exterior mirrors

Three different seat a nd mirror settings can be stored (e.g. for three drivers).

Readiness for operation z With ignition on, z within 10 m inutes of switching ignition off, z within 10 m inutes of opening or closing the driver’s door, z within 10 m inutes of inserting or rem oving the ignition key.

Readiness for operation stops when the vehicle is lock ed.

Storing settings

1. Adjust seat.

2. To adjust exterior mirror - see pages 6,

43.

3. Press m emory button M and the position button to be used (1, 2 or 3) simulta neously, and stora ge is ack nowledged by an acoustic signal.

Retriev ing settings

Keep position key 1, 2 or 3 pressed until the stored sea t and mirror positions have b een reached .

For reasons of safety, seat adjustm ent stops immediately if the p osition button is relea sed or one of the setting buttons is op erated.

Ad justments may only be performed with vehicle stationary.

Store and activ ate the setting s using the remote controls 3

When the vehicle is loc ked using the remote control the current driv er’s seat a nd exterior mirror positions are stored - see page 28.

The seat adjusting proc edure can be stopped immediately by operating a setting button.

Front passenger-side exterior m irror with

m irror par king a ssistanc e 3

See page 43.

Overload

If the seat setting is electrically overloaded, the power supply is automatically cut off for a short time.

The system is protected by fuses in the fusebox – see page 246.


Head restraints

Adjusting the front sea t head restraints and the outboard rear seat head

restraints 3

To adjust height, press button on side a nd adjust height.

In order to inc rease the size of the luggage compartment or if they are not being used , push rear head restraints d ow n as fa r as possible - see page 65.

When the seats a re occupied, ad just the height ac cord ing to the body size of the occupant.

To adjust the inc line, swivel the bottom edge of the head restraint forwards or backwards.

Ad justing the rear head restraints

integra ted in the rear seat ba ckrest 3

To adjust head restra ints, pull forwards with both hands and slide up or down.

To increa se the size of the luggage compa rtm ent or improve visibility, p ush hea d restraint down as far as possible if seat is unoccupied.

If seat is oc cup ied, pull head restraint upwards.


Head restraint position

The midd le of the head restraint should be at eye lev el. If this is not possible for extremely tall persons, set to highest position, and set to lowest position for small persons.

9

Warning

Disreg arding the instructions can lea d to injuries which could be fatal. Vehicle passengers must b e informed according ly before setting off.

Active head restra ints 3

In the event of a rear-impa ct, the a ctive head restraints tilt slightly forwards. The head is more effectiv ely supported by the head restraint and the da nger of whiplash in the neck area is reduced .

Ac tiv e hea d restra ints are identified by the lettering ACTIVE on the head restra int guid e sleeves.

Removing the head restraints

Press and release the two catches. Pull and remove the hea d restraint.

In order to increase the size of the luggage compa rtm ent or if they are not being used, push rear head restraints down as far as possible - see pag e 65.

Note

Only approved objects or com ponents should be attached to the head restraint of the unoccupied front passenger’s seat.


Armrest

3

between the front seats

The armrest can be pushed forwards. If the armrest is not req uired, push it back and fold it up.

The armrest c ontains a stowage compartment: to open, slide a rm rest b ack, press button at front and lift.

Rear seat armrest

The armrest can be folded down.

If the rear centre seat is being used or the rear sea t ba ckrests are b eing folded down, fold armrest up wards.


Travel Assistant

3

The Trav el Assistant contains z Arm rest z Stowage compartments z Waste container z Drink holders z Acc essory sockets. z Connection console e.g. for DVD p la yer 3 z Elec tric cool box z Foldaway tables z Tw in Audio (rear audio module) 3 or stowage compartm ent.

The Trav el Assistant is installed on a console above the c entre seat in the rear.

Installing the Travel Assistant

Swivel out retaining device on seat with strap.

Insert the two rear retainers of the connecting console in the retaining device on the seat and engage.

Swivel open and hold cover of front attachment points in floor in front of console.


Swiv el connecting console downwards and enga ge in a ttac hm ent points.

Swivel the locking lever downwards.

Check the locking p osition of the Travel

Assistant: The red mark (see Fig. 17566 J on next pa ge) must not be visib le.

Otherwise, lock using the key – see page

63, Fig. 17575 J.

Remove cap 3 from p lug at securing bracket.

To lock, insert Travel Assistant into rec esses in connecting console and slide ba ck as far as possible.


If it is correctly locked , the red m ark must no long er be visible in the window, otherwise the p rocedure must be rep eated.

9

Warning

If it is not c orrectly locked, the Travel

Assistant could be propelled forwards with considerab le force when hard braking occurs, risk of injury.

Dr ink holder a nd accessory sockets

Open the drink holder by pressing the marking.

Only a ccessories w ith maximum power consumption of 120 Watts m ust be connected to the accessory sockets. For notes – see page 93.

Stowage com partm ents

The lower stowage comp artment is opened by pressing the ma rk . The und ersid e of the compa rtm ent has an opening through which objects in the compartment can be raised.

The up per stowage compartment is located under the armrest. To open, press the button and fold the armrest upwa rds.


Connecting console for DVD player 3

When not in use, pull connecting console upwards, press button and slide downwards.

Swivel up the display holder, slide DVD player display into brack et from below a nd fix in position with brack et.

Maximum loa d: 1 kg.

Electric c ool box

To open, fold open the armrest together with the stowage compa rtm ent.


Switch on the cool box as needed. Fold away tab les

Fold arm rest upwards (1).

Use recessed grip to p ull foldawa y table up wards as fa r as it will go (1), swivel foldaw ay table forwards (2) a nd fold downwards (3).

Set required clearance b y adjusting longitudinal position of folda way table (4).

Swivel a rm rest down.


To fold away the tab le, swivel the armrest up.

Push the table forwards as far as it w ill go (1).

Fold the table upwards p ast the resistance point (2), swiv el it downwards and insert in the Travel Assista nt (3).

Swivel armrest down.

Disma ntling the Travel Assista nt

Open catch using key, red mark appears in window.


Pull the Tra vel Assistant to the front on the connecting console and remove.

Fit cap 3 to plug on securing bracket.

Press the locking lev er down, press the button on the front of the connecting console a nd sw iv el the locking lev er up wards.

Swivel the connecting console upwards and pull it from the retaining devic e on the seat.

Swivel the retaining device back on the seat.


Luggage compartment extension

Fold dow n the cover behind the arm rest

Fold down the a rm rest on to the seat cushion, pull the handle and tilt the cover forwards.

The outer seats can continue to be used for passengers.

9

Warning

The load must not obstruct operation of the pedals, handbrake and gearshift, or the freedom of movement of the driver.

Do not leave unsecured objects in the interior. Note instruc tion on pag e 71.

Enga ge the cover behind the centre armrest a udib ly in position.

Cover behind arm rest can be locked from lugg age com partment 3: turn hand le 90°:

Locked

Unlock ed

=

=

Ha ndle horizontal

Ha ndle vertical

Folding d own the rear seat ba ckrests

Push the rear head restraints right down.

Place the b elt buckles in storage pockets in the seat cushions.

Slid e front seat forwards slightly.

Remove Travel Assistant 3 - see page 60.

Unlock one or both rear sea t backrests by depressing p ushbuttons and fold down on to seat cushion.

Return front seat to desired position.


Restoring ba ckrest to an up right position

Audibly engage the rear seat ba ckrests.

There is a locking indicator on the release lev er. If the rear seat ba ckrests ha ve b een correctly locked the red indicator on the release levers must not be visib le.

Fold ing down the front passenger’s

seat 3

Push head restra int on front passenger’s seat down as far as it will g o.

Slide front passenger’s seat backw ards.

Fold front passenger’s seat forwards by ra ising release lever.

To restore, raise the release lever, restore the front seat back rest to an upright position and audibly engage.

Notes on loading

See pag e 71.

Luggage com partment cover

5-door Ha tch

Removing

Detach retaining stra ps from tailgate.

3

Pull cover from the side guides.

Fitting

Eng age cover in side guides and fold down.

Attach reta ining straps to tailgate.


Estate

To close

Pull lug gage compartment cover toward s rea r of vehicle using handle and hook into side retainers.

Do not place any heavy or sharp-edged objects on the cover.

To open

Remove luggag e compartment c ov er from side b ra ckets. It rolls up automatically.

Removing

Open luggage compartment cover.

Raise the release lever on the right of the lugg age compartment c ov er. Remove cover from the brackets by lifting first on the right, then on the left.

Fitting

Fit the lug gage compartment cover in the bracket on the left-hand side, fold up the relea se lever on the right-ha nd side, fit the lugg age compartment cover in the bracket on the right-hand side, engage and press the release lever closed.

Safety net

3

, Estate

The safety net can be fitted behind the rear seats or, with the rear seat ba ckrests fold ed down, behind the front seats.

Passengers must not be carried b ehind the safety net.

Fitting behind the rear seats

Remove the luggage com partment cover - see left c olumn.

Fit the ca ssette with rolled safety net into the side brack ets and enga ge b y twisting .


Extend the net from the cassette. The roof frame houses two installation op enings. Fit the net rod in the installation op ening on one side and then the other and engage by pushing forwards.

Fit the luggage compa rtm ent cover.

Removing

Remove the lug gage compartment cover.

Detach the safety net rod from the brackets in the roof frame.

Slide both latches inwards; push the cassette with rolled net back wards in the bracket, twist and rem ov e upw ards.

Fitting behind front seats

Fold b oth rear seat b ackrests. Place the rolled net on the floor behind the front seats in such a wa y that the c og rail in the slit on the net is to the rear.

Pull ea ch side hook from the cassette and attach it to an eye 3 in the vehicle floor.

Extend the net from the cassette. The roof frame houses tw o insta lla tion openings. Fit the net rod in the installation opening on one sid e and then the other and engag e by pushing forwards.

Removing

Detach the safety net rod from the brack ets in the roof frame.

Undo the side hooks from the eyes 3 in the vehicle floor.


Lashing eyes

In the luggage compartment, secure items being transported against slipping b y attaching lashing straps 3 or a luggage net 3.

Reversible carpet

3

Fold ing floor covering with two different surfaces. When transporting objec ts in the luggage compartment, fold reversible carpet with appropriate surface on top.

FlexOrganizer

3

Flexible system for dividing the luggage compartment or securing load s in an

Estate.

The components are housed in a stow age compartment at the rear in the load floor - see p age 96.

The system c onsists of: z Variable partition net, z Variable partition wa ll, z Partition rod, z Mesh pock ets for the side walls, z Hooks.

The components can be mounted in the two guide ra ils in the side walls of the lugg age compartment.

The illustrations show some possible uses.

Varia ble partition wa ll

See Fig. 17596 J. Press the rods of the partition w all together slightly and engage in the desired guid e rail opening s in the side walls. The rods can be eng aged in va rious positions.

Varia ble partition net

See Fig. 17597 J. Push rods of partition net together a little and insert into relev ant openings in side wall guide rails. The rods can b e engaged in various positions. The partition net ca n be installed horizontally or vertically at different heights.


Hooks and m esh pockets for the side walls

See Fig. 17598 J. Enga ge the hook s in the openings of the guide rails in the sid e walls as indicated in the illustration and turn 90° .

The m esh pockets ca n be hung from the hooks.

Rem oving

Press together the rods of the partition wall/net or the telescopic rods and rem ov e from the guide rails. Turn the hook s 90° and rem ov e.

FlexOrga nizer stowa ge

The FlexOrganizer components are housed in a stowa ge c om partment a t the rear in the load floor. To open, raise the ha nd le and open the flap – see p age 96,

Fig. 17611 J.

To stow a way, pull partition rods, pa rtition net rods a nd sepa ra te telescopic rod apart in the middle and fold the tw o ha lv es together - see Fig. 17599 J. Roll up partition and p artition net and place in compa rtm ent with other com ponents.

Close lid.

Notes on loading the vehicle

z Heav y objec ts in the lug gage com partment should be placed against the engaged rea r seat backrests or, if the rear seat backrests are folded down, against the front sea t backrests. If ob jects are to be stacked, the heav ier ob jects should be placed at the bottom.

Unsec ured objec ts in the lug gage com partment would be thrown forwards with great force in the event of heavy braking, for example. z Secure objects with lashing straps 3 atta ched to lashing eyes – see p age 69.

If heavy loads slip when the vehicle is braked heavily or driven around a bend, the hand ling of the v ehicle ma y change. z Saloon / H atch: loose objects in the lugga ge c om partment should be secured ag ainst slipping using a lugga ge net 3 – see page 69. z Estate: mount the sa fety net 3 when transporting objects in the luggag e com partment - see page 67. z Estate: Close luggage compartm ent cov er - see p age 67. z When transporting objects in the lugga ge c om partment the rear seats must be eng aged - see page 65. z Do not a llow the load to protrude ab ov e the upp er edge of the rear seat back rests, or above the upper ed ge of the front seat b ackrests if the rear seat back rests a re folded down. z The warning triangle 3 and first-aid kit 3 must always b e freely a ccessib le.

z Do not place any objects in front of the rea r window or on the instrument pa nel.

They are reflected in the glass, obstruct the driver’s view and will be thrown through the vehicle, for insta nce in the event of heavy b ra king.


z Objects m ust not be stored in the a irb ag inflation area, because they could cause injury if the airbag inflates. z The load must not obstruct the operation of the pedals, the handbrak e or the gears or restrict the driver’s freedom of movement. Do not place loose objects in the interior. z Do not drive with lugga ge compa rtm ent open when tra nsporting bulky objects, for exam ple, since toxic exhaust fumes could penetra te the interior. z Weights, payload and roof loa d - see page 293. z Driv ing with a roof load - see pages 184, 187, 218. A roof load increases the sensitivity of the vehicle to crosswinds and has a detrim ental effect on v ehicle ha nd ling ow ing to the vehicle’s hig her centre of gravity.

9

Warning

Failure to observe these descrip tions can lead to injuries which ma y be fatal.

Vehic le pa ssengers m ust be inform ed accordingly.


Three-stage safety system

Com prising: z Three-point seat belts. z Belt tensioners at the front seats. z Airbag systems for driver, front passenger and outboard rear seat occ upa nts 3 .

The three stages are activated in sequence depending on the sev erity of the accident: z The automatic seat belt locking d evices prevent the belt strap from b eing pulled out and thus ensure that the vehicle occ upa nts are retained in their seats. z The front seat belts are pulled down at the belt buckles. This mea ns the b elts fit snugly, the occupants are d ecelerated early with the vehic le and the body load ing is reduced . z The airbag systems are also triggered in the event of serious a ccidents and form a safety cushion for the occupa nts.

Depend ing on the severity of the accident, the front airbags inflate in two stages.

9

Warning

The airb ag systems serve to supplement the three-point seat b elts and belt tensioners. The seat b elts must therefore always be w orn. Disreg ard of these instructions m ay lead to injuries or end ang er life. Vehicle p assengers must be inform ed a ccord ingly.

Please read the instructions provided with the child restraint system.

Three-point seat belts

The vehicle is equipped with three-point seat belts with automatic retrac tors and locking d evices, allowing full freedom of body movement a lthough the spring tensioned seat belts always ensure a snug fit.

For information on correct seating position – see pages 52, 77, 82.

The seat belts lock during heavy acc eleration or deceleration.

9

Warning

Alwa ys wea r your seat belt, and that means a lso in urban traffic a nd when you are a rear sea t passeng er. It can save your life.

Also, pregnant women must alwa ys wear a seat belt – see pa ge 76.

In the event of an accident, persons not wearing seat belts endanger their fellow occupants and themselv es.

Control indicator X for the seat belt – see page 101.

Seat b elts are only intended for one person.

They are not suitable for anyone under

12 yea rs of age or under 150 cm tall.

For children up to 12 yea rs of ag e, w e recom mend the Vauxhall child restraint system – see page 77.


Belt force limiter s on the front seat belts reduce stresses on the body by releasing the seat belt gently during an impact. This allows the body to move slightly in a nticipation of the impact.

Testing the seat b elts

Check all parts of the b elt system from time to time for damage a nd to ensure function.

Replace dam aged parts. Following an accident, have the seat belts and actuated belt tensioners repla ced by a work shop.

Do not m ake alterations to the seat b elts, their anchora ges, their automa tic retractors and the belt buckles.

Do not d amage the seat belt with sharp ob jects, and d o not g et it trapp ed.

Belt tensioners

The front seat belt systems are fitted with belt tensioners. The seat belts are pulled down and tensioned at the belt b uck les in the event of frontal and rear collisions, depending on the severity of the accident.

This tensions the sea t belts.


Actua tion of belt tensioners

Actuation of belt tensioners is indicated by continuous illumination of control indicator v - see next colum n.

If the belt tensioners are triggered, they must be replaced by a workshop.

Imp ortant information - see page 73.

Control ind icator v for belt tensioners

The opera tion of the belt tensioners is electronically monitored together with the airbag systems and indicated on the instrument cluster by the control indica tor v. When the ignition is switched on, the control ind icator illuminates for approx. 4 seconds. If it does not illuminate, does not go off after 4 seconds or illuminates whilst driving, there is a fa ult in the belt tensioner system or the airbag systems - see page 86. The belt tensioner or the airbag systems may not a ctiv ate if an accident oc curs.

Deploym ent of the belt tensioners is indica ted b y continuous illum ination of v.

9

Warning

Have the c ause of the fault elim inated immediately by a workshop.

The system’s integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to b e q uick ly rem edied.

If c ontrol indicator v in the instrument cluster fails, for reasons of safety, the text

AIrbAG app ears on the odometer display.

Pressing the reset button will cause the text to disappear. It then reapp ears on the odometer display 10 sec onds later.

Im portant z Do not fit ac cessories not spec ifically released for your vehicle type or store ob jects in the belt tensioner operating area (in the area of the belt b uc kles) d ue to the risk of injury in the event the belt tensioners are triggered. z Do not m ake any modifications to the com ponents of the belt tensioners, a s this will render the vehicle unroadworthy.

9

Warning

Inc orrect handling (e.g. removal or fitting of seat belts or belt buckles) can trigg er the belt tensioners with risk of injury. z The belt tensioner and airbag system control electronics can be found in the centre console area . In order to avoid malfunctions, d o not store magnetic objec ts in this area. z When using the rea r seats, mak e sure that the components of the front seat belts are not damaged by shoes or other objec ts. Do not a llow dirt to enter the automatic sea t belt retractor.


z We recom mend that you have the front seats removed by a w orkshop in the event of actuation of the belt tensioners.

z The belt tensioners trigger once only, ind ic ated b y the lighting of the control ind ic ator v. Have a work shop replace trig gered belt tensioners. z When disposing of the vehicle, the sa fety instructions given for this must be observed . Ta ke the vehicle to a recycling company for disposal.


Using the seat belts

Fitting seat belts

Pull the seat belt out of the retractor and place it across the body, mak ing sure it is not twisted.

Insert the la tch plate into the buckle. The front sea t b ackrest must not be tilted back too far or the seat belt will not op erate properly. The recommended angle of inclina tion is 25° . Mak e sure that the lap belt is not twisted and that it fits snugly across the body. Tension the belt frequently whilst d riv ing by tugging the diagonal pa rt of the belt.

9

Warning

On pregna nt women in particular, the lap belt must be positioned a s low as possible across the pelvis so as not to put too much pressure on the abdomen.

Bulk y clothing will impede the snug fit of the seat b elt. The seat belt must not be placed over hard or break able ob jects in the pockets of your clothing (e.g. p ens, keys, spectacles) as this may cause injury.

Do not p lace any objects, such as ha ndb ags or mobile telephones, between the seat b elt and your body.

Height adjustm ent

Height adjustm ent of upper anc horage point for front seat belts:

1. Pull out the seat belt slightly.

2. Front seat belts: Push the button down or push the belt g uide up.

Rear sea t belts: Press the belt guide and push up or d ow n.

3. Set desired height.

4. Allow belt g uide to audibly engage.

Do not adjust height whilst driving.

Adjust height such that the seat belt passes over the wearer’s shoulder and rests against the shoulder. It must not pass over the neck or upper arm.

Rem oving the b elt

To remove the seat belt , press the red button on the catch; the seat belt retracts by itself.


Child restraint systems

3

When using a child restraint system, follow the instructions for installation and use.

The country in w hich you are trav elling ma y not perm it the use of child restraint systems on certain seats. Always comply with the loc al or national regulations.

Selecting the right system

Your child should travel facing backw ards in the vehicle for as long as p ossible. A child has a very weak cervical spinal colum n and in the event of an accident is less likely to suffer injury in a rea r-facing, semi-lying position than if sea ted upright.

9

Warning

Never ca rry child restraint systems on your lap, risk of fatal injury.


Permissible options for fitting a child restraint

Weight and age class

Group 0:

up to 10 kg or approx.

10 months

Group 0+: up to 13 kg or approx.

2 years

Group I:

2)

9 to 18 kg or approx.

8 months to

4 years

Group II:


3 to 7 years

Group III:


6 to 12 years

On front p assenger’s seat

B 1 , +

1)

On outboard rear seats

U, +

On centre rea r sea t

U

B

B

1

2

= Limited, only with seat occupancy recognition and Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders.

If the child restraint system is being secured using a three-point seat belt, m ove seat height adjustment 3 to upperm ost position. Move front passenger’s sea t as far back as possible and move front passenger’s seat b elt anchorage point to lowest position.

= Limited, only with seat occupancy recognition and Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders.

B 2 , + U, + U

If the child restraint system is being secured using a three-point seat belt, m ove seat height adjustment 3 to upperm ost position. Move front passenger’s sea t as far back as possible so that vehicle sa fety b elt

X U U runs from anchorage point towards the front.

1)

2)

For reas ons o f safety, w e recom mend that the child restraint be installed o n one of th e o utboard rear seats.

We reco mmen d the use of each system u ntil the child reaches the upper weight lim it.

U = Can b e used universally in combination with a three-point seat belt.

+ = Vehicle sea t available with ISOFIX fixings. When using ISOFIX, only

ISOFIX child restra int system s approved for the v ehicle may b e used.

X = No child restraint system permitted in this weight class.

Note z Children under 12 years or under 150 cm tall should only travel in an appropriate child restraint. z When transporting children, use the child restraint systems suitable for the child’s weight. z Ensure tha t the child restraint system has been correctly fitted - see instruc tions provided with child restraint system. z The covers of the Vauxhall child restraint system can be wiped clean. z Do not stic k anything on the child restraint systems a nd do not cover them with any other materia ls. z Only allow the c hild to enter and exit on the side of the vehicle facing aw ay from the road . z A child restraint system whic h has been sub jected to stress in an a ccident must be rep la ced. z Secure or remove child restra int systems carried in the v ehicle when not in use.


Mounting brackets 3 for IS OFIX child restraint systems

The brackets located between the backrest and seat cushion are used for mounting

ISOFIX child restraint systems.

Plea se follow the instructions acc om panying the ISOFIX child restraint system.

Only ISOFIX child restraint systems app rov ed for the vehicle may be used.


Airbag system

The a irb ag system c onsists of several separate systems.

Front airb ag system

The front airbag system will be triggered in the event of a serious ac cident involving a frontal impact and forms safety cushions for the driver and front passenger. The forward movement of the driver and front passenger is checked and the risk of injuries to the upper body a nd head are thereby substantially reduced.

Side airb ag system 3

The sid e airbag is triggered in the event of a side-on c ollision to form a safety cushion for the driver or front passenger in the respective door area. This substantially reduces the risk of injury to the upp er body and pelv is.

Cur tain airbag system 3

The curtain a irba g system triggers in the event of a side-on collision and provides a safety barrier in the head area on the respective side of the v ehicle. This red uces the risk of injury to the head considera bly in the event of a side-on collision.

Airbag system

Front airb ag

The front airbag system is identified by the word AIRBAG on the steering wheel and above the glov e c om partment.

The front airbag system comprises: z an airbag with inflator in the steering wheel a nd a second one behind the trim panel ab ov e the glove compartment, z control electronics w ith im pact sensors, z control indicator for airbag systems v in instrum ent cluster, z seat occ upa ncy rec og nition 3, z the control indicator for Va uxha ll child restraint systems y with tra nsponders 3 in the od om eter displa y.

The front airb ag system will be trigg ered : z depending on the severity of the accident, z depending on the type of impact, z within the range shown in the illustration, z indep endent of side airbag a nd curta in airbag system 3.


Exception:

Front p assenger’s seat with seat occupancy recognition system 3. The seat occupancy recognition system dea ctivates the front and side airbags 3 on the front passenger’s side if the front passenger’s seat is unoccupied or a Vauxhall child restraint system w ith transponders 3 has been fitted to the front passenger’s seat.

Seat occupancy recognition - see pag e 87.

Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 - see page 78.

Examples of events triggering the front airbag system: z Impact against a non-yielding obstacle: the front airbags are trigg ered at low vehicle speed. z Impact against a yield ing obstacle:

(such as another vehicle): the front airbags are only triggered at a hig her vehicle speed.


When trigg ered , the front airbags inflate in milliseconds to form a safety cushion for the d riv er and front passenger. The forward movement of the front seat occupants is c hecked, thereby sub stantially reducing the risk of injury to the upp er body and hea d.

No im pairment of view will occur, because the a irb ags inflate and deflate so quickly.

9

Warning

The front airbag system provides optimum p rotection when the seat, back rest a nd head restraint are correctly adjusted: Adjust the driver’s seat according to the occupant’s height suc h that with the driver sitting upright the steering wheel is held in the a rea of its upper sp ok es with the d riv er’s arms slightly bent. The front passeng er’s seat should b e as far b ack as possible, w ith the backrest upright – see p ages 3, 52.

Do not place the head, b od y, hands or feet on the c ov ers of the airbag systems.

Do not place any objects in the area in which the airb ags inflate. Im portant inform ation - see page 89.

9

Warning

The three-point seat belt must b e correctly fitted – see pag e 76.

The front airbag system will not be triggered in the ev ent of: z the ignition being switched off, z minor frontal collisions, z accidents in which the vehicle overturns, z collisions involving a side or rear-imp act, tha t is to say, if it w ould not b e of b enefit to the occupants.


9

Warning

Seat belts m ust therefore a lways be worn.

The front a irb ag system serv es to supplement the three-point seat belts. If you do not wea r your seat belt you risk being seriously injured, or even thrown from the vehic le, in the ev ent of an accident.

In the event of an a ccident the seat belt helps to keep you in the correct seating position, so tha t the front airbag system can provid e you with effective p rotection.

In add ition, the front a irb ag system w ill not be trig gered for the front passenger’s seat in model v ariants with seat occupancy recognition 3 if: z the front passenger’s seat is unoccupied, z there is a prop erly fitted Va uxha ll child restraint system with transponders 3 .

Seat oc cup ancy recognition – see page 87. Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 – see page 77.

Side airb ag 3

The side a irb ag system is identified by the word AIRBAG on the outb oa rd sides of the front seat backrests.

The side a irb ag system c om prises: z an airbag with infla tor in the back of the driver’s and front passenger’s seat respectively, z the control electronics, z the side-impact sensors, z control indicator for airb ag systems v in instrument cluster, z seat occ upa ncy rec og nition 3, z the control indicator for Va uxha ll child restraint systems y with transponders 3 in the od om eter displa y.

The side airbag system will be triggered: z depending on the sev erity of the accident, z depending on the type of im pact, z within the range shown in the illustration on the centre d oor pillar of the driver’s or front passenger’s side, z ind epend ently of the front airbag system.

Exception:

Front p assenger’s seat with seat occupancy recognition system 3. The seat occupancy recognition system dea ctivates the front and side airbags 3 on the front passenger’s side if the front passenger’s seat is unoccupied or a Vauxhall child restraint system w ith transponders 3 has been fitted to the front passenger’s seat.

Seat occupancy recognition - see pag e 87.

Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 - see pag e 78.


When triggered, the side a irba g infla tes within milliseconds to form a safety cushion for the driver or front passeng er in the respective door area. This substantially red uces the risk of injury to the upper body and pelvis in the event of a side-on collision.

9

Warning

There must be no objects in the area in which the airb ag inflates or in the a rea between the ba ckrests and the v ehicle body. Do not place the hand s or arms on the covers of the airba g systems.

Imp ortant information – see page 89.

The three-point sea t b elt must a lw ays be correctly fitted – see page 76.

The side airba gs will not be triggered in the event of: z the ig nition being sw itched off, z fronta l collisions, z accidents in which the v ehicle overturns, z collisions involving a rear-impact, z collisions involving a side-impact outside the passenger cell.

In ad dition, the sid e airbag system will not be triggered for the front pa ssenger’s seat in model variants with seat occupancy recognition 3 if: z the front pa ssenger’s seat is unoccupied, z there is a properly fitted Vauxhall child restra int system with transponders 3.

Seat occup ancy recognition – see page 87.

Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 – see page 77.


Curtain airb ag 3

The c urtain airbag system is identified by the w ord AIRBAG on the roof pillar trim.

The c urtain airbag system comp rises: z an airbag with inflator in the roof frame on the driver’s and front p assenger’s sid e respectively, z the control elec tronics, z the side-impa ct sensors, z the control indica tor for airba g system s v in the instrument.

The curtain airbag system will be triggered: z depending on the severity of the accident, z depending on the type of impact, z within the ra ng e shown in the illustration on the c entre door p illar of the d riv er’s or front passenger’s sid e, z together with the side airbag system, z irrespectiv e of sea t occupancy rec og nition, z indep endently of the front airbag system.

When the curtain a irb ag is triggered it inflates within milliseconds and provides a safety barrier in the head area on the respective side of the v ehicle. This red uces the risk of injury to the head considera bly in the event of a side-imp act.


9

Warning

There m ust be no objects in the area in which the airbag inflates. Do not place the hands or arms on the covers of the airb ag systems. Important information – see pa ge 89.

The three-point seat belt m ust always be correctly fitted – see page 76.

The curtain airbags will not be triggered in the event of: z the ignition b eing switched off, z frontal collisions, z accidents in whic h the vehicle overturns, z collisions involving a rear-impa ct, z collisions inv olv ing a side-impa ct outside the passenger c ell.

Control ind icator v for airbag systems

The opera tion of the airbag systems is electronically monitored together with the seat occupancy recognition system s 3 and the belt tensioners and indicated on the instrument cluster by the control indica tor v. When the ignition is switched on, the control ind icator illuminates for approx. 4 seconds. If it does not illuminate, does not go off after 4 seconds or illuminates whilst driving, there is a fa ult in the airbag systems, the sea t occupancy recognition system 3 or the b elt tensioners

- see page 74. The systems may not activate if an accident occurs.

Deploym ent of the airba gs is indicated by continuous illumination of v.

9

Warning

Have the c ause of the fault elim inated immediately by a workshop.


If c ontrol indicator v in the instrument cluster fails, for reasons of safety, the text

AIrbAG app ears on the odometer display.

The text is ac knowledged by pressing the reset button. It then disappears from the odometer display 10 sec onds later.

Seat oc cupancy recognition 3

The seat occupancy recognition system deactivates the front and side airbags for the front passenger’s sea t if the front passenger’s sea t is not occupied or a

Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 is fitted on the front passenger’s sea t. The curtain airbag system 3 rem ains activ ated.

The c ontrol indicator for seat occupancy recognition y is located in the odometer display. If control indicator y illuminates for approx. 4 seconds when the ignition is switched on, the vehicle is eq uipp ed w ith seat occupancy recognition; see next page, Fig. S 14742.

If a Vauxhall c hild restra int system with transponders 3 is fitted, the control indicator y illuminates continuously after the ig nition is switched on as soon as the system has detected the child restraint system. Only then may the child restraint system with transpond ers 3 be used on the passenger’s sea t.

Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition can also b e identified by the stick er on the side of the instrum ent panel - see illustration a bove.

Vauxhall c hild restraint system s w ith tra nsponders 3 are automatically detected if correctly fitted to the front passenger’s seat. When these child restra int system s a re being used on the front passenger’s seat, the front and side airbag systems for the front passenger’s seat are dea ctiv ated. The curtain airbag system remains ac tiv ated. Pay attention to control indicator seat y for occ upa nc y recognition 3 - see page 88.


9

Warning

Only Vauxhall child restraint systems with tra nsponders 3 can be fitted on the front passeng er’s seat. Use of systems w ithout tra nsponders poses a risk of fatal injury.

Vauxhall child restraint systems with transponders 3 can b e identified by a sticker.


Control indica tor

restraint system s with transponders 3

The p resence of a Vauxhall child restraint system w ith transponders 3 is indicated after the ignition has been switched on by continuous illumination of the c ontrol indicator y y for Vauxhall child

in the od om eter disp la y, as soon a s the seat occupancy recognition system has detected the child restraint system.

If control indicator y does not illum inate whilst driving, the front and sid e airba gs for the front p assenger’s seat are not deactiv ated a nd there is a risk of fa ta l injury to the child. Fit the child restraint systems on the rear seat. Have the cause of the fault eliminated by a workshop.

If the child restraint system is not correc tly fitted or the transponders are defective, the control indic ator flashes. Check that child restraint system is correc tly fitted. For fitting child restraint system with tra nsponders 3 - see instructions provided with child restraint system .

If the control indicator flashes when the child restraint system with transponders 3 is c orrectly fitted, there is a fault with risk of injury to the c hild. Fit the child restraint system on the rear seat. Have the cause of the fa ult eliminated by a workshop.

If no Vauxhall child restraint system w ith transponders 3 is fitted, the control indicator must not illum inate or flash, as the front passenger’s a irb ag systems would not deploy. H ave the cause of the fault elim inated by a workshop.

9

Warning

If the Vauxhall child restraint system with tra nsponders 3 ha s b een fitted according to the instructions, control ind ic ator y for Vauxhall c hild restra int systems with transponders must illuminate in the odom eter display when the ignition is switched on.

If the control indica tor does not illuminate whilst driving, the front passeng er’s airbag systems are not deactivated and there is a risk of fatal injury. In this ca se fit child restraint systems on the rea r seat.

Have the ca use of the fault eliminated by a workshop .

Im portant z Do not fit accessories or place objects in the expansion zone of the airbag system s - risk of injury if a irb ags are deployed. z Do not p la ce a ny objects between the airb ag systems and the vehicle occ upa nts; risk of injury.

9

Warning

Nev er carry child restraint systems or other objects on your lap - risk of fatal injury. z Use the hooks in the roof frame only to hang up light articles of clothing or c oa t hangers. Do not place any objects in the pockets of the hanging items – risk of injury. z The airb ag systems and b elt tensioner control electronics can be found in the centre console area . In order to avoid malfunctions, d o not store magnetic objec ts in this area. z Do not stic k anything on the steering wheel, instrum ent panel, front seat back rests or roof frame in the v icinity of the airb ags, or on the front passenger’s seat cushion, or cover any of those areas with other m aterials. z Use only a dry cloth or Interior/

Upholstery Cleaner to clean the steering wheel, instrum ent panel, front seat back rests, roof frame and seat cushion of the front passenger’s seat. Do not use any aggressiv e c leaning agents. z Only protective covers whic h are approved for your v ehicle with side airbag 3 ma y be fitted on the front seats. When fitting the protective covers, mak e sure that the airbag units on the outboard sides of the front seat back rests a re not covered.


z The airbag systems are triggered ind epend ently of each other based on the severity of the ac cident and the type of impa ct. The side airbag system 3 and the curtain airbag system 3 a re trig gered together. See seat occupancy recognition on page 87 for excep tions.

z Each a irb ag deploys once only. Have a workshop replace dep loyed airbags immediately. z The speeds, directions of movement and deformation properties of the vehic les, and the p roperties of the obstacle conc erned, determ ine the severity of the accident and triggering of the airbags.

The degree of dama ge to your vehicle and the resulting repair costs alone are not indica tiv e that the criteria for trig gering of the airb ags were met.


z Do not p erform any a lterations on the com ponents of the airbag system, as this would render the vehic le unroadworthy.

9

Warning

The systems can be triggered ab ruptly and cause injury if they are handled im properly.

z We recom mend hav ing the steering wheel, the instrument p anel, all panelling parts, the door seals, the hand les and the seats rem ov ed by a workshop. z When disposing of the vehicle, the safety instruc tions given for this must be ob served. Tak e the vehicle to a recycling com pany for disposa l. z Persons weighing less than 35 kg should only tra vel on the rear seats. This does not ap ply to children who are trav elling in c hild restra int system s w ith transponders 3. z In v ehicles with seat occ upa ncy rec og nition 3, do not place any heavy objec ts on the front passenger’s seat otherwise the airbag system s for the front p assenger’s seat may b e triggered in the event of an accident. z In v ehicles with seat occ upa ncy rec og nition 3, to prev ent malfunctions do not use protective c ov ers or extra seat cushions on the front passeng er’s seat. z In order to prev ent malfunctions when using a Vauxhall child restraint system with transp onders 3 on the front passenger’s seat, no objects (e.g. plastic sheet, stick ers or heated mats) may be placed under the child restraint system.

9

Warning

Child restraint system s a s well as other objec ts m ust nev er be carried on the lap of passengers; risk of fatal injury. If carried in this way, child restraint systems with transponders 3 in v ehicles with seat occupancy recognition 3 could lead to front passenger’s airbag system s not being triggered in the event of an accident.

Use of child restra int systems 3 on the front p assenger’s seat in vehic les w ith airbag system s, but without sea t

occup ancy recog nition 3


9

Warning

Vehicles with front passenger’s airbag and no side airbag 3:

Child restraints facing the rear of the vehicle must not be fitted to the front passenger’s seat; risk of fatal injury.

Child restraints facing the front

(child restraints for weight ranges I, II and

III – see page 77) are permitted on the front p assenger’s seat, providing that it is pushed back as far as possible and the backrest has been adjusted so that the la p belt fits snug ly.

Vehicles with front passeng er’s airbag can be recognised by the word AIRBAG above the glove compartment and the warning sticker on the sunvisor on the front passenger’s sid e - see Fig. 17424 T on previous pag e. In some m odel variants, the warning sticker may be on the side of the instrument panel - see Fig . 17118 T.

9

Warning

Vehic les with sid e airbag 3: No child restra int system 3 m ay be fitted on the front passenger’s seat; risk of fatal injury.

A v ehicle with side airbags can b e identified by the word A IRBAG on the outboard sides of the front seat b ackrests.

Seat occupancy recognition 3 – see page 87.


Use of child restraint systems 3 on front passenger’s seat in vehicles with airbag

systems 3 and with seat occupancy

recognition 3

9

Warning

Only Vauxhall child restraint systems with transponders 3 can b e fitted on the front passenger’s seat. Use of systems without transponders poses a risk of fatal injury.

Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition can be identified by control ind icator y in the odometer display. If the control indica tor illuminates for a pprox. 4 second s when the ignition is switc hed on, the vehicle is equipped with seat occupancy recognition - see page 87.

Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition can also be id entified b y the sticker on the side of the instrument p anel - see Fig. 17625 J.

The seat occupa ncy recognition system detects Vauxhall child restraint systems with tra nsponders 3 and sw itc hes off the front and side a irb ag systems for the front passenger’s seat. The curtain airbag system remains a ctiv ated. Seat occupancy recognition – see page 87.

Vauxhall child restraint systems with transponders 3 can b e identified by a sticker or badge - see illustration.


Cigarette lighter

3

The c ig arette lighter is in the front centre console.

Press in cigarette lighter with ignition switched on. Switches off autom atically when elem ent is glowing. Withdraw cigarette lighter.

Accessory sockets

3

The soc ket in the centre console and the cigarette lighter socket can be used to connect electrical accessories. The sockets are ready for operation when the ignition is switched on. If the eng ine is not running the battery will be discharged. More acc essory sockets 3 can be found in the centre console beneath the rear air vents 3 and in the Travel Assista nt 3.

Estates have an additional accessory socket 3 to the left in the luggage compartment next to the lug gage compartment lig hting.

Do not dam age the soc kets by using unsuitable plugs.

The maximum power c onsumption of electrical ac cessories m ust not exceed

120 w atts.

Do not connect any current-delivering acc essories, e.g. electrical charging devices or b atteries.

Electrical ac cessories connected to the socket must c om ply with the electromagnetic compatibility requirements laid down in DIN VDE 40 839, otherwise v ehicle malfunctions may oc cur.

Accessory sockets in the Travel

Assistant 3 – see page 60.


Ashtray

To be used only for ash and not for combustible rubbish.

9

Warning

Failure to observe these descriptions can lead to injuries which may be fatal.

Vehicle passengers must be informed according ly.

Front ashtray

The a sh tray is in the front c entre console beneath a cov er.

The cover opens when pressed at the point indicated .

To empty, grip b oth sides of the ashtray insert a t the points illustrated and pull up wards.

Rear a shtray 3

The ash tray is in the rea r centre console.

The cover op ens when pressed a t the point indicated.

To empty, open the ashtray, press the spring (arrow ) and pull out the ashtray.


Stowage compartments

Glove com partment

To open, pull hand le upwards.

At the front of the opened cover there is a pen holder.

The g lov e com partment should remain closed w hilst driving.

Cooled glove compartment 3 – see page 143.

Centre console stow age comp artm ent 3

Div ision of the stowage compartment can be changed by moving the pa rtition in the side guides.

Stowage compa rtment in the r oof lining 3

To open, press the point indicated.

The maximum permitted load on the stowage compartment is 0.4 kg .

The stowage com partment must be closed whilst driving.


Stow age com partm ents in the lug gage com partm ent

To access press down b ar and open the cover.

Warning triangle ¨ 3 and first-aid k it + 3 stow age – see page 234.

Stowing the sp are wheel – see page 236.

Jac k and v ehicle tools stow age – see page 238.

Estates have an additional stowage compartment in the load comp artm ent floor.

To op en, pull the release lever a nd open the flap.

When opening , ensure that the hinge a t the fold is opened and that the entire floor covering is not raised.

Drink holders

Drink holders, front 3

The d rink holder can be found between the front seats in the centre console: slid e cov er 3 open.

Dr inks holders, rear 3

The drink holder can be found beneath the centre seat: pressing front edge moves drink hold er out.

Drink holder in Travel Assistant 3 – see p age 60.


Sunvisors

Use the sunvisor to protect from glare b y pulling it d ow n and swivelling it to the side.

During driving, the mirrors 3 in the sunv isors should be covered.

98 Instruments, controls

Instruments, controls

Control indicators

The control indica tors described here are not present in all vehic les. The descriptions however, apply to all instrument versions.

The control indica tor colours mean: z Red z Yellow z Green z Blue

Danger, important rem ind er

Warning , note, fault

On confirmation

On confirmation

Control indicators ................................ 98

Instrument display............................... 105

Information display ............................. 108

Warning buzzers.................................. 126

Wind screen wiper ................................ 126

O

Turn sig nal lig hts

Control indica tor flashes green.

The control indica tor flashes on the respective side.

Both c ontrol indicators flash with the ha zard warning lights on.

Rapid flashes: A turn sig nal lig ht or the related fuse has failed, fa ilure of turn signal lig ht on the caravan/trailer 3 .

Turn signal lights – see page 130.

Change bulb s - see page 252.

Fuses - see page 246.

I

Engine oil pressure

Control indicator illuminates red.

It illuminates w hen the ignition is switched on and extinguishes shortly after the eng ine starts.

Illuminates when the eng ine is running:

Eng ine lubrication m ay be interrup ted. This ma y result in damage to the engine and/or locking of the drive wheels:

1. Move out of the flow of traffic a s quickly as possible without impeding other vehicles.

2. Depress clutch.

3. Shift manual transm ission or

Easytronic 3 into neutral; for a utomatic tra nsmission 3 , set selector lever to N.

4. Switch off ignition.

9

Warning

When the eng ine is off, considerably more force is needed to brake and steer.

Do not remove key until v ehicle has com e to a standstill, otherw ise the steering colum n lock could engage unexpectedly.

Check oil level before contac ting a workshop.

R

Brake system , clutch system

Control indicator illuminates or flashes red.

It illuminates when the ignition is switched on if the handbrak e is applied or if the brake and c lutch fluid level is too low. For further instructions – see pages 209, 276.

For vehicles with Ea sytronic 3 , the c ontrol indica tor flashes for a few seconds when the ig nition is turned off if the handbrak e is not a pplied.

9

Warning

Illuminate if the handbrake has been released: stop vehicle and interrupt journey im mediately. Contact a workshop for assista nce.

Instruments, controls 99

p

Alterna tor

Control indic ator illuminates or flashes red.

It illuminates w hen the ignition is switched on and extinguishes shortly after the eng ine starts.

Flashes while starting:

Battery voltage too low. H ave electrica l system tested b y a work shop.


Stop and switch engine off. Battery w ill not be charged. Eng ine cooling may be interrupted . Effec t of bra ke serv o unit may stop in vehicles with diesel engines.

Check d riv e b elt condition and tensioning before contacting a w orkshop for assistance. v

Airb ag system s 3 , belt tensioners 3



Fault in the airbag systems, seat occupancy recognition 3 or belt tensioners

- see pa ges 74, 86.


W

Coola nt temperature

Control indicator illum inates red.

Illuminates when the engine is running:

Stop a nd turn engine off, coolant tem perature is too high. Risk of engine dam age. For coola nt temp erature display - see page 106. Check coola nt level - see page 275.

8

Exterior lights

Control indicator illum inates green.

It is illuminated when the exterior lighting is on – see pa ge 128.

1

SPORT mode of a utomatic transmission 3

Control indica tor is illuminated in the tra nsmission display if the SPORT mode 3 is selected .

Further inform ation - see pages 178, 179.

T

Winter program me of autom atic

transmission 3 or Easytronic 3

Control indica tor illuminates in tra nsmission display with Winter prog ra mme engaged.

Further inform ation – see pages 172, 180.

(

Door open


It illuminates w ith the doors open. j

Easytronic 3, star ting the engine

Control indicator illuminates yellow .

It illuminates if the footbrak e is not depressed. The indicator exting uishes as soon as the footb ra ke is depressed. The eng ine can only b e started with the footbrake dep ressed - see page 169. t

Bulb rep lacement 3


It illuminates if a bulb is defective. Check the lights and replace any defective bulbs.

Replacing bulbs - see page 252.

s

Open luggage com partm ent


It illuminates with the lug gage compartment open, to close luggage compartment – see pa ge 34.

>

Front fog lig hts 3

Control indicator illum inates green.

It is illuminated when the front fog lights are on – see page 130.

C

Main bea m

Control indicator illum inates blue.

It is illuminated when main beam is on and during headlight flash – see pa ges 7, 128. r

Fog tail light

Control indicator illum inates yellow.

It is illuminated when the fog tail light is on

– see pa ge 131. r

Pa rking distance sensors 3

Control indica tor illuminates yellow.

Fault in system. Contact a work shop for help.

Pa rk ing distance sensors 3 – see page 202. u

Continuous Damp ing Control 3, SPORT mode



Further inform ation – see page 198.

X

Seat belt 3

Control indica tor illuminates red.

It illum ina tes onc e the ignition has been switched on until the seat belt is applied.

A warning buzzer also sound s once the vehicle has started moving.

Putting on a seat belt – see page 76.


A

Engine electronics, transmission

electronics 3 , diesel fuel filter 3, im mobiliser

Control indicator illuminates or flashes yellow.

It illuminates for a few sec onds when the ignition is switched on.


Fault in engine or gearbox electronic system. Electronics have switched on emergency running programme; fuel consum ption m ay be increa sed and the vehicle’s driveability reduced - see page 192. Contact a workshop imm ediately.

Diesel engines 1) Z 19 DTL, Z 19 DT,

Z 19 DTH: Hav e water drained from diesel fuel filter - see page 274.

Flashes when the ig nition is on:

Fault in the electronic immobiliser system ; the engine cannot be started - see page 27.

1) Sales des ignation – see page 284, 285.


!

Preheating for diesel engines 3,

diesel particle filter 3

Control indicator illum inates or flashes yellow.

Illuminates:

Preheating system active, switches on only if outside tem perature is low.

Flashes:

(in v ehicles with diesel particle filter)

The driving situation is such that the diesel particle filter self-cleaning function cannot op erate autom atically. You may continue to drive the vehic le normally. The vehicle will not be d amaged and does not require service.

The self-cleaning function will autom atic ally operate whilst driving after the engine has reached its norma l op erating temperature. The control indica tor ! will continue to flash until the self-clea ning operation is c om plete.

This may take up to 20 minutes of driving.

The time will be shorter at higher vehicle speeds.


H

Coolant level

Control indicator illuminates yellow .


Coolant fluid level too low. Stop, turn off eng ine. Check coolant fluid level - see page 275. u

Anti-lock Bra ke System (ABS )


Illuminates whilst driving:

Fault in Anti-lock Bra ke System - see page 210.

p

Elec tro-hyd raulic pow er assisted steering


Fault in elec tro-hydraulic p ow er assisted steering system . The power assisted steering may hav e failed. The vehicle can be steered but considerably more force is req uired. Contact a workshop for assistance. v

Elec tronic Stability Progra mme

(ESP® Plus ) 3

Control indicator flashes or lights yellow.

Flashes w hilst driving:

System actively engaged - see page 196.

Illuminates whilst driving:

System switched off or fault in the

Electronic Stability Programm e - see page 196.

y

Seat occup ancy r ecog nition 3

Control indica tor illuminates or flashes on the odometer display.

Illum inates:

Sea t occupancy recognition has detected a child restraint system with tra nsponders.

Airba g systems for the front passenger’s seat are dea ctiv ated - see page 87.

Flashes:

Fault in the system or child restraints with tra nsponder fitted incorrectly - see p age 87.

S

Engine oil level 3


The engine oil lev el is check ed autom atic ally.

Illum inates when the engine is running:

Engine oil level too low . Check engine oil level and top up engine oil if necessa ry - see p age 272.


m

Cruise control 3

Control indicator illuminates green.

It is illuminated when the system is on – see page 200.

Y

Fuel level

Control indicator illuminates or flashes yellow.

Illuminates:

Low fuel level, fuel gauge in reserv e a rea.

Flashes:

Fuel supply exhausted, refuel immediately.

N ever let the tank run dry.

Erra tic fuel sup ply can c ause catalytic converter to overheat - see pa ge 190.

Diesel engines: If the tank is run dry, b leed the fuel system as desc rib ed on pa ge 228.


Z

Exhaust ga ses 3

Control indicator illum inates or flashes yellow.

It illuminates when the ignition is switched on and extinguishes shortly after the engine sta rts.

Illuminates when the engine is running:

Fault in emission control system. The permitted emissions may be exceed ed.

Contact a workshop im med ia tely.

If it flashes when the engine is running :

Fault that may cause dama ge to the catalytic converter – see page 192. Contact a w orkshop for assistance im med ia tely. w

Tyre pressure m onitoring system 3

Control indica tor illuminates red:

Tyre p ressure difference, chec k tyre pressure at next opportunity.

Control indica tor flashes red :

Considerable pressure difference or direc t loss of pressure, stop immediately and check tyres and tyre pressure.

Control indica tor illuminates yellow:


Tyre p ressure monitoring system – see p age 204.

B

Ad aptive Forwa rd Lighting (AFL) 3

Control indicator flashes yellow.

Flashing:

Fault in system. Contac t a workshop for help .

Flashing for 4 seconds when the ig nition is switched on:

System ad justed for d riv ing abroad.

AFL - see page 132.

Instrum ent display

In some model v ariants the pointers of the tachometer, the speedometer, the coolant tem perature gauge and the fuel gauge briefly go to the end stop as a functionality check .

Ta chometer

Indicates eng ine speed.

Warning zone: Maxim um permissible engine speed exceeded; d anger to engine.

Speedometer

Speed d isplay.


Odometer

Records the miles (k ilometres) counted.

Display in the ev ent of airbag system ma lfunction – see page 86.

Trip odometer

Display of m iles (kilom etres) covered since reset.

To set to z ero, hold reset knob down for app rox. 2 seconds with ignition switched on.


For physical reasons, the engine temperature gauge show s the coolant temperature only if the coolant level is adeq uate.

During operation the system is pressurised.

The temp erature ma y therefore rise briefly to ov er 100 °C.

Coola nt temperature d isplay

Pointer in zone at left

= Engine operating temperature not yet reached

Pointer betw een the z ones

Pointer in warning zone at right or W is illuminated

= Normal operating temperature

= Temperature too high: Stop. Switch off engine. Risk of engine d amage.

Check coolant level

- see page 275.

Fuel gauge

Pointer in left zone or

Y illumina ted

Pointer in left zone or

Y flashing

= Reserve area

= Refuelling - see page 189

N ever let the tank run dry.

Diesel engines: If the tank is run dry, b leed the fuel system as desc rib ed on pa ge 228.

Because of the fuel remaining in the tank, the amount of fuel required to fill the tank ma y be less than the spec ified tank cap acity.

Transmission display 3

Display of gear selected for automatic transm ission 3 or current gear or m od e for

Ea sytronic 3 .

P

R

N

Automatic transm ission park position

Reverse gear

Neutral

A

M

Automatic mode on Ea sytronic

Manual m od e on Easytronic

D Automatic mode on automatic transm ission

1-5 Manual m od e, c urrent gear on

Easytronic

1-5

1-6 3

Manual m od e, selected gear on automatic

For Easytronic 3, the display flashes for a few seconds if A, M or R is selected when the engine is running but the footbrake is not d epressed.


InS P Service interval display 3

When InSP appea rs on the odometer display, make an ap pointment with a workshop for servicing as soon a s possible.

We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised

Repairer.

Service, maintena nce – see page 268.


12:01 17

FM 3

REG AS

,0

90,6 MHz

RDS T P

°C

11:25

}

21 .5

°C

Range

RDS

257 miles

[ TP]

Ü

Board Computer

BC 1

19,5° 19:36

All values

BC 2

Timer

Ø

257.0

40 miles mph

7.0

gal.

Ø 31.0

miles/ gal.

Information display

Triple Information Disp lay

Display of time, outside tempera ture and date/Infotainment system 3 (w hen it is on).

When the ignition is off, the time, date and outside tem perature can be presented for

15 second s b y briefly pressing one of the two buttons b elow the displa y.

Display F in the display indicates a fa ult.

Hav e the cause eliminated by a workshop.

Board Inform ation Display 3

Display of time, outside temp erature a nd date/Infotainment system 3 (when it is on).

Display F in the display indica tes a fault.

Have the cause elim inated by a w ork shop.

Grap hical Information Disp lay 3,

Colour Informa tion Display 3

Display of time, outsid e tem perature, date/

Infotainment system 3 (when it is on) and

Electronic Clima te Control 3.

The Gra phic al Inform ation Display presents the information in monochrome.

The Colour Information Display p resents the information in colour.


The type of information and how it is displayed depends on the equipment of the v ehicle and the Infotainment system 3, trip comp uter 3 and Elec tronic

Clim ate Control 3 settings.

Some inform ation appea rs on the displa y in an abb reviated form.

For Infotainm ent system - see Infotainment system instructions.

For Elec tronic Climate Control 3 - see page 156.

Display F in the display indicates a fa ult.

Hav e the cause eliminated by a workshop.

8:56

-5

,5

07.04.2004

°C

:

Outside temperature

A fall in temp erature is indicated immed iately and a rise in temperature after a tim e delay.

If outside temp erature d rops to 3 °C, the symbol : illuminates in the Triple

Information Display or the Board

Information Display 3 as a warning for icy road surfaces. : rem ains illuminated until temperatures reach a t least 5 °C.

Slippery road

-2, 5°C

OK

In v ehicles with Graphical Information

Display 3 or Colour Inform ation Display 3 , an icy road surfac e wa rning m essage app ears on the display. No m essag e is displayed if the temperature is less than -5 °C.

9

Warning

Caution: The road surface may already be icy even though the d isplay indicates a few deg rees ab ov e 0 °C.


8:56 5

,5

°C

07.04.2004

Triple Information Display

Set d ate and time

Infotainm ent system off: p ress Ö and ; below the display as follows:

Press Ö for ap prox. 2 seconds:

Day flashes

;: Set day

Ö: Month flashes

;: Set month

Ö: Year flashes

;: Set year

Ö: Hours flash

;: Set hours

Ö: Minutes flash

;: Set minutes

Ö: Clock is started .

Correcting time 3

Some RDS transmitters do not send a correct time sig nal. If the incorrect time is continually displayed, deactiv ate autom atic time synchronisation 3 - see next column, and set the tim e m anually.

The automatic setting is indicated by } in the display.

Deactivating/ac tiv ating autom atic time synchronisation: Infota inm ent system off, press Ö and ; below the display:

Hold down Ö for app rox. 2 sec., clock display is now in setting m ode,

Press Ö twice (until year flashes).

Press Ö and hold down for approx.

3 seconds until } flashes in d isplay 3 a nd text "RDS TIME" appears (yea rs flash during this tim e),

Press ;; display shows:

RDS TIME 0 = Off

Press ;; display shows:

RDS TIME 1 = On

Press Ö three tim es.


11:25

}

21 .5

°C

Range

257miles

Board Information Display

3

, selecting functions

Functions and settings of some equipm ent 3 can be accessed via the

Board Information Disp la y.

This is done using the menus and the buttons/four-way button on the

Infotainm ent system 3 or the left-hand adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel.

The resp ective menu op tions are then shown in the following lines on the disp lay.

If check control warning messages 3 are displayed, the disp la y is blocked to other displays. Confirm the warning message. If there are several warning messages, confirm one after the other.

To select w ith four-wa y button:

Select options v ia the m enus and with the buttons/four-w ay button on the

Infotainment system 3.

To selec t using the left adjuster w heel 3 on the steer ing wheel

Scroll upw ards

Prev ious menu item.

Scroll d ow nw ards

N ext m enu item .

Press

Selec tion of hig hlighted item, confirmation of comm and s.

System settings - see page 112.

Trip comp uter 3 – see page 114.


11:25

}

21 .5

°C

System

The functions are displayed in the following order: z Time synchronisation, z Time, setting hours, z Time, setting minutes, z Date, setting day, z Date, setting month, z Date, setting year, z Ignition logic, z Language selection, z Setting units of measure.


3

,

System settings

Press the Settings button of the

Infotainm ent system. Menu item Audio or

System will app ear.

Press the lower button of the four-way button to reach m enu item System . After pressing the right-hand part of the fourway button, the first function of the System menu is shown.


11:25

}

21 .5

Clock Sync.On

°C

Correc ting time 3

Som e RDS transm itters do not send a correc t time signal. If the incorrect time is continually displayed, deactivate automatic time synchronisation 3 and set the tim e m anua lly - see next page.


The a utomatic setting is indicated by } in the d isplay.

To correct time with the help of R DS, select the m enu item for time synchronisation from the Settings menu.

Make the desired setting.

Setting date and time

Select the menu item for time and da te setting from the Settings menu.


The setting is executed upon exit from the menu item.

Ig nition logic 3

Adjustment - see Infotainm ent system instructions.

11:25

}

21

English

.5

°C

11:25

}

21 .5

°C

Unit Europe-SI

Lang uage selection

You can select the d isplay language for some func tions.

Select the menu item for language from the

Settings m enu and ma ke the desired setting.

Setting units of measure

You can select which units of mea sure are to be used.

Selec t the menu item for units of measure from the Settings m enu and ma ke the desired setting.



3

, trip computer

3

The trip computer p rov ides information on driving data, which is continually recorded and evaluated electronically.

Access trip computer vehicle data by pressing the BC button on the Infotainment system or the left ad juster w heel 3 on the steering wheel.


Once an audio function has been selected, the subsequent rows of the trip computer func tion are displayed.

The functions are displa yed in the following order: z Instantaneous consumption, z Av erage consump tion, z Effective consump tion, z Av erage speed, z Distance tra velled, z Rang e, z Stop watch.

11:25

29.6

}

21 .5

miles/gal.

°C

Inst. Consumpt.

Instantaneous consumption

Display changes depending on speed:

Display in gal/h below 8 mph (13 k m/h)

Display in mpg above 8 mph (13 km/h)

Avera ge consum ption

Average consumption display.

Measurement m ay be reset to zero at any time and restarted - see "Resetting the trip computer information".

Effec tive consumption

Fuel consum ption d isplay.


Avera ge sp eed

Average speed disp lay.


Stopp ages in the journey with the ignition off are not included in the c alcula tions.

Distanc e travelled

Distanc e trav elled disp la y.



11:25

}

Range

21

257miles

.5

°C

Range

Range is calculated from current fuel tank content and instanta neous consumption.

The d isplay shows average values.

After refuelling, the v ehicle up dates the range autom atically after a brief delay.

If less than 30 miles (50 k m) can be driven with the fuel rema ining in the tank, the warning "Range" a ppears on the d isplay.

If less than 20 miles (30 k m) can be driven with the fuel rema ining in the tank, the warning "Refuel!" 3 appears on the display.

Acknowled ge the menu item as desc rib ed on page 111.

Resetting the trip c omputer inform ation

The follow ing trip computer information can be reset (reset to zero and measurements/calculations restarted): z Average consumption, z Effective consumption, z Average speed, z Distanc e travelled.

Select the desired trip computer information.

Reset using the left wheel on the steering wheel or the right/left button of the fourway b utton: z Press for more than 2 seconds:

Current value. z Press for more than 4 seconds:

All values.

11:25

}

21 .5

°C

Stop Watch

01:22:32

h

Stop wa tch

Operation with the four-way button: z Press right button: Sta rt/Stop. z Press left button for more than

2 second s: Reset.

Operating using the left adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel: z Press: Start/Stop .

Interr up tion of pow er supp ly

If the power supp ly has been interrupted or if the battery voltage ha s dropped too low, the values stored in the trip computer w ill be lost.


FM [TP] CDin

� 90.6

MHz

19,5° 19: 36

Graphical Information Display

3

or Colour Information Display

3 ,

selecting functions

The functions and settings of some equipm ent 3 can be accessed via the

Graphical Information Displa y or the

Colour Information Display.

Functions are selected and executed in the menu on the display using the four-way button, the m ulti-function k nob 3 on the

Infotainm ent system or the left wheel 3 on the steering wheel.

If check control warning messages 3 are displayed, the disp la y is blocked to other displays. Confirm the warning message. If there are several warning messages, confirm one after the other.

To select w ith four-wa y button:

Select menu items via menus and with the buttons/four-w ay button of the

Infotainment system.

To selec t using the multi-function knob :

Turn

Highlighting of menu options or comm ands, selection of func tion ranges,

Press

Selec tion of highlighted option, confirmation of commands.

To exit a m enu, turn the m ulti-func tion knob left or right to Return or Main and select.


FM [TP] CDin

� 90.6

MHz

19,5° 19: 36

To select using the left adjuster w heel 3 on the steering wheel

Scroll upwards

Previous menu item.

Scroll downward s

Next m enu item.

Press

Selection of highlighted item, confirmation of comma nds.

Function ranges

For each functional area there is a main page (Main), which is selected at the top edg e of the displa y (not with

Infotainment system CD 30 without the ha nds-free mobile phone system): z Audio, z Na vigation 3, z Telephone 3 , z Trip comp uter 3.

For audio, nav igation 3 and telephone functions 3 - see Infotainm ent system instructions.

7

Settings

Time, Date

Language

Units

Contrast

Day / Night

6 Ign. logic

19,5° 19:36

19:36

10 . 07 . 2004

System settings

The settings are accessed via the Setting s menu.

Press the Ma in button 3 (not found on all

Infotainment systems) on the Infotainm ent system (c all up main display).

Press the S ettings button of the

Infotainment system. No m enu may be selected with Infotainment System CD 30.

The Settings m enu is displa yed.


7

Time,

Time

19,5° 19:36

19:36

Date 10 . 07 . 2004

6 Synchron. clock automatical.

Setting the date and time 3

Select menu item Time, Date from the

Setting s menu.

The m enu for Time, Date is displayed.

Select the menu items required:


Correcting time 3

For systems with GPS receiver 1) , time and date a re automatically set up on receipt of a GPS satellite signal. If the displayed tim e does not correspond to local time, time can be m anua lly corrected in 30-m inute increments or automatically corrected via receipt of an RDS tim e signal 2) 3.

Some RDS tra nsmitters do not send correct tim e signals. If the incorrect time is displayed often, deactivate autom atic tim e synchronisation 3 a nd set the tim e manually.

To correct tim e with the help of RDS, select menu item Synchron. clock autom atica l. from the Time, Da te menu.

The box in front of Synchron. clock

automatical. will be ticked; see

Fig. 17340 T.

7

Settings

Time, Date

Language

Units

Contrast

Day / Night

6 Ign. logic

19,5° 19:36

English

German

Español

Nederlands

Français

Languag e selection

You can select the display language for some functions.

Selec t menu item Language from the

Settings menu.

The available languages are displayed.

1)

2)

GPS = G lo bal P os itioning S ystem ,

Satellite system for wo rld-wide pos itioning.

RDS = R adio D ata S ys tem.


7

13 Languages

X English

German

Español

Nederlands

Français

Italiano

19,5° 19:36 7

Settings

Time, Date

Language

Units

Contrast

Day / Night

6 Ign. logic

19,5° 19:36

~ Europe-SI

|

Japan

|

Great Britain

| USA

7

Contrast

12

19,5° 19:36

Select the desired language.

Selections are indicated by a 6 in front of the m enu item .

In systems with voice output 3, w hen the language setting of the displa y is changed the system will ask whether the announcement language should also be changed – see Infotainment system instructions.

Setting units of m easur e

You can select which units of measure are to be used .

Select menu item U nits from the

Settings menu.

The ava ilab le units are displayed.

Select the desired unit.

Selections are indicated by a o in front of the menu item.

Ad justing contra st 3

(Graphic al Inform ation Display)

Selec t menu item Contrast from the

Settings menu.

The menu for Contr ast is disp layed .

Confirm the required setting .


Setting displa y mod e 3

The displa y ca n be adjusted to suit the light conditions, black or coloured text on a light back ground or white or coloured text on a dark background.

Select menu item Day / N ight from the

Setting s menu.

The options are displayed.

Autom atic: adapted based on vehicle lighting .

Alw ays day design: black or coloured text on light backg round.

Alw ays night design: white or coloured text on dark b ackground .

Selections are indicated by a o in front of the m enu item .

Ig nition logic 3

Adjustment - see Infotainm ent system instructions.

Ü

Board Computer

BC 1

19,5° 19:36

All values

BC 2

Timer

Tyres

Ø

257.0

40 miles mph

7.0

gal.

Ø 31.0

miles/ gal.

Range

Aver. Consump.

Inst. consumpt.

19,5° 23°

257 miles

31.0

miles/gal.

29.6

miles/gal.

Eco x

19: 36

Graphical Information Display

3

or Colour Information Display

3

, trip computer

3

The trip computers provide information on driving data, which is continually recorded and ev alua ted electronically.

The trip computer main page (Main) prov ides inform ation about ra ng e, averag e fuel consumption 3 and instantaneous consumption.

To display other trip com puter data, press the BC button on the Infotainment system 3, select the trip computer menu on the display or p ress the left adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel.

Ra ng e

Range is calculated from current fuel tank content and instantaneous consumption.

The display shows av erage values.

After refuelling, the vehicle updates the range automatically a fter a brief delay.

Range

2 9m iles

OK

If less than 30 miles (50 k m) can be driven with the fuel rema ining in the tank, the warning "Range" a ppears on the d isplay.

If less than 20 miles (30 k m) can be driven with the fuel rema ining in the tank, the warning "Please refuel!" 3 appea rs on the display. At that point "Please refuel!" 3 will also be displa yed on the trip comp uter main pa ge (Ma in) instead of "Range".

Acknowled ge the menu item as desc rib ed on page 116.

Instantaneous consump tion

Display changes depending on speed :

Display in gal/h below 8 mph (13 km/h)

Display in mp g ab ov e 8 m ph (13 km /h)


Distance travelled

Distance travelled display.

Measurement may be reset to zero at any tim e and restarted - see "Resetting the trip computer information".

Average speed

Av erage speed display.


Stoppages in the journey with the ignition off are not includ ed in the calculations.

Effective consum ption

Fuel consumption display.


Average consumption

Av erage consump tion display.


Ü

Board Computer

BC 1

BC 2

Timer

Tyres

19,5° 19:36

All values

Ø

257.0

40 miles mph

7.0

gal.

Ø 31.0

miles/ gal.

Resetting the tr ip comp uter information

The following trip com puter inform ation can b e reset (restart measurements): z Distance travelled, z Average speed, z Effective consum ption, z Average consum ption.

Selec t BC 1 or BC 2 from the trip computer menu.


Ü

Reset BC 1 19,5° 19:36

All values

257.0

m iles

Ø 40

m ph

7.0

gal.

Ø 31.0

m iles/gal.

Ü

Reset BC 1

All values

19,5° 19:36

257.0

m iles

Ø 40 m ph

7.0

gal.

Ø 31.0

m iles/gal.

The information from both trip computers can be reset separately, mak ing it possible to evaluate d ata over different time periods.

Select the desired trip computer inform ation.

The v alue for the selected function will b e reset and reca lculated.

To reset all information of a trip computer, select m enu item All values.

If trip computer information has been selected, "- - -" is displayed after a reset.

The recalculated values are displayed a fter a brief delay.


If the power supp ly has been interrupted or if the battery voltage ha s dropped too low, the values stored in the trip computer w ill be lost.

Ü

Board Computer

BC 1

BC 2

Timer

Tyres

19,5° 19:36

00:00:00

Start

Reset

Options

Stop watch

Select menu item Timer from the Board

Com puter menu.

The Tim er menu is displayed.

To start, selec t menu item Start.

To reset, selec t menu item Reset.


The desired stop watch display c an be selected from the Options menu 3:

Dr iving Time excl. S tops

The time the v ehicle is in m otion is recorded . Stationary tim e is not includ ed.

Dr iving Time incl. S tops

The time the v ehicle is in m otion is recorded . The tim e the vehicle is sta tionary with the key in the starter sw itc h is included.

Tr avel Time

Measurement of the time from manual activation via Sta rt to manual deactivation via Reset.

Ü

Board Computer

BC 1

BC 2

Timer

Tyres

Display of current tyre pressure

3

Selec t menu item Tyr es from the Board

Computer menu.

The current pressure of eac h tyre is displayed.

Further information – see page 204.


Check control

3

Check control monitors several fluid levels, the tyre pressure 3, the remote control batteries, Vauxhall alarm system 3 a nd the main vehicle lighting systems, including the cables and fuses. When towing , the carava n/trailer lighting system is also monitored.

Once the ignition has been switched on, all check control functions a re automatically verified.

Warning messa ges appear on the display.

If there are severa l warning m essa ges, they are disp layed one after the other.


Exa mples of warning messages for the

Gra phic al Inform ation Display 3 and

Colour Information Display 3 are shown.

On the Board Inform ation Display, messages appear in an abb reviated form.

Ac know ledge warning messages as described on pages 111, 116.

Una cknowledged warning messages can be re-displayed later.

Warning messages:

Remote Control

Batter y check

Remote c ontrol battery voltage is too low – see p age 29.

Coolant level ch eck

OK

Brakelig ht switch

chec k

Fault. Brake light not illum inating w hen brak ing oc curs. H ave cause of fault remedied by a workshop immediately.

Safeguard

chec k

Fault. System fault in Vauxhall alarm system. Have the cause of the fault rectified straight away by a workshop.

If there is a fault in the v ehicle lighting system, the respec tiv e location of the fault is disp layed as text, e.g.:

Brakelight check right

If brak e light is defective, the relev ant tail light takes ov er the brake light function.

In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring system 3, if tyre pressure is too low, the display indicates which tyre to check, e.g .:

Tyre pressure check rear right

(value in bar)

Check tyre pressure at next opportunity using suitable gauge. Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 – see page 204.

Checking tyre pressure – see p age 299.

In vehicles with tyre p ressure control system 3, if there is m ajor loss of pressure in a tyre, the d isplay indicates the tyre at fa ult, e.g .:

Attention!

Rear left tyre pressure loss

(value in b ar)

Stop immediately and check tyre and tyre pressure. For tyre p ressure monitoring system 3 – see page 204.


Wa sher

Fluid Level chec k

Fluid level in windscreen wash system too low. Topping up wash fluid – see page 279.

Rear window wash system and headlight wash system 3 are dea ctiv ated if wash fluid lev el is low.

Coolant level

chec k

Fluid level in eng ine cooling system is low.

Check c oolant level immed iately – see page 274.


Stored warning messages appea r on the display one after the other.


Warning buzzers

When sta rting the engine or whilst driving: z If seat belt is not fastened 3. z When driving with a door open or the lugga ge c om partment a ja r. z Once you have reached a certain speed if the handbrake is applied 3. z If a specified maximum speed is exceed ed 3. z In the case of Easytronic 3 if A, M or R is selected while the engine is running a nd the driver’s door is opened but the footbrake is not depressed.

When the vehicle is parked and the driver’s door is opened: z When the key is in the starter switch 3 . z With parking lig hts or dipped beam switched on. z In the case of Easytronic 3, if the handb ra ke is not applied a nd no gear is engaged when the engine is off.

Windscreen wiper

To activate, gently push stalk upward s.

§ = Off

$ = Ad justable timed interval wipe

% = Slow

& = Fast

The stalk always moves bac k to the starting position. To select next higher or low er stage: move stalk slig htly.

Push stalk p ast resistance point and hold : the wind screen wiper stages are run throug h; an acoustic signal sound s a t position §.

Adjusta ble timed interv al wipe $:

Adjuster wheel right = short interv als

Adjuster wheel left = long intervals

Press the stalk down from position §:

Single swipe.


Autom atic w iping with ra in sensor 3:

To activate, gently push stalk upwards.

§ = Off

$ = Autom atic wiping with rain sensor

The rain sensor detects the am ount of water on the windscreen a nd automatically controls the windscreen wiper. Adjust the sensitiv ity of the system using the adjuster wheel:

Adjuster wheel right = High sensitivity

Adjuster wheel left = Low sensitivity

Keep sensor area of rain sensor clean by opera ting the windscreen wash system .

Wind sc reen wa sh system and headlight

wash system 3

To activate, pull sta lk towards steering wheel.

The wiper is switched on for severa l wipe op erations. A single after-wipe occurs at speeds of up to 80 mph (130 k m/h).

The head lig ht wash system 3 is rea dy for op eration when the headlights are switched on. Wash fluid is sprayed onto the headlights once. Then the head lig ht wash system is disa bled for 2 m inutes.

On vehicles fitted w ith ra in sensor 3, keep the sensor area c lean by operating the wash system regularly.

Rear w indow w iper 3 a nd rear wind ow

w ash system s 3

Push stalk forwards to switch on.

The rear window w iper swipes in timed interva l mode.

The tailgate w ip er switches on automatically when the wind screen wiper is switched on and reverse gear is eng aged.

Push stalk forwards aga in to switch off.

The rear window w ash system will rem ain on for as long as the stalk is held in the forward position.

The rear window w ash system is deactivated when the fluid level is low.

128 Lighting

Lighting

Exterior lights ....................................... 128

Main beam, headlight flash ............... 129

Autom atic dipped b eam ac tiv ation 3 129

Turn signal lights ................................. 130

Front fog lights > 3 ............................ 130

Fog tail light r .................................... 131

Reversing lights.................................... 131

Haza rd warning lights......................... 131

Headlight range adjustment ? .......... 131

Adaptive Forw ard Lighting (AFL) 3 .. 132

Door-to-door lighting 3 ...................... 133

Parking lights ....................................... 134

Instrument illum ination k, information display illumination ...... 134

Courtesy lig ht ....................................... 134

Battery discharge p rotection.............. 136

Light covers.......................................... 136

Headlights w hen driving abroad ....... 136

Exterior lights

Turn light switch:

7 = Off

8 = Park ing lights

9 = Dip ped or main beam

In positions 8 and 9, the tail lights a nd numb er plate lights are also on.

Control indica tor 8 – see page 100.

If the ignition is switched off with the dipped bea m or main b eam on, the parking lights illuminate 3.

Model variants with daytim e running lights 3: Parking lig hts are on when the ignition is switched on and the light switch is set to 7 or AUTO. Dipped bea m is on when the engine is running.

The daytime running lights switch off when the ignition is switched off.

Follow the regula tions of the country in which you are driving w hen using da ytime running lig hts and front fog lights 3.

The rear lights of the Estate automatically switch themselv es off after 10 minutes if the luggag e compa rtm ent is open and the vehicle is stationary.

Driving ab road – see pag e 136.

Main beam, headlight flash

To switch from dipped to main b eam, press stalk forwards.

To switch to dipped beam, p ush stalk forwards again or pull towards steering wheel.

Lighting 129

To activate the hea dlight fla sh, pull stalk tow ards steering wheel. Ma in beam is engaged for the d uration of activation.

The blue control ind ic ator C is illuminated when main b eam or headlight flash is on.

Automatic dipped beam activation

3

Light sw itch to AUTO: Dip ped beam switches on or off autom atically when the eng ine is running based on outside light conditions.

The exterior lights are turned off by removing the ignition key.

For reasons of safety, the lig ht switch should always rem ain in the AUTO position.

In poor v isibility such as fog, turn the light switch to 9.

130 Lighting

Turn signal lights

To activate, press stalk up or down.

Stalk up = R ig ht

Stalk down = Left

After operation, the turn signal stalk returns to its sta rting p osition.

If the stalk is moved pa st the resistance point, the turn signal lig ht remains on.

When the steering wheel moves ba ck tow ards the straig ht-ahead position, the turn signal light is autom atically deactiv ated.

Ta p signa l: Move sta lk to resista nce point and release to activ ate three flashes from the turn signals when c ha nging lanes or the lik e.

Move the stalk to the resistance point and hold for the turn signals to flash longer.

Switch the turn signal off manually by moving the stalk slightly.

Front fog lights

> 3

The front fog lights can only be switched on when both the ignition and lights a re on.

On = Press >, > illuminates in instrum ent cluster

Off = Press > aga in or switch off ig nition or light.

Lighting 131

Fog tail light

r

The fog ta il light can only be sw itc hed on when the ig nition is on and dipp ed bea m or parking lights a re on or if the light switch is in the A UTO 3 position and dipped beam is active.

On = Press >, > illuminates in instrument cluster

Off = Press > again or switch off ignition or light.

The fog ta il light on the vehicle is deactivated when towing a caravan/ trailer.

Reversing lights

Illuminate when rev erse gear is enga ged and ignition is switched on.

Hazard warning lights

To ac tiv ate, p ress button ¨, to deac tiv ate press button ¨ again.

To aid location of the pushb utton, the red surface is illuminated when the ignition is switched on. When the button is pressed, its control indicator flashes in time with the ha zard warning lights.

The hazard warning lig hts switch on autom atic ally when the airbags are trigg ered , and the central locking unlocks all doors. Switch off hazard wa rning lights with button ¨ .

Headlight range adjustment

?

Ma nua l hea dlight range adjustm ent 3

With dipped beam switched on, adjust hea dlight range in four steps to suit vehic le load. Turn wheel a gainst resistance a nd click it to the required position.

Correct adjustm ent of the headlight range reduc es dazz le for other road users.

Automatic level control system 3 - see page 204.

6

132 Lighting

Vehicles without autom atic lev el control system

0 = Front seats occupied

1 = All seats occupied

2 = All seats occupied a nd lug gage compartment loa d

3 = Driv er’s seat oc cup ied and lug gage compartment loa d

Vehicles with automatic level control system 3

0 = Front seats occupied

1 = All seats occupied

1 = All seats occupied a nd lug gage compartment loa d

2 = Driv er’s seat oc cup ied and lug gage compartment loa d

Autom atic headlight ra ng e adjustment 3

On vehicles w ith Xenon headlights, the range of the head lig hts is adjusted automatically based on vehicle load.

Adaptive Forward Lighting

(AFL)

3

On vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlights, AFL improves illumination of: z Curves (curv e lighting), z Intersec tions and tight turns

(turn lig hting).

Curve lig hting

The Xenon light bea m pivots based on steering wheel position a nd speed (from approx. 6 m ph / 10 km /h).

The head lig hts shine at an a ngle of up to 15° to the right or left of the direction of tra vel.

Turn lig hting

An add itional light illuminates at certain steering w heel settings (a fter approx. 90°), turn signal settings and speeds (up to app rox. 25 mph / 40 k m/h).

The lig ht shines approx. 90° to the left or right of the v ehicle and approx. 30 m etres to the front.

Motor way lighting

At higher speeds and continuous straight ahead travel, the dipped bea m automatically raises slightly, thereby increa sing hea dlight rang e.

Control indica tor

B rea dy for opera tion.

Flashing: Fault in system. The system is not

If the curv e lighting swivelling device fails, the relev ant dipped bea m is sw itc hed off.

The c orresponding fog light is automatically switched on for reasons of safety.

Contact a workshop.

Flashing of control indicator

B for approx.

4 seconds after switching on the ignition rem inds you that the head lights hav e been adjusted - see "Head lig hts when driving abroad" on page 136.

Door-to-door lighting

3

The dipped beam a nd the reversing lights illuminate for app rox. 30 seconds after the driver has exited the vehicle and closed his door.

To activate

1. Sw itch off ignition.

2. Remove ignition key.

3. Open driv er’s door.

4. Pull turn signal stalk towards steering wheel.

5. Close driver’s door.

Lighting 133

If the d riv er’s d oor is left op en, the lights will go out after two minutes.

The lig ht is switched off im media tely b y inserting the key into the ignition or pulling the turn signal stalk aga in with the driv er’s door open.

134 Lighting

Parking lights

The front p arking lig ht and tail light of one side of the vehicle can be activ ated w hen parking:

1. Set light switch to 7 or AUTO 3 .

2. Ignition off.

3. Move turn signal sta lk all the way up

(right parking light) or down (left parking lig ht).

An acoustic signal sound s a nd control indicator O illuminates briefly in the instrument cluster to indica te activ ation.

Remove the ignition key b efore lea ving the vehic le.

To switch it off, sw itch on the ignition or move the turn signal sta lk in the opposite direc tion.

Instrument illumination

k,

information display illum ination

Brig htness can be adjusted when the exterior lights are on:

Press to release knob k and then turn it cloc kwise or anticlockwise and hold until the desired brightness is obtained.

Display mode 3 – see page 120.

Courtesy light

Front courtesy light

Illuminates automatically when the vehicle is unlocked with the remote control, when a door is opened or when the key is removed from the starter sw itch a fter the ignition is switched off.

Extinguishes a utomatica lly with d elay after the doors are closed or im mediately w hen the ig nition is switched on or the doors are locked.

Front courtesy light

Manual operation from inside with doors closed:

On = Press button c

Off = Press button c again

Front reading lights 3

Left and right reading lights are individually operable. With ignition on:

On = Press button

Off = Press button a

.

a a gain

Courtesy lig hts and rear read ing lights 3

Centre sw itc h position: The rear courtesy lig ht illum ina tes together with the front one when a d oor is opened.

The rear reading lights on the left and right can be switched on separately. With ignition on:

On = Switch position I

Off = Switch position 0

Lighting 135

Entry lighting 3

After unlocking the v ehicle, the instrument and switch illumination as well as the courtesy lig hts illuminate for a few seconds.

Illuminated mirror in the sunvisors 3

The lig hting switches on when the cover is opened.

Glove c ompar tment lig hting

Glove compartment is illuminated when lid is open a nd ignition on.

Cigarette lig hter and ashtra y

illumination 3

Illuminates when ignition is switched on.

Luggag e c ompartment lighting 3

Illuminates when the luggage compa rtm ent/tailga te is opened.

Autom atica lly reg ulated centre console

lig hting 3

Spotlight in housing of interior m irror.

Daylig ht-dependent, automatically regula ted centre console lighting with ignition switched on.

136 Lighting

Battery discharge protection

To prevent the battery from bec om ing discharged, the courtesy light, reading lights, lug gage compartment lighting a nd glove compartment lighting switch off automatically 5 minutes after the ignition is switched off.

Light covers

The inside of the light covers ma y become misted up for a short period during unfa vourab le weather conditions, heavy rain or after washing the vehicle. The misting disa ppears automatically after a short time, b ut c an be speeded up by switching the lights on.

Headlights when driving abroad

The asymm etrical dipped b eam increases the field of v ision on the p assenger sid e of the lane.

This c auses glare for oncoming tra ffic if the vehicle is driven in countries where traffic drives on the opp osite side of the road.

Do as follows to prevent glare:

Vehicles with halogen - headlig ht system or Xenon headlig ht system w ithout

Adaptive For ward Lig hting (AFL) 3

Have the workshop c onvert the headlights.

Vehicles w ith Adap tive For ward Lighting

(AFL) 3

1. Open fusebox cover in engine compartment - see page 250.

2. Insert any fuse (maxi-fuse) 3 in slot 37.

Fuse a ssignment – see page 251.

3. Close fusebox.


Then the AFL control ind icator switched on.

B flashes for 4 seconds whenev er the ignition is

Control indicator

B

- see pages 104, 133.

Infotainment system 137

Infotainment system

Radio reception 3 ................................ 137

Infotainm ent system 3 ........................ 137

Remote control on steering wheel 3 .. 137

Twin Audio 3 ....................................... 138

AUX input 3 ......................................... 138

Electronic data ac quisition at toll systems 3........................................... 138

Mobile telephones a nd radio equipment 3...................................... 139

Radio reception

3

Vehicle radio reception differs from domestic radio reception:

As the v ehicle antenna is relatively near the ground, the broadcasting compa nies cannot g uarantee the sa me quality of reception a s obtained with a d om estic ra dio using an ov erhead antenna. z Changes in distance from the transm itter, z multi-path rec eption due to reflection and z sha dowing may c ause hissing , noise, distortion or loss of reception a ltogether.

Infotainment system

3

The Infotainm ent system is operated as described in the operating instructions.

Remote control on steering wheel

3

The functions of the Infotainment system 3 and the informa tion display can be operated w ith the adjuster wheels and buttons on the steering wheel.

Further information – see pages 111, 116 and the relevant opera ting instruc tions.

138 Infotainment system

Twin Audio

3

Twin Audio provides rear seat occupa nts with the opportunity to listen to a different audio source than the one selected by the driver on the Infotainment system 3.

Only an audio source that is not currently active on the Infotainment system can be controlled using Twin Audio.

Two headphone connections are availab le, with separate volume controls.

Further information is available in the

Infotainm ent system operating instructions.

AUX input

3

The AUX input is in the stowa ge compartment in the centre console.

An externa l audio source such as a porta ble CD player can be connected via the AUX input using a 3.5 m m jack.

Keep AUX inp ut clean and dry at all times.

Further inform ation is av ailable in the

Infotainment system opera ting instructions.

Electronic data acquisition at toll systems

3

In v ehicles with hea t-reflecting windscreen 1) 3 attach chipcard 3 for electronic da ta record ing and fee payment in black area of windscreen on left or righthand side behind the interior mirror - see arrows in illustration. Attaching the chipcard outside this area ma y cause data record ing malfunctions.

1) Solar Reflect.

Mobile telephones and radio equipment

3

The Vauxhall installa tion instructions and the operating guidelines p rov id ed by the telephone manufa cturer m ust be observed when fitting and operating a m ob ile telephone. Failure to d o so could invalida te the vehicle’s operating perm it (EU Directiv e

95/54/EG).

Recommended prerequisites for fault-free opera tion: z Professionally installed exterior a ntenna to ob ta in the maximum range possible.

z Maximum transmission power 10 Watt.

z Installation of the telephone in a suitab le spot (see informa tion on pag e 89).

Obtain advice on pred eterm ined installation locations for the external antenna and equipment holder and w ays of using devices with transmission power of more tha n 10 Watts. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised

Repairer, who will ha ve brackets and various installation kits available as accessories and w ill install them in accordance with reg ulations.

A hand s-free attachment without an externa l antenna in mobile phone standards GSM 900/1800/1900 and UMTS must only be operated if the ma ximum tra nsmission power of the mobile phone does not exceed 2 Watts w ith GSM 900 a nd

1 Watt in other cases. The operating regulations stipulated by the manufa cturer of the telephone and the hands-free attachment must be complied with.

Infotainment system 139

For reasons of safety, we recommend that you d o not use the phone whilst driving.

Even use of a hands-free set can be a distraction whilst driving. Be sure to observe any country-spec ific regulations.

9

Warning

Mobile phones and ra dio equip ment may cause malfunctions in the vehicle electronics if they are op erated in the vehicle without the external antenna unless the above-m entioned regulations are c om plied with.

Mobile p hones that do not com ply with the abov e-mentioned mobile phone standard and radio equipment must only be op erated using an antenna tha t is attached to the exterior of the v ehicle.

140 Climate control

Climate control

Heating and ventila tion system, air cond itioning system 3 ...................... 140

Autom atic air conditioning system 3 141

Electronic Climate Control 3 ............... 141

Air vents ............................................... 142

Cooled glove compartment 3 ............ 143

Heated rear window, heated exterior mirrors ................................................ 143

Heated front seats 3 ........................... 144

Heated rear seats 3 ............................ 144

Driver’s seat with climate control 3 ... 144

Heating and ventila tion system ......... 145

Air conditioning system 3 ................... 148

Autom atic air conditioning system 3 150

Electronic Climate Control 3 ............... 156

Auxiliary heating /ventilation 3 .......... 163

Air intake .............................................. 166

Air outlet............................................... 166

Pollen filter ........................................... 166

Note ...................................................... 166

Maintenance ........................................ 167

Heating and ventilation system, air conditioning system

3

Ventilation, heating and cooling 3 a re combined into one unit that is d esigned to prov ide com fort regardless of the season, weather or outside temperature.

When cooling 3 is activated, the air is cooled and dried.

The heating unit heats the air a s required in all operating m od es depending on the position of the tempera ture rotary knob.

The air supply ca n be adjusted to suit requirements by means of the fan.

Vehicles without a n air conditioning system do not have buttons for cooling n, air recircula tion 4 or dem isting and defrosting V.

Air conditioning system 3 – see page 148.


3

Provides a comfortab le interior regardless of the w eather, outside temperature or season.

When an interior temperature is set with the temperature control, the temperature and am ount of inflowing air are automatically regulated. A uniform, comfortable climate in the vehic le is thereby automatically obtained b ased on outside climate conditions.

Autom atic air conditioning system 3 – see page 150.


3

Offers the g reatest comfort in the vehicle interior regardless of the c onditions outside.

To ensure a uniform and comfortable climate in the vehic le, the tem perature of inflowing air, air-flow rate and a ir distribution are a utomatica lly adapted based on the climate cond itions outside the vehicle and the current tem perature of the vehicle interior.

Climate control 141

The set values ap pear on the information display.

Electronic Clima te Control 3 – see page 156.


Air vents

Pleasant ventilation to the head area controlled by the position of the tem perature rotary knob.

To increase the air supply, set the fan to a higher speed a nd set the a ir distribution rotary knob to M.

Centre and sid e air vents (1)

To open air vent: Turn vertical adjuster wheel up.

Adjust the direction of airflow by turning the horiz ontal and v ertical adjuster wheels.

To close the air v ents, turn the adjustm ent wheel fully downwards.

Wind sc reen defroster nozzles (2)

Air distribution rotary knob to l or J: Air flows onto windsc reen a nd door windows.

Additional air vents

Ad ditional air vents ca n be found b eneath the wind screen and the door windows, a nd also in the footwell.

Rear a ir vents 3

To open air vent: Turn v ertical ad juster wheel all the way up.

Adjust quantity of air by rotating the control wheel.

The airflow can be directed as desired by tilting and swivelling the slats.

To close the air vents turn the a djustment wheel fully downward s.

If the rear seats are unoccupied close the rear noz zles to increase the air supply at the front.

Cooled glove compartment

3

Cooled air is fed into the glove compartment through a noz zle.

If glove compa rtm ent cooling is not needed , turn the wheel downwards.

Heated rear window, heated exterior mirrors

With the ignition on, the rear w indow and exterior mirror heating is sw itched on by pressing b utton Ü:

LED in the button Ü illuminated:

Rear w indow and exterior mirror heating turned on.

LED in the button Ü extinguished:

Rear w indow and exterior mirror heating turned off.


Heating takes place with the engine running and is switched off autom atically after approximately 15 minutes.

The heated rear w indow autom atically switches on if the diesel particle filter 3 is being cleaned.


Heated front seats

3

Two knurled wheels beneath the centre air vent for the left a nd right-hand seats.

Turn relevant wheel to set required heating lev el.

Control indica tor above adjustm ent wheel.

We d o not recommend prolong ed use of the highest level for people with sensitive skin.

To switch off, set wheel to 0.

Seat hea ting is operational when the ignition is on.

Heated rear seats

3

Tw o buttons at rear of centre console in front of the rear seats.

When the ignition is switched on, the heating of the corresponding seat is activated by pressing the button ß.

LED in the button ß on: Seat heating on.

LED in the button ß off: Seat heating off.

The outboard rea r seats are heated.

Driver’s seat with climate control

3

Knurled wheel at driver’s side below centre air v ents.

Move knurled wheel to required ventilation or hea ting setting as per requirements.

Control ind icator ab ov e adjustm ent wheel.

We do not recomm end prolonged use of the highest heating lev el for people w ith sensitiv e skin.

To switch off, set wheel to 0.

Function only av ailable with ignition switched on.


Heating and ventilation system

Air d istribution

Setting with the left rotary knob.

L

M l

J

K

To head area via adjustable air v ents, to footw ell

To head area via adjustable air v ents

To w indscreen and front door w indows

To windscreen, front d oor windows a nd footwell

To footwell

Open the air v ents w hen the rotary knob is set to L or M.

Tem per ature

Setting with the central rotary knob .

Red area

Blue area

=

=

Warm

Cold

Airflow

Setting with the right rotary knob .

Four fan speeds: x

1-4

Off

Selected fan sp eed

The ra te of airflow is determined by the fan. The fan should therefore also be switched on d uring a journey.


Ventilation z For maximum ventilation in head area:

Set air distribution rota ry knob to M, op en all v ents. z For ventila tion to footwell: Set air distribution rotary knob to K. z For simultaneous ventilation to the hea d area and the footwell: set air distrib ution rotary knob to L. z Set the tem perature to the desired setting. z Switch fan on, adjust fan setting as desired.

Hea ting

The amount of heat is dependent on the coolant temperature and is thus not fully attained until the engine is warm.

For rapid warming of the p assenger compartment: z Set a ir distrib ution rotary knob to desired position, preferab ly position J - see page 145. z Turn the temperature rota ry knob clockwise as far as it will go (warm). z Set the fan to speed 3. z Open air vents.

Vehicles with Quickheat 3:

Depend ing on the outside tem perature and engine temp erature, the passenger compartment can be heated more quick ly by m eans of supplementary electrical heating.

The auxiliary electric heater switches itself on a utoma tica lly.

The c om fort and general well-being of the vehicle occupants are to a large extent dependent on a suitab le v entilation a nd hea ting setting.

To obtain tem perature stratification in the vehicle w ith a pleasant "cool head and warm feet" effect, mov e the rotary air distribution rotary knob to K or J , move the temperature rotary knob to the central position a nd open the centre air vents.

Heating the footwell z Set air distribution rota ry knob to K . z Set the tem perature rotary knob to the red zone. z Switch on fan.

Wind ow demisting and d efrosting

9

Warning

Disregard of the instructions could lead to misting or icing of the w indows and sub sequent accidents due to imp aired visibility.

Misted or icy windows, such as in dam p weather, from wet clothes or when outsid e temperatures are low : z Move air distribution rotary knob to l. z For simultaneous warming of the footwell, set air distrib ution rotary k nob to J .


z Turn the temp erature rotary knob clockwise as far as it w ill go (warm). z Set the fan rotary k nob to 3 or 4. z Activate heated rear w indow Ü.

z Open sid e air vents as required and direct them towards the d oor w indows.


Air conditioning system

3

As a supplement to the heating and ventilation system, the air c onditioning system c ools and dehumidifies (dries) inflowing air.

If cooling or dehum id ification is not desired, switch off cooling in order to sa ve fuel.

Cooling switches off autom atically at low outside tem peratures.

Cooling n

Operation only with engine running and fa n switched off:

On = Press n

Off = Press n a gain

Control indica tor in the button.

Air rec irculation system 4

The air recirculation button 4 is used to set the ventilation system in a ir recirc ulation mode (control indica tor in the button).

If fumes or unpleasa nt od ours penetrate from outside: temporarily switch on air recirc ulation system 4.


The switched -on a ir recirculation system red uces air repla cement. The humidity increases and the windows may mist up.

The q uality of the interior air d eteriorates over time, which may cause drowsiness.

Comfort setting z Set cooling n as desired. z Air rec irculation system 4 off. z Set air distribution rotary knob to M or

L. z Set tem perature rotary knob as desired. z Sw itch on fan a t desired speed z Open air vents as required .

Temperature rotary k nob in centre of adjustment range: warmer air will flow into the footwell and cooler air into the upper zone, with warm er air coming from the side air vents and cooler air from the centre air vents.

Ma xim um cooling

Open w indows and sunroof 3 briefly so that warm air can esca pe rap idly. z Cooling n on. z Set air distribution rotary knob to M. z Turn the temp erature rotary knob antic lock wise as far as it will go (c old). z Set fa n rotary knob to 4. z Open all air v ents.

The system will switch automatically to a ir recirc ulation mode.


Window dem isting a nd defrosting

9

Warning

Failure to follow the instructions could lead to m isted or icy windows a nd accidents stemming from impaired visibility.

Misted or ic y windows, such as in damp weather, from wet clothes or w hen outside tem peratures are low: z Cooling n on, the air conditioning compressor autom atically switches itself off at low outsid e tempera tures (icing). z Press button V: The fan w ill automatically switch to 4, air distribution directed on to the windsc reen. z Turn the temperature rota ry knob clockwise.

z Open side air vents as required and direct them towa rd s d oor w indows. z Sw itch on heated rear window Ü.

To switch off, press button V aga in; the air c onditioning w ill operate at the settings selected previously.


3

Provides a uniformly comfortab le interior regardless of the weather, outside temperature or season.

To ensure a constant and com fortable climate in the vehicle, the temperature of the inflowing air and the air-flow rate are changed automatically based on clima te conditions outsid e the vehicle.

Temperature changes due to external influences, such as direct sunlight, are automatically compensated .


Autom atic m ode

Basic setting for maximum comfort: z Set fan rotary knob to A. z Set air d istribution rota ry k nob to desired position – see next column. z Use rotary knob to set temperature to

22 °C (a higher or lower tem perature can be set as desired). z Air conditioning compressor activation – see pa ge 152. z All front air vents op en. If d esired, the rear air v ents also 3.

Dea ctivation of the air conditioning compressor ca n reduce the level of comfort and safety – see pag e 152.

Air distribution

Setting with the left rotary k nob.

L To head area via adjustable air vents, to footwell

M l

To head area via adjustable air vents

To windscreen and front d oor windows

J

K

To windsc reen, front door windows and footwell

To footw ell

Intermediate settings are possible.

Open the air vents w hen the air distribution rotary knob is set to L or M.

Temperatur e p reset

Setting with the centre rotary knob .

Set the rotary knob to a value between

17 °C and 27 ° C. Intermed iate settings are possible.

The selected tem perature is m ainta ined.

For reasons of com fort, temperature can only be changed in small increments.

There is no temperature control for setting s below 17 °C (all the way left) or above

27 °C (a ll the way right). The air conditioning system works at ma ximum cooling or heating.


Airflow

Setting with the right rotary k nob.

1 - 4 M anual fan speed setting, interm ediate settings are p ossib le

A x

Automatic fan speed c ontrol

Fan off

The fan sp eed regulates the rate of airflow that is needed to maintain the preselected tem perature.

Select automatic m ode for the hig hest lev el of comfort.

When the fan is off, the air conditioning compressor is also off.

To activate/dea ctivate air c ond itioning

compressor (c ooling) n

Operation only with engine running and fa n switched off:

On

Off

=

=

Press n

Press n again

Control indica tor in the button.

When the cooling (air conditioning compressor) is ac tiv e, the air is cooled and dehum idified. If cooling or dehum idifica tion is not desired , switch off cooling in order to sav e fuel.

Cooling switches off automatically a t low outside temperatures.

Manual air recirc ulation m ode

The a ir recirculation system minimises the entry of outside air and the air in the passenger com partment is circulated .

Press button 4 , control indica tor in button.


The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air recirculation mode. The quality of the passenger compa rtm ent air deteriorates whic h may c ause the v ehicle occ upa nts to feel drow sy. In operation w ithout cooling , the air humidity increases, so the windows may mist up. Consequently, manual air recirculation should only be run for short periods of time.

To deactiv ate m anual air recirculation:

Press button 4 ag ain. The control indica tor in the button extinguishes.

Ventilation z For m aximum v entilation in head area: set air distrib ution rotary knob to M and open all a ir vents. z For v entilation to footwell: Set air distribution rota ry knob to K .

z For sim ultaneous ventilation to the head area and the footwell: set a ir distribution rotary knob to L . z Set desired temperature. z Set fa n rotary knob to A. The fan can also be ma nually set: Set the rotary knob to position 1 - 4. Interm ediate settings are a lso possible.


Heating

The a mount of heat is dependent on the coolant temp erature a nd is thus not fully attained until the engine is w arm.

For ra pid warming of the passenger compartment: z Set the air distribution rotary knob to the desired p osition – see page 145. z Set the centre rotary knob to the desired temperature. We recommend a value of about 22 °C. z Set fan rotary knob to A. The fan can also be manually set: Set the rotary knob to position 1 - 4. Intermediate settings are also possible.

Vehicles with Quickheat 3:

Depend ing on the outside tem perature and engine temp erature, the passenger compartment can be heated more quick ly by m eans of supplementary electrical heating.

The auxiliary electric heater switches itself on a utoma tica lly.

The comfort and general well-b eing of the vehicle occupants a re to a large extent dependent on a suitable ventilation and heating setting.

To ob ta in temperature stratification in the vehicle with a pleasa nt "cool head and warm feet" effect, move the rotary air distribution rotary knob to K or J, m ov e the rotary tempera ture rotary knob to approx. 22° and open the centre air vents.

Ma xim um cooling for very hot interior

Open w indows and sunroof 3 briefly so that warm air can esca pe rap idly. z Cooling n on. z Set air distribution rotary knob to M. z Set the temperature rota ry knob to the desired temperature. z Set fa n rotary knob to A. z Open all air v ents.

The a utomatic air conditioning system provides maximum cooling down to the set value.

At settings below 17 °C (rotary knob all the way to the left), the system continually runs with maximum cooling. When the air conditioning c om pressor is running, air recirculation is autom atically switched on.

Dem isting and defr osting the window s

9

Warning

Failure to follow the instructions could lead to misted or icy windows and accidents stemming from impa ired visibility.

Misted or icy windows, such as in dam p weather, from wet clothes or when outsid e temperatures are low : z Cooling n on - the AC compressor deactivates a utomatically when outside temperatures are low (icing).


z Press b utton V: In fan rota ry knob position A, the fan automatically switches to the highest sp eed and air is directed to the wind screen. z Set temperature to m aximum heating , i.e. turn the centre rota ry knob all the way to the right (28 °C). z Switch on heated rear window Ü.

To switch off, press button V again; the automatic a ir cond itioning system w ill operate at the settings selected previously.



3

Provides the greatest amount of comfort in the interior regardless of the weather, outside tem perature or season.

To ensure constant and comfortable climate in the v ehicle, the tempera ture of the inflowing air, the air-flow rate a nd the air distrib ution are cha nged automatically according to clim atic conditions outside the v ehicle.

The a ir is a utomatica lly regulated in accordance with the settings personally selected for the driver’s a nd front passenger’s sides.

Tem perature cha ng es due to externa l influences, such as direct sunlig ht, are automatically compensated.

Data is show n on the informa tion display.

Setting modifications are briefly shown in the information display, superim posed over the currently displayed menu.

The display can vary ac cord ing to the type of presentation – see p age 108.

Electronic Climate Control settings are stored in the vehicle key when the vehicle is locked - see "Storing c ustom vehicle settings in the vehicle key" - see page 28.

FM [TP]

�

CDin

90.6

MHz

Different settings are stored for each remote control. Use of a remote c ontrol will activate the settings associated with it.

Manua l settings e.g. operating without cooling and a ir distrib ution c an be selected using the menu - see pag e 158.

When cooling (air conditioning compressor) is active, a ir is cooled and dehumidified.

The pollen filter removes d ust, soot, pollen and spores from the inflowing outside air.

The autom atic air rec irculation system 3 has an air quality sensor 3 to detect harmful a mbient gases, in which case it will switch automatically to a ir recirculation.

When set to automa tic mode, Electronic

Clim ate Control p rov id es the optima l settings for almost all conditions. If nec essary, Electronic Climate Control settings can be modified manually.

The Elec tronic Climate Control is only operational w hen the engine is running.

Cooling (air conditioning compressor) switches off autom atically at low outside temperatures.

Autom atic m ode

Basic setting for maximum comfort: z Press AUTO button. z Open all front a ir vents. If d esired, the rear air v ents also 3. z Air conditioning compressor activation – see pa ge 160. z Ind ividually set temperature for the driv er’s and front passenger’s side to

22 °C using the outer knobs.

The temperature c an be set higher or lower as desired.

Different tem peratures can b e set for the driver’s and front passenger’s sides.

Switching off the air conditioning compressor (Eco app ears on the display) can have a detrimental effect on comfort and safety - see page 160.

All air vents (except the rea r air vents 3 ) are controlled automa tic ally in automatic mode. The front air vents should therefore always be open.


Autom atic air recirculation system 3

The ventilation system is set to air recirc ulation mode and interior a ir is recirc ulated.

The automatic air recircula tion system has an air qua lity sensor to d etect harmful gases in the outside air, in whic h case it will switch automatically to a ir recirculation.

At low outsid e temperatures and with the cooling (air conditioning c om pressor) switched off, automa tic air recirculation operation w ill be d isabled. This prev ents the wind ow s from misting up. Switch ma nually to air recirculation as necessary.

Activating/deac tiv ating autom atic air recirc ulation system – see page 161.

Manual air recirculation m ode – see page 162.


Temperature pr eset

Using the outer k nobs, temperatures can be indiv id ua lly set to va lues between 16 °C and 28 °C.

For reasons of comfort, tempera ture can only be changed in sm all increments.

Vehicles with Quic kheat 3 :

Dep ending on the outside temperature and engine temperature, the p assenger compartment can be heated more quickly by mea ns of supplementary electrical heating.

The a uxilia ry electric hea ter switches itself on automatically.

If a temperature below 16 °C is set,

Lo appears on the display: the Electronic

Clim ate Control system runs constantly at maximum cooling power. The temperature is not regulated .

If a temperature ab ov e 28 °C is set,

Hi appea rs on the display: the Electronic

Clim ate Control runs constantly at maximum heating power. The temp erature is not regulated .

Tem perature settings are stored when the ignition is switched off.

FM [TP] CDin

� 90.6

MHz

Climate

Air distribut.

AC

Autom. blower

Auto. recirc

Common tempera ture setting

Press the knob for the driver’s sid e. The temperature for both the driver’s and front passenger’s side can be set together using the knob on the driver’s side.

Individual tem perature settings

Press the knob for the front passenger’s side. Tempera tures c an be set independ ently of each other using the knob s on the driver’s and front p assenger’s sides.

The tem perature on both the driver’s and front passenger’s side are shown in the display.

For reasons of comfort, the tempera tures cannot d iffer by m ore than 2 °C.

Ma nua l settings

Under certain circumstances (e.g. iced or misted windows), the func tions of the

Electronic Climate Control can be m od ified ma nually.

Electronic Clima te Control system settings can b e changed via the centre knob, the buttons a nd the menus shown on the display.

Press the centre knob to call up the m enu.

The menu for manual Electronic Clima te

Control system settings app ears on the display.

Air distribut.

FM [TP] CDin

� 90.6

MHz


The a irflow can be increased or decreased by turning the central k nob.

To return to automatic m ode: press button V or AUTO.

Heated rear w indow - see page 143.

Auxiliary heating 3 - see page 163.

The individ ual menu items are highlighted by rota ting the centre knob and selected by pressing it. Selecting certain menus by pressing the knob will open a submenu.

To exit a m enu, turn the centre knob left or right to Return or Ma in and select.

Manual settings are stored when the ignition is switched off.

Wind ow demisting and d efrosting

9

Warning

Failure to follow the instructions could lead to misted or icy windows and accidents stemming from impa ired visibility.

Misted or icy windows, such as in dam p weather, from wet clothes or when outsid e temperatures are low :

Press button V, c ontrol indicator in button.

Temperature and a ir distribution setting s are m ade autom atically, the fan runs at a high speed (fan speed is indicated on the display) and the wind ow s a re quickly cleared of moisture and ice.


Climate

Air distribut.

AC

Autom. blower

Auto. recirc

Air conditioning on / off

Inflowing air is neither cooled nor dehumidified. This restricts the level of comfort provided by the Electronic Climate

Control system . This may cause the wind ow s to m ist up, for exa mple.

To activate cooling: Select m enu item AC from the manual settings menu and press to activate cooling.

Air distribut.

Activating and d eac tiva ting air conditioning com pressor

If no cooling or dehumidification is req uired, switch the a ir cond itioning compressor off (maxim um energy sav ing s):

Highlight menu item AC from the manua l settings menu and select by pressing the knob. Eco a ppears on the d isplay.

Air distribution

Selec t menu item Air d istribut. from the ma nual settings menu.

Mak e the desired setting s in the Air

distribut. menu:

Up Air distribution towards windscreen and front door windows

Midd le Air distribution to v ehicle occupants via a djustable air vents a t front

Down Air distribution towards footwell

Return to a utomatic air distribution: deactivate relevant setting or press button AUTO.

FM [TP] CDin

� 90.6

MHz

Automatic blower

Strong

Normal

Weak


Climate

Air distribut.

AC

Autom. blower

Auto. recirc

Automatic recirculation air control at bad outside air

Airflow

Turn the centre rotary knob c lock wise or anticlockwise (if no menu for m anua l settings is d isplayed). The selec ted fan lev el is indicated by x and numbers in the display.

At speed 0 both the fan a nd cooling (a ir conditioning c om pressor) are switc hed off.

To return to automatic mode: Press AUTO button.

Fan c ontrol in autom atic mode 3

Fan regulation in a utomatic mode can be modified.

Select menu item A utomatic blow er from the manual settings menu a nd select the desired fan control.

Depend ing on the setting, the maxim um airflow, and thereby the noise level, will increase.

Sw itching autom atic air rec irculation 3 on or off

The automatic air recircula tion system has an air qua lity sensor to d etect harmful gases in the outside air, in whic h case it will switch automatically to a ir recirculation.

Selec t menu item Auto. r ecirc from the ma nual settings menu and switc h it on or off by pressing.

Switc h to manual air rec irculation as nec essary.


Residual air conditioning on

The air conditioning will operate for a limited period of tim e.

If necessa ry, the auxiliary heating 3 also automatically switches on. Observ e notes on page 163.

To cancel air conditioning, press the A UTO button.

Manual air recirc ulation m ode

The a ir recirculation system minimises the entry of outside air and the air in the passenger com partment is circulated .

Press button 4 , control indica tor in button.

The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air recirculation mode. The quality of the passenger com partment a ir deteriorates which may cause the vehicle occupants to feel drowsy. In op eration without c ooling, the a ir humid ity increases, so the wind ow s may mist up. Conseq uently, m anual air recirculation should only be run for short periods of time.

To deactivate manual air recirc ulation:

Press button 4 again. The control indicator in the b utton exting uishes.

Air conditioning with the eng ine not running

When the vehicle is stop ped and the ignition is off, the heat or cooling power still in the system can b e used to condition the passenger compa rtm ent, for example when stop ped at a level crossing.

Press AUTO button with the ignition off.

Resid ua l air c onditioning on will appear briefly in the disp lay.

Climate

Air distribut.

AC

Autom. blower

Auto. recirc

Parking heater

Auxiliary heating/ventilation

3

If the engine is switched off, the interior is heated or ventilated d epending on the values that hav e been set and the interior tem perature.

The regulation is in ac corda nc e with the most recent temp erature settings in the

Electronic Climate Control system – see page 158. When the system is sw itched on, the temperature setting can b e v aried using the outer rotary k nobs.


The air is direc ted to the windsc reen a nd the front door wind ow s if the V button is pressed before switching the ignition off.

9

Warning

Do not switch auxiliary heater on in filling stations or closed spaces – risk of fire or injury.

Parking heater

Start 1

Start 2

Start 3

On

Setting

Direct a ctivation

For immediate activation with the ignition on, select menu item Par king heater and then m enu item On from the manual settings menu.

When the system is activated, the control indicator in the AUTO button will illuminate.

The system switches itself off automatically after a maximum of 60 minutes, depending on the values that have been set and the interior temperature.

For early dea ctiv ation, press the AUTO button or select menu item Pa rking heater and then menu item On onc e ag ain.


Parking heater

Start 1

Start 2

Start 3

On

Setting

Parking heater

Start 1

Start 2

Start 3

On

Setting

Setting

Start 1

Start 2

Start 3

Sw itching on a t a pr ogramm ed tim e

Three programm ed times can be stored for switching on.

For safety reasons only one program med time for switching on can b e activ e at any one time. After the heating cycle has been completed, the next req uired time for switching on m ust be activa ted a fresh.

To store a programm ed time for activation, select menu item Parking heater from the manual settings menu.

After m enu item Pa rking heater the current status will b e shown.

To set a time, select menu item Setting.

Then select menu item Sta rt 1, Sta rt 2 or Start 3 a nd set the d esired time.

Selec t the required time for programmed switching on.


The system switches itself off automatically after a ma ximum of 60 m inutes depending on the values that have been set and the interior temperature.

To cancel air conditioning, press the A UTO button.

To perform setting s, the Parking heater menu can be called up within 2 hours of switching the ignition off by pressing on the central rotary knob.


Remote contr ol

The system c an also be switched on and off direc tly using the rem ote control:

On = Press button b, the control indicator in the remote control will illum ina te.

Off = Press button §, the control indicator in the remote control will illum ina te

Whilst the control indicator is illum ina ted, no further signal can be sent.


The remote control has a ra nge of approx.

600 m. The range can be reduced by ob structions between the sender and receiver (e.g. walls) and by low power in the battery.

The system switches itself off automatically after a maximum of 60 minutes depend ing on the values that hav e been set and the interior temperature.

The auxiliary heating can be switched off at any time by pressing the button §.

Deactivating a n activated sw itc h-on time:

1. Press button §.

2. Dela y of at least 3 second s.

3. Press button § again.

If required , up to three add itional remote control units c an be prog rammed. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall

Authorised Repairer.

Cha nging the remote control battery

Replace the battery imm ediately if the range of the remote control sta rts to become reduced.

Insert a pointed object into the opening in the und erside of the remote control and flip open the cover. Replace batteries observing installation position. For battery typ e – see page 307.

Always exchange a ll b atteries at the same time.

Mak e sure that you dispose of old batteries in accordance with env ironmental protec tion regulations.


Air intake

The air intakes in front of the wind screen on the far right a nd left sides of the engine compartment must be kept clear to a llow air intak e. Rem ove any leav es, d irt or snow.

Air outlet

Do not c ov er the air outlets when storing items in the lug gage compa rtm ent storage compartments.

Pollen filter

The pollen filter cleans dust, soot, pollen and spores from the air entering from outside. The activ e ca rb on layer 3 eliminates m ost odours and harmful ambient g ases from the air.

Have the pollen filter repla ced b y a work shop at the rep la cement intervals specified in the Service Book let.

Note

If the windsc reen is misted due to damp weather, temporarily set the system as desc ribed under "Wind ow dem isting and defrosting" - see pa ges 147, 150, 159.

The cooling system 3 operates most effectively with the windows and sunroof 3 closed. If the p assenger compartment has hea ted up c onsiderab ly a fter a long period in direct sunlight, briefly open the windows and sunroof 3 so that the hot air can esca pe q uick ly.

When cooling 3 (air c onditioning compressor) is switched on, condensation forms, which is expelled from the underside of the v ehicle.

At lea st one air vent must b e open while cooling 3 (air conditioning compressor) is on in order to prevent the evaporator from icing up due to lack of air movement.

Cooling switches off autom atically at low outside tem peratures.

When the auxiliary hea ting/auxiliary ventilation 3 is switched on, the Vauxhall alarm system monitoring of the vehicle interior 3 is deactivated.

Auxiliary heating 3 consumes fuel (a pprox.

0.3 litres per heating process on average).

When the auxiliary hea ting 3 is sw itched on, there may briefly be some smoke and noise.

The auxiliary heating 3 only switches itself on at outside temperatures of less than approx. 20 °C and a t coolant temperatures of less than approx. 80 °C.

In order to im prov e heating power and ensure that the engine operating temperature is rea ched quickly, auxiliary heating 3 also switches on automatically when driving if the outside temp erature is less than ap prox. 8 °C. This occurs irresp ective of stored auxiliary heating switch-on tim es. Auxiliary heating switches itself off automatically when the engine is switched off, while the combustion air fa n continues running for ap prox. 2 minutes

(humming noise).


Maintenance

In order to ensure consistently good operation, the air conditioning compressor 3 m ust be switched on for sev eral minutes once per m onth irrespective of the w eather or time of yea r.

If the vehicle has an Electronic Climate

Control system, this is done automa tic ally during travel. Operation with cooling (air conditioning compressor) is not possible when outside temperatures are low . Ev ery

6 m onths, the auxiliary heating 3 should be operated for a few m inutes a t a preset temperature above 22 ° C.

On faults, c ontact a workshop.

168 Driving and operation

Driving and operation

Easytronic

3

The automatic Easytronic transmission permits manual (Manua l mode) or autom atic gearshifting (Automa tic m ode), both with automa tic clutch control.

9

Warning

Disregard of these instructions m ay lead to injuries or endanger life.

Ea sytronic 3 ......................................... 168

Autom atic transm ission 3 .................. 176

Driving hints ......................................... 184

Sav ing fuel, protecting the environment ...................................... 186

Fuels, refuelling .................................... 188

Ca ta lytic converter, exhaust g ases.... 190

Drive Control System s ......................... 196

Brake system ........................................ 208

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS u)........ 210

Wheels, tyres ........................................ 211

Roof racks 3 ......................................... 218

Towing eq uipm ent 3 ........................... 219

Towing eq uipm ent with removable coup ling ball bar 3 , Sa loon /

Hatch 3 .............................................. 219

Towing eq uipm ent with pivoting coup ling ball bar 3 ........................... 222

Ca ra van/trailer tow ing ........................ 223

Transmission disp lay

Shows the mode or current gear.

Sta rting the engine

Dep ress footbrake when starting the engine. The engine ca n only be started with the footbrake depressed. "N" ap pears on the transmission display. If the footb rake is not depressed the control indicator j illuminates in the instrum ent cluster, and "N " flashes in the transmission display - the eng ine cannot be started.

Also the vehic le cannot be sta rted if all brake lights ha ve fa iled.

It is not necessary to select the neutral position before starting. If no gear is engaged, the transmission automatically shifts into neutral p osition (N) before starting the engine. This can lead to a slight delay w hen starting.

Driving and operation 169

Easytronic op era tion via the selector lever

Always m ove the selec tor lever in the app ropriate direc tion as far a s it w ill go.

Upon release, it automatically returns to the centre position. Pay heed to the gear/m od e indicator in the tra nsmission display.

Move selector lever toward s N

N eutral.


Sta rting-off

Dep ress the footbra ke, release the handbrake, mov e the selector lever to A,

+

or

-

. Easytronic is in Automatic mode and first g ear is eng aged (second gear if the

Winter programme is active). "A" appears on the transmission display.

The v ehicle begins to "creep" when the footb rake is released .

It is also p ossible to start-off without depressing the footbrake if the a ccelerator pedal is operated directly after mov ing the selector lever. If there is no immediate acceleration or the footbrake is not depressed , no gear is engaged and "A" flashes. After a few seconds, the display reverts to "N". Repeat p reviously d escribed starting procedure.

In Automa tic mode, selection of other gears is automatic irrespectiv e of d riv ing conditions.

Move selector lever towa rds A

Switch between Automa tic and Manual mode.

Manua l gearshifting is possib le in Manual mode. The currently engaged gear appea rs on the displa y.

If the engine speed is too low the Easytronic will automatically shift to a lower g ear even in Manua l mode. This prevents the engine from stalling.

Move selector lever toward s + or -

+

Shift to a higher gear

-

Shift to a lower gea r

If a hig her gear is selected when the running speed is too low, or a lower gear when the speed is too high, no shift is effected. This p revents the engine from running at too low or too hig h revs.

Gears can be sk ip ped by m ov ing the selector lever repeatedly a t short intervals.

If the vehicle is in Automatic mode, on movement of the selec tor lever to

+

or

Ea sytronic shifts to Manual m od e and changes up or d ow n. The transmission

-

display shows the currently selected gear.

Move selector lever tow ards R

Reverse gear. Engage only when vehicle is stationary.

Dep ress the footbra ke, release the handbrake and m ov e the selector lever to

R. Rev erse gea r is eng aged. "R" ap pears on the transmission display.

The v ehicle begins to "creep" when the footb rake is released .

It is also p ossible to start-off in reverse without depressing the footbrake if the accelerator pedal is opera ted directly after moving the selector lev er. If there is no immed iate acceleration or the footbrake is not depressed, no gear is enga ged and "R" flashes. After a few seconds, the display reverts to "N". Repeat p reviously d escribed starting procedure.


Electronically controlled driving pr og ramm es z By m eans of delayed gear cha nging

(higher engine speed s) following a cold start, the opera ting temperature programme in Autom atic mode quickly and automatically brings the catalytic conv erter to the tem perature required for optim um polluta nt reduction. z Adaptive programmes autom atically adapt gearshifting in Automatic mode to suit the driving conditions, such as if the vehicle is towing a caravan/trailer, ha s a high pa yload, or is being driven on inclines. z Winter programme: Press button T – see next pa ge.


If the v ehicle is switched to Manua l mode while the Winter prog ra mme is active, the

Winter prog ra mme is interrupted. The

Winter programm e resumes upon return to

Automatic mode.

Winter progr amme T

In the event of diffic ulties starting-off on slip pery road s, p ress button T ("A" and T appear in the tra nsmission display).

Ea sytronic switches to Automatic mode and the vehicle sets off in second gea r.

The Winter p rogram me is switched off by: z Pressing button T again. z Turning off the ignition.

In order to protect the Easytronic the

Winter programme autom atically switches itself off at extremely high clutch tem peratures.

Kickdown

Depress accelerator past resistance point: transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on engine speed. Full engine power is available for acceleration.

During k ickdown no ma nual gearshifting is possible.


When the engine speed a pproaches its upper limit, the transmission shifts to a higher gear during kick down even in

Manual mode.

Without kick down this automatic shift is not effec ted in Ma nual m ode.

Eng ine braking

Autom atic mode:

When driv ing downhill, Easytronic d oes not shift into higher gears until a fairly high engine sp eed has been reac hed. When braking, Easytronic shifts down in good time.

Manual mode:

To utilise the engine braking effect, select a lower gear in g ood time w hen driving downhill.

"Rocking" the vehic le

If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle to free it from sand, mud, snow or a hole, move the selector lever between R and A

(or + or -) in a repeat pattern while app lying lig ht p ressure to the accelerator pedal. Do not rac e the engine and avoid sudden acceleration.

This applies only to the exceptional circum stances mentioned a bove.

Ma noeuvr ing the vehicle

To ma noeuv re the vehicle back and forth during attempts to park or in ga ra ge entrances the creeping m ov ement can be utilised by releasing the footb ra ke.

N ever actuate accelerator and brake pedals sim ultaneously.

To prevent d amage, Easytronic disengag es the "creep function" a t extrem ely high a utomatic clutch temperatures.


Stop ping the vehic le

In Automatic or Manual m od e, when the vehic le has stopp ed first gear (with Winter mode enga ged, second gear) is engaged automatically and the clutch relea sed. In R rev erse remains engaged.

When the engine is running, a gear is enga ged and the footbrake is not depressed, a wa rning buzzer sounds w hen the d riv er’s door is opened and the gea r shown in the transmission d isplay flashes at a rapid rate. If the hand brake is not applied, the vehicle creeps. Move the selector lever to N a nd apply the handbrake.

When stop ping on gradients, app ly the handbrake or depress the brake pedal. To prevent overheating of the clutch, do not increase engine speed to ensure smooth idling when in gear.

In order to prev ent dama ge to the

Ea sytronic the clutc h is automatically enga ged at extremely high clutch tem peratures.

Switch off eng ine if stop ping for a lengthy period, e.g. in traffic jams or at level crossings.

Vehicle storag e

Before leaving the vehicle: z Apply hand brake, z Remove ignition key.

The most recently engaged gear (ind icator in transmission display) remains engaged.

With N , no gea r is engaged.

When the ignition is switched off the

Easytronic no longer responds to movem ent of the selector lev er.

Lock the vehicle. Otherwise the battery may become discharged if the vehicle is parked for long periods.

If the handbrak e has not been ap plied, the control indicator R flashes for a few second s a fter the ignition is switched off.

With the engine off a nd the handbrak e not applied, when the driver’s door is opened a warning buzzer sounds and the control indica tor R flashes; switch on ignition, engage gear, switch off ignition and apply ha ndb ra ke.

Fault

Control indicator A illuminates in the event of a fa ult in the Easytronic system. In the event of serious faults, "F" a lso appears on the transmission display.

It is possib le to continue driving if only control ind icator A illuminates. M anual mode can then no longer be selected.

If "F" also appea rs on the tra nsmission display, continued driving is not possible.

Hav e the cause of the fault elim ina ted by a workshop. The self-d ia gnosis integrated into the system allows rapid fault identification.

Interrup tion of power supply

The c lutch is not disengaged if the vehicle battery is discharged and a gear has been selected. The vehicle ca nnot move.

If the battery is flat, start the vehicle using jump leads – see pag e 230.

If the cause of the power failure is not a discharged battery, conta ct a workshop. If the vehicle m ust be rem ov ed from flowing tra ffic, relea se the c lutch as follows:

1. Apply handbrak e and switch off ignition.

2. Opening and p ropp ing up the bonnet - see page 228.

3. Clean Easytronic around the cap

(see Fig. 17925 J) so that no d irt c an get into the opening when the cap is rem oved.

4. Rotate cap to slacken and remove by lifting upwards – see illustration.

5. Turn the a djusting screw clockwise using a flat-head screwdriver (v ehicle tools 3 – see page 238) until clear resistance can be felt. The clutch has now been disengaged.

Do not turn beyond the resista nce, since this can damag e the Easytronic.


6. Fit cleaned cap ag ain. The cap must be in full contact w ith the housing.

Towing the vehic le and starting the eng ine is not perm itted when the clutch has been released in this way, although the vehicle can b e m ov ed a short distance.

Contact a workshop immediately.


Automatic transmission

3

The a utomatic tra nsmission allows automatic shifting (Autom atic mode) or manual shifting (Ma nua l mode) to tak e place.

The engine ca n only be started with the selector lever in P or N. When starting in N, depress the footbrake or apply the handbrake. After the engine has started , depress the footbrake before engaging a gear. Do not accelerate while selecting a gear. Onc e a gear is engaged and the footb rake is released, the vehicle "creeps".

Never depress the footbrak e and the accelerator pedal simultaneously. The selected g ear is shown in the transmission display - see end column.

9

Warning

Disregard of these instructions m ay lead to injuries or endanger life.

Selecting D puts the transmission in

Automatic mode.

If the selec tor lever is m oved to the left from the D position, Manual mode is activated .

Gear changes can then be ma de manually by moving the selec tor lever towards + or -.

R

N

Transmission disp lay

Display of selector lev er setting, g ear and mode.

P Pa rk position

Reverse gear

Neutral

D

1-6

Automatic mode

Manua l mode showing the gear selected

Selector lever setting s P, R, N and D

(Automatic mod e)

P Park position, front wheels blocked.

Only select with vehicle sta tionary and handbrake app lied. "P" appears on the transmission display.

R Reverse gear. Only select when vehic le is stationary. "R" appears on the transmission display.

N Neutra l or idling position. "N" appears on the transm ission display.

D Drive position for norma l driving in 1st to highest gear. "D" appears on the transm ission display.


The selector lever can only be mov ed out of position P or N w ith the ig nition switched on and the footbrake depressed (selector lever lock). In selector lev er position N the selector lever lock is activa ted after a delay and only if the vehicle is stationary.

In positions P or N, the control indicator j illuminates red in the selector lever indica tor, the selector lever is blocked - see Fig. S 12547.

To engage P or R , press button on selector lever.

The engine can only b e started with lever in position P or N . When position N is selected, depress footbrak e or ap ply handbrake before starting.

Do not accelerate during the selection procedure.

If the transmission fluid tempera ture is less than -25 °C, the selector lever cannot be mov ed until the fluid tempera ture reac hes

-25 °C with the engine running (P or N flashes in the transmission disp la y for as long as the selector lever is locked).


ActiveSelect (Manual m ode)

Shift the selector lev er from D first to the left and then forwards or ba ckwards.

-

+

Shift to a higher g ear

Shift to a lower gear

If a higher gear is selected at too low a speed or a lower gear selected at too high a speed, there is no change. This avoids rev s that a re too low or too high.

If the engine speed is too slow, the tra nsmission a utomatica lly shifts to a lower gear, but not if the gear was selected below a certain speed.

If a higher gear is selected below a certain speed a downshift does not ta ke p lace.

When engine speed is high, there is no autom atic shift to a higher gea r.

For reasons of safety, k ickdown also functions in Manual mode – see page 180.

The selected g ear is shown in the tra nsmission display – see page 176.

Electronically controlled driving pr og ramm es z With adaptive prog ra mmes, shifting into other gears is handled automatically based on the driving style, e.g.:

– Economical driving style: at slow er engine speeds.

– Adaptation to specia l driving conditions still takes pla ce, such as: driving up a nd down hills, tow ing a carav an/trailer, and with a heavy load.


z Automatic neutra l shift function automa tic ally sets the transm ission to N to reduce fuel consumption, e.g. at traffic lights.

The automatic neutral shift function is activated when the following occurs simultaneously:

– The selector lever is in Autom atic or

Manual mode.

– The footbrake is depressed.

– The v ehicle is stationa ry.

– The ac celera tor p edal is not actuated.

– The transmission fluid temperature is above 0 °C.

As soon as the footbrake is released and the accelerator pedal is depressed, the vehicle starts off in the usua l manner. z After a cold start, the operating temperature programme ensures that the correct gear (inc reased engine speed) is selected to quickly bring the catalytic converter to the temperature req uired for optimum pollutant red uc tion. z If the Continuous Da mping Control is set to SPORT mode 3, the shift times are reduced and gear changes occ ur a t hig her engine sp eeds (not when cruise control is active). The control indicator 1 also illuminates in the transmission displa y - see pag e 176.

Continuous Damping Control, SPORT mode 3 - see pag e 198. z Winter programme: Press button T.

Control indica tor T appears on the tra nsmission display - see next page and page 176.


To deactiv ate

The Winter programme is switched off by: z pressing button T again, z switching off the ignition, z switching to Manua l mode.

To protect aga inst dam age, the startingoff aid autom atically cuts out at very high tra nsmission fluid tem peratures.

Winter progr amme T

Press b utton T if you are having problems starting-off on a slippery road surfac e.

To activate

The Winter programme can be switched in

Autom atic mode (T illuminates in the transm ission display - see page 176). The vehic le shifts to 4th gea r.

Kickdown

Depress accelerator past resistance point: transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on engine speed. Full engine power is available for acceleration.

For safety reasons, k ickdown is available in both Automatic mode and M anual mode.

Eng ine braking

The a utomatic tra nsmission automatically selects the driving programm e w ith optimal engine brak ing effect.

As needed, lower gears can also be selected in M anual mode to increase engine braking effect. 1st gear has the greatest braking effect.

"Rocking" the vehic le

If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle to free it from sand, mud, snow or a hole, move the selector lever from D to R in a repeat pattern w hile sim ultaneously applying light pressure to the accelerator pedal. Do not race the engine and av oid sudden acceleration.

This applies only to the exceptional circum stances mentioned a bove.


Ma noeuvr ing the vehicle

To ma noeuv re the vehicle back and forth during attempts to park or in ga ra ge entrances, the v ehicle’s creeping mov ement can be utilised by releasing the footbrake.

N ever actuate accelerator and brake pedals sim ultaneously.


Stop ping the vehic le

The selector lever can be left in the chosen gear with the engine running.

When stop ping on gradients apply handbrake or depress brake peda l. To prevent overheating of the transmission, do not increase engine revolutions to ensure smooth idling while standing if a gear has been selected.

Switch off eng ine if stop ping for a lengthy period, e.g. in traffic jams or at level crossings.

Before leav ing the vehicle, apply handbrake, then p la ce selector lev er in position P and remove ignition key.

The ignition key can only be removed when the selector lever is in position P.

If the selector lever is not in the P position when the ig nition is sw itched off, control indica tor j in the selec tor lever ind icator strip flashes – see pa ge 177, Fig. S 12547.

Shift the selector lever to P.

If the ignition key is not removed, the battery m ay be discharged if the vehicle is then left to stand for a lengthy period of tim e.

Fault

In the ev ent of a fault in the automa tic transmission, control indica tor A illuminates. The transmission no longer shifts automatically. Driving can be continued.

In Manual mode, 2nd gear and the highest gear ca n be engag ed. For some faults, only the highest gear is av ailable.

Only the highest gear is ava ila ble in D in

Automatic mode.


Illumination of control indicator A can also indicate a fault in the engine electronic s – see page 192.

For diesel engines 1) Z 19 DTL, Z 19 DT,

Z 19 DTH illum ina tion of control indicator A c ould a lso indicate that the diesel fuel filter must be d ra ined of water - see page 274.

Hav e the cause of the fault elim inated by a workshop.

Interruption of p ower supply

If the v ehicle b attery is flat, the selector lever cannot be moved out of position P or N.

If the ba ttery is flat, start the v ehicle using jump lead s – see page 230.

If the cause is not a discharged battery, unlock selector lev er:

1. Apply hand brake.

2. Remove the ashtray – see page 94.

3. Pull out ashtray socket upwards.

4. Press the yellow catch downwards w ith a screwdriver and move the selector lever out of P.

5. Refit ashtra y socket in centre console and latch into position.

6. Refit ashtra y.

Selec ting P or N again effects lock ing aga in. Have the c ause of the interruption of power supp ly rectified by a workshop .

1) Sales designation – see page 28 4, 285.


Driving hints

The first 600 miles (1000 km)

Drive your vehicle at v arious speeds. Do not use full throttle. Never allow the eng ine to labour at low revs.

Make good use of all gea rs. Depress the accelerator pedal a maximum of around three quarters of the ava ila ble ped al travel in all gears.

Do not drive faster than three quarters of maximum speed.

Do not brake unnecessarily hard for the first 125 miles (200 km ).

Never coa st with engine not running

Many units will not function in this situation

(e.g. brak e serv o unit, elec tro-hydraulic power steering). Driving in this manner is a danger to yourself and others.

Brake servo unit

When the engine is not running, the brake servo unit is no longer effective once the footb rake has been depressed onc e or twice. Braking effect is not reduced, b ut significantly greater force is required for braking.

Electro-hydraulic power assisted steering

If the power-assisted steering fails when being towed with the engine switched off, the vehicle can still be steered, but considera bly more forc e is req uired.

Dr iving in mountainous terrain or with a caravan/trailer

The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its cooling p ow er is therefore independent of the engine speed.

Since a considerable amount of heat is genera ted at high engine speeds and less at slower speeds, do not shift d ow n when climbing hills whilst the v ehicle is still coping with the gradient in the higher g ear.

Diesel engines: On rising gradients of 10% or more, do not drive fa ster tha n 20 mph

(30 km/h) in 1st gear or 30 mph (50 k m/h) in 2nd g ear; with automa tic tra nsmission 3, do not exceed 25 mph

(40 km/h) in position 1.

Dr iving with a roof load

Do not exceed the permissible roof load – see p ages 218, 293. For reasons of safety, distribute the load evenly and secure it prop erly w ith retaining straps. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load conditions. Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h). Check and retighten the strap s frequently.

Observ e country-specific regula tions.

Sw itching off the engine

When you switch off, fans in the eng ine compa rtm ent may continue running for a time to cool the engine.

If the engine temperature is very high, e.g. after driving in mountainous terrain: allow the engine to id le for approxim ately two minutes in order to prevent heat acc um ulation.

Vehicles with turbocharged engine 3

After running at high eng ine speeds or high eng ine loads, operate the engine briefly at a low load or run in neutral for approx.

30 seconds before switching off in order to protec t the turbocharger.

Sa ve energy – m ore miles / kilom etres

Plea se observe the running-in hints on the previous pa ge a nd the tips for energy saving on the following pag es.

Good, technically correc t and ec onomical driving ensures m aximum d urab ility and performa nc e for your vehicle.

Overrun

The fuel supply is autom atically shut off during overrun, e.g. when the vehicle is being driven down long gradients or when braking. To enable the overrun cut-off to take effect, do not acc elerate during overrun and, if in manual transm ission mode, do not depress clutch ped al. To prevent damage to the catalytic converter, overrun cut-off is temporarily d eactiva ted when the catalytic conv erter temperature is high.

Vehicles with turbocharged engine 3

Flow -g enerated noises may be aud ible if the a ccelerator is released quickly on account of airflow in the turbocharger.

Eng ine sp eed

Drive in a low engine speed range for each gear as much as possible.

Warming up

Allow the engine to warm up w hilst driv ing .

Do not w arm it up by letting it run at idling speed. Do not app ly full throttle until the engine has reached operating tem perature.

After a cold sta rt, the automatic transm ission 3 or Easytronic 3 in

Autom atic mode shifts into higher gears at higher rpm . This a llows the catalytic converter to quickly reach the temperature req uired for optimum pollutant reduction.

Correct g ear selection

Tra nsmission in neutral and without revving in the lower gears. Stop-a nd -g o tra ffic a nd driving at a speed too hig h for the selected g ear or transmission ratio increases wear and fuel consum ption.

Change dow n

When decreasing speed, shift down into the next lowest gear. Do not slip the clutch with a high-revving engine. This is especially important when hill climb ing.

Clutch op era tion

Alw ays dep ress the clutch ped al hard to the floor to prev ent shifting difficulties and tra nsmission dam age.

When driving do not use the pedal as a footrest; this will cause substantial clutch wear.


Cooling fan

The cooling fan is controlled v ia a therm oswitch and therefore only runs if nec essary.

The cooling fan a utomatica lly switches on when the diesel particle filter 3 is being cleaned depending on the eng ine.

Pedals

Do not place any ob jects in the footwell which could slip under the ped als and inhibit the pedal trav el.

To ensure the pedal travel is uninhibited, there must be no mats in the area of the pedals.

Battery ca re

When driving slowly or when the v ehicle is stationary, e.g. in slow urban traffic, stopand-go traffic or traffic jams, turn off all unnecessary electrical load s w here possible (e.g. heated rear window, heated seats 3 ).

Depress clutch pedal when sta rting in order to relieve the strain on the starter and the battery.


Saving fuel, protecting the environment

Trend-setting technology

In the dev elopment and manufacture of your vehicle, environment-friendly and in the m ain recyclable materials were used.

The p roduction method s used to make your vehicle are likewise env ironmentallycompatible.

Recycling of production wastes keeps the circulation of material closed. Reduction of energy a nd water requirements a lso help s to conserve natural resources.

A highly adv anced design mea ns that your vehic le can be easily disassembled at the end of its working life, and the individual materials separated for subsequent re-use.

Materia ls such as asbestos and cadmium are not used . The refrigerant in the air conditioning system 3 is CFC-free.

New painting techniques employ water as a solvent.

End-of-life vehicle rec overy

For detailed information on Va uxha ll’s on-going comm itment to achieving an environmentally susta inab le future, including; design for recycling, take back of

End-of-Life Vehicle’s (ELVs) and the recycling of ELVs, view www.va uxha ll.co.uk/recycling for details.

Energy and environm ent-c onscious driving z High noise levels and exhaust em issions are often a result of driving w ithout due attention to saving energy and protecting the environment. z You should therefore drive with energy in mind "more m iles / k ilom etres – less fuel".

Reduce the noise level and exhaust emissions b y adopting an environmentconsc ious driving style. This is extremely worthwhile and im proves the quality of life.

Fuel consum ption d epend s to a great extent on your own personal d riv ing style. The following hints are intended to help you consume fuel at a rate that is as close as possible to the specified levels – see page 287.

Check your v ehicle’s fuel consumption every time you refuel. This facilitates early detection of any irregula rities causing increased fuel consumption.

Warm ing up z Full throttle and w arming up at idle speed increase w ear, fuel consumption, exhaust em ission, the am ount of pollutant in the exhaust and the am ount of noise. z Driv e off as soon as possible a fter starting.

Uniform speed z Hectic driving significantly increases fuel consumption, the exhaust emissions, the proportion of pollutant in the exhaust gas and the noise level. z Do not accelerate a nd brake unnecessarily. Drive at uniform speed, watching the road.

Avoid freq uent starting-off and stopping e.g . at traffic lights, in short distance tra ffic and in queues of traffic by m eans of clever planning . Select road s w ith good traffic flow .

Idling z The eng ine also consumes fuel when idling . z If you have to wait for more than one minute, it is worthwhile switching off the engine. Fiv e m inutes of idling corresponds to ap proximately 0.6 miles

(1 k m) of driving.

Overrun z The fuel supply is automatically shut off during ov errun, e.g. when the vehicle is being driven down long gradients or when braking – see page 185. z To enable the overrun cut-off to come into action and sav e fuel, do not accelerate or d epress clutch pedal during ov errun.

Corr ect gear selec tion z High revs increase engine w ear and fuel consumption. z Do not race your engine. Avoid d riv ing at high engine speeds.

Making use of the tachom eter helps to save fuel. Drive in a low engine speed ra nge for each gear as much a s possible with uniform engine speeds. Drive as often as possible in top gear, select the next higher gear a s soon as possible, and only chang e down when the engine is no longer running perfectly smoothly.

High speed z The higher the speed , the higher the consumption and the noise level. At top speed, you consume a great deal of fuel and produce excessive noise and exhaust em issions. z Slightly relea sing the accelerator ped al results in distinct fuel savings with no major loss of speed.

Drive at no more tha n around three quarters of maximum speed and you will use up to 50% less fuel, without losing a great deal of time.

Tyre pressure z Inadequate tyre p ressure, leading to higher road resistance, costs m oney in two wa ys: for more fuel and increased tyre wear. z Regular checks (every 14 d ays) pay off.

Electrical loa ds z The power consum ption of electrical equip ment increa ses fuel consumption. z Sw itch off all auxiliary electrical loads

(e.g. air c onditioning 3, heated rear window) when not needed.

Roof racks, ski-holders z Due to air resistance, a roof load can increase fuel consum ption by approx. 3.5 gal./1000 miles (1 l/100km ). z Remove them if they are not being used.


Repair and m aintenance z Improper repairs or adjustm ent and maintenance work can increase fuel consumption. Do not carry out w ork on the eng ine yourself.

You may out of ignorance infringe environmental law s b y not disposing of materials properly.

Appropriate parts might not b e recycled.

Contact with some of the materia ls inv olv ed may p ose a hea lth haz ard. z We recom mend that repair and maintenance be entrusted to your

Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.

Extr em e d riving conditions z Going up steep slopes, cornering, driving on poor road s a nd winter driving a ll increase fuel consumption.

Fuel consumption increa ses dramatically in urba n tra ffic a nd at winter temperatures, especially on short trip s when the engine operating tempera ture is not reached. z Follow the hints given above to keep consumption to a m inimum under suc h cond itions.


Fuels, refuelling

Fuel c onsum ption

Fuel consump tion is determined und er specific driv ing cond itions – see page 287.

Special equipment increases the weight of the v ehicle. As a result, they can increase fuel consump tion and reduce the specified maximum speed.

For the first few thousand m iles / kilometres, friction between the engine and transm ission com ponents is higher. This increases fuel consumption.

Fuel for petrol engines

Normal c om mercial high-quality fuels with a m aximum ethanol content of 5% in accordance with DIN EN 228 are suitable

(for catalytic converter see pag e 190, for octane numbers - see pages 284, 285). The quality thereof has considerable effect on the p erformance, running and serv ice life of the engine. The additives mixed with the fuel are extremely im portant. For this rea son you must only refuel with highquality fuels containing additives.

Fuels with ethanol c ontent greater than 5% do not comply with DIN EN 228 and must not be used unless the vehicle has been specifically dev eloped and app rov ed for these fuels.

Fuel with too low an octane number can cause pinking. Vauxhall cannot be held lia ble for resulting dama ge.

Petrol with a higher octane number can always be used.

The use of 91 octane fuel is not permitted in v ehicles with the Z 22 YH

Vectra VXR.

1) engine or the

The ignition tim ing adjusts automatically to the grade of fuel used (octane numb er) – see pa ges 284, 285.

Use of petrol w ith a n oc ta ne rating of 95 will ensure economica l driving.

Fuel with 95 RON w ill result in less power and torque with the Vectra VXR.

Fuel for diesel engines

Diesel engines must be operated only on commerc ia lly available diesel fuel meeting the specifications of DIN EN 590.

Since January 2004, some oil companies ha ve m ixed their diesel fuel with up to 5%

Bio fuel (FAME = Fatty Acid Methyl Esters) lik e RM E (Rape-Oil Methyl Ester). This is in accordance with the current DIN EN 590 and does not harm the fuel/injec tion system. The characteristic s of a diesel fuel mixed up with 5% Bio fuel (FAME) do not differ from conv entional d iesel fuel and do not influence the vehicle’s driveability.

Importa nt: Diesel fuel m ixed with 5% FAM E acc ording to DIN EN 590 m ust not be confused with 100% Bio Diesel, which is not to be used in Vauxhall eng ines.

The flow and filterability of diesel fuel a re temperature-dependent.

Diesel fuels w ith improved low temp erature properties are therefore a vailable on the ma rk et during the winter months. Make sure that you fill the tank with winter fuel before the start of the cold weather season.

Additives can be used with diesel fuels with winter prop erties that are guaranteed by the manufa cturer and when using diesel fuel filters that are heated depending on the outside temperature.

Diesel fuels must not be diluted with fuels that are intended for petrol eng ines.

Fuel filler cap

When replacing the fuel filler cap, be sure to use a genuine fuel filler cap for your model to ensure full functionality. Dieseleng ined vehicles have special fuel filler cap s.

1) Sales designation – s ee page 284, 285 .

Refuelling

9

Warning

Care must b e tak en when ha ndling fuel.

Before refuelling, turn off engine and also shut off external heaters with combustion cha mbers (identified by stickers on tank flap ). Switch off mobile phones.

The tank disp la y updates more quickly if the ig nition is switched off during refuelling.


9

Warning

Fuel is flammab le and explosive. When handling fuel or in the immediate vicinity, avoid na ked fla mes or sparks. Do not smoke. This a lso app lies where the presenc e of fuel is revea led b y its characteristic smell. If fuel odours occur in the vehicle, have a workshop elim inate the fault im mediately.

Fuel filler neck at right rear side of vehicle.

The tank flap is locked together with the doors – see page 30.

Open the tank flap .

Unscrew the fuel filler cap, remove and suspend from the tank flap.

The fuel tank has a limiting system which prevents ov erfilling of the tank.

Correct filling depends to a large extent on proper operation of the fuel disp ensing pump:

1. Fully insert the pump nozz le and switch it on.

2. After a n automatic shut-off, the nominal capacity of the fuel tank is reached by mea ns of two m etered top-ups. Insert fuel dispensing p um p as fa r as it w ill g o.

To close, position the fuel filler cap a nd rotate past the resistanc e until the ca p audibly clicks over the reta iner.

Close fuel tank flap.

Wipe off a ny ov erflowing fuel immediately.


Catalytic converter, exhaust gases

Ca talytic conver ter for petrol engines

Leaded fuel will damage the catalytic converter and parts of the elec tronic system, rendering them inoperative.

Use of high-quality fuels other than those specified on page 188 (e.g. LRP 1) ) c ould dam age the catalytic conv erter.

Damage to the ca talytic converter or the vehicle may result if the follow ing points are not observed: z On ignition faults, uneven running after cold start, a clear d rop-off in eng ine power or other unusual opera ting symptoms which could indica te a fault in the ig nition system, contac t a workshop immediately. Continue driving if necessary for a short time at low speed and low revs.

Irregular engine running and a loss of eng ine power when the Electronic

Plus Stab ility Program me (ESP® 3) comes into action are the result of operating conditions and are therefore of no significance – see p age 196. z If unb urned fuel enters the catalytic conv erter, this may result in overheating and irreparable damage to the c atalytic conv erter.

You should therefore av oid unnecessarily long use of the starter when starting-off, running the tank d ry

(an irregular fuel supply w ill lead to overhea ting) and starting the engine by pushing or towing.

1) LRP = L ead R eplacement P etrol.

z If the control ind icator Z for exhaust gases fla shes, slow down until the flashing stops and the control indica tor illuminates. Contact a w orkshop for assistance immediately. Control indica tor Z for exhaust gases – see pa ge 192.


Cata lytic converter for d iesel engines

Damage to the ca talytic converter or the vehicle may result if the follow ing points are not observed: z On uneven running , a c lear drop-off in eng ine power or other unusual operating symptoms, c ontact a workshop immediately. Continue driving if necessary for a short time at low speed and low revs.

Irregular engine running and a loss of eng ine power when the Electronic

Plus Stab ility Program me (ESP® 3) comes into action are the result of operating conditions and are therefore of no significance – see p age 196.

Controlling exhaust em ission

Som e of the damaging substances in the exhaust such a s ca rb on monoxide (CO), hydrocarbons (HC) and nitrous oxides (NO x

) are reduced to a minim um by making structural changes – mainly in the injection system and the ignition system in conjunction with the catalytic converter.


Flashing with the engine running indicates a fault which could lead to catalytic conv erter damage. You may c ontinue driving without d amage if you bac k off until flashing stops and the control indica tor illuminates. Contact a w orkshop immed iately.

Control indicator Z for exhaust

Illuminates when the ignition is switched on and during the start attemp t. Extinguishes shortly after the engine starts running.

Illuminated with the eng ine running indicates a fa ult in the exhaust gas cleaning system . The permitted em issions may be exceeded . Contact a workshop immediately.

Control indicator A for engine elec tronics

Illuminates for a few seconds after the ignition is switched on.

If it illuminates when the eng ine is running, there is a fault in engine or transmission electronics. The electronic system switches to an emergency running p rogram me. Fuel consum ption m ay be increa sed and the driveability of the vehicle m ay be impaired.

In some c ases, faults can be eliminated by switching off the engine and restarting . If the c ontrol indicator illuminates again when the engine is running, contact a workshop to eliminate the ca use of the fault.

If it illuminates briefly, but does not recur, it is of no significance.

If A illuminates, this may also mean water in the diesel fuel filter in the engines 1)

Z 19 DTL, Z 19 DT and Z 19 DTH. Where necessary, have the fuel filter insp ected by a workshop for any residual water.

If it flashes after the ignition is switched on, there is a fa ult in the immobiliser system.

The engine cannot be started.

See pag e 27.


Exhaust g ases

9

Warning

Engine exhaust gases contain poisonous carbon monoxide, w hich is colourless and odourless and c ould b e fatal if inhaled.

If exhaust gases p enetrate the v ehicle interior, open a window and contact a workshop.

Avoid driving with an open luggage compartment. Otherw ise, exhaust g ases could penetra te the interior.

During the first drive sm ok e m ay develop because of wax and oil ev aporating on the exhaust system . Park the vehicle in the open for a while a fter the first drive and av oid inhaling the fum es.

1) Sales designation – s ee page 284, 285 .


Diesel p artic le filter 3

The d iesel pa rticle filter system removes polluting soot particles out of the engine exhaust ga ses. The system includes a selfcleaning function tha t operates automatically whilst driving. The filter is cleaned by burning the trapped soot particles at a high temperature. There ma y be an increase in fuel consumption, exhaust smell, and engine cooling fan opera tion 3 during the self-clea ning opera tion.

The self-cleaning function cannot operate autom atic ally during certa in driv ing situations where the engine does not rea ch its normal operating tem perature. An exa mple of this would be driving only short distances in cold weather. If the filter needs cleaning and recent d riv ing situations did not a llow the func tion to automatically op erate, then the control indicator ! will flash. If this occurs, then you may continue to drive the vehic le normally. The vehicle will not be d amaged and does not require service.

The self-c leaning function will automatically operate whilst d riv ing after the engine has reached its normal operating temperature. The control indicator ! will continue to flash until the self-cleaning op eration is complete. This ma y take up to 20 minutes of driving. The time will be shorter at higher v ehicle speeds. If the vehicle is not moving for more than a few minutes, then the selfcleaning function will not operate.

Operation will continue when driving resumes.

We recommend that you do not turn the ignition off until the self-cleaning opera tion is comp lete. If you m ust turn the ig nition off before the operation is com plete, then the opera tion will a utomatica lly resume when driving the next tim e and after the engine has reached its norm al operating tem perature.

The control indica tor ! extinguishes as soon as the self-cleaning operation is complete.


Ma intena nce

Hav e a ll maintenance work carried out at the intervals sp ecified. We recommend that you entrust this w ork to your Vauxhall

Authorised Repa irer, who has proper equipment and tra ined personnel av ailable. Electronic testing systems permit rapid diagnosis and remedy of faults. This way you can b e certain that all components of the vehicle’s electrica l, injection and ignition systems operate correc tly, that your vehicle has a low level of pollutant emission and that the catalytic converter system will ha ve a long service life.

You are thereby making an im portant contribution towards keeping the air clean and comp lia nce with em issions legislation.

Checking and adjustment of the fuelinjection and ignition systems is part of the scope of inspec tion. For this reason you should hav e a ll maintenance work carried out a t the intervals specified in your Serv ice

Booklet.


Drive Control Systems

Interac tive Driving System (IDS+) 3

The IDS+ combines the sensors a nd control units of the Electronic Stability Prog ramme

(ESP® Plus ), the Anti-lock Brake System

(ABS) and Continuous Da mping Control

(CDC). This provides both excellent driv ing dynam ics and greater safety.

Electronic Stab ility Program me

(ESP®

ESP®

Plus

Plus

) 3

im proves driving stability when necessary in any driving situation regardless of the type of road surface or tyre g rip . It also prevents the d riv e wheels from spinning.

The system m onitors vehicle movements.

As soon as the vehicle starts to swerve

(understeers/oversteers) engine output is reduced (the sound of the engine cha ng es) and individual wheels are specifically braked . This considerab ly improves the driving stability of the vehicle on snow and ice and on wet or slippery road surfa ces.

ESP® Plus is ready for operation as soon as the ignition is switched on and c ontrol indicator v exting uishes.

Control indicator v fla shes when ESP® Plus is in action.

The vehicle is now in a critical situa tion;

ESP® Plus allows you to keep control of the vehicle a nd reminds you to m atch your speed to the road conditions.

9

Warning

Do not let this special safety feature tempt you into ta king risk s w hen driving.

Tra ffic safety can only b e ac hieved by adopting a responsible d riv ing style.

Control indicator v

Illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on. The system is now rea dy for opera tion.

Flashing during driving:

This shows the system has com e into action. The engine output may be reduced

(the sound of the engine cha nges) a nd the vehic le ma y be braked automatically to a small degree.

Illum inates whilst driving:

The system is switched off or a fault has oc curred. The vehicle can continue to be driven. However, driv ing stability may worsen depending on the nature of the road surface.

Switch on ESP® Plus again, or hav e the cause of the fault rectified by a workshop.

The system’s integ ra ted self-diagnostics allow s faults to be quickly remedied.


Switc hing off 3

ESP® Plus can b e deactivated by pressing button v 3.

Deactivation is only possible up to a speed of 40 mph (60 k m/h) and is indicated by illumination of control indicator v in the instrument cluster.

Pressing the v button again or turning on the ignition switches ESP® Plus on again.


Continuous Dam ping Control 3 (CDC)

Normal mode

CDC automatically adapts vehicle dam ping to the current driv ing situation and road conditions.

The system continually monitors w heel and vehic le mov ements and immediately modifies the damping of each shock absorber. Chassis calibration is optimally adap ted to the driving situation and road conditions.

Continuous Damping Control is alwa ys in normal mode with the ig nition is sw itc hed on. If d esired, the system c an be switched to SPORT mode.

In SPORT mode, the damping c ontrol is adap ted to a sportier driving style, a mong other things. This ad aptation results in a

"harder" suspension setting.

SPORT mode

When driving in SPORT mode, the damping, steering 3 (not for engines

Z 28 N EL/NET) 1) , throttle application and - for automatic transmissions 3 - the shifting points are changed.

Damping and steering 3 b ecome more direct and provide better contac t with the road surface. The engine reacts more quic kly to ac celera tor m ovem ents.

With automatic transmission 3 the shift tim es are reduced and g ear changes occur at higher eng ine speeds (not w hen cruise control 3 is a ctive).

Activating SPORT m od e

Press the S PORT button. The LED in the button illum inates.

In v ehicles with automatic transmission 3 the control indicator 1 also illuminates in the tra nsmission display.

If the Winter programme 3 has been switched on (v ehicles with automatic transmission 3) SPORT mode cannot be activated.

Winter programm e - see p age 180.

1) Sales designation – s ee pages 284, 28 5.

Dea ctivating SPORT mode

Briefly press the SPORT button a gain. The

LED in the button extinguishes. The

Continuous Damping Control system resumes N orm al mode.

SPORT mode is switched off by switching off the ignition or switching off the Winter programme 3 (v ehicles with automatic transm ission 3).

Winter programme - see pa ge 180.

Control indica tor u for Continuous

Damping Control or SPORT mode fault

Illum inates for a few second s a fter the ignition is switc hed on. If the control indica tor does not go out, or if it illum ina tes whilst driving, there is a fa ult in the

Continuous Damping Control system or

SPORT mode. The system is not ready for op eration. Hav e the cause of the fault rectified by a workshop.




Cruise control 3

Cruise control can store and maintain speeds of approx. 20 to 125 m ph

(30 to 200 km /h). Deviation from the saved speed is possible on uphill or d ownhill inclines.

For safety reasons the cruise control cannot be activated until the footb rake has been depressed once.

Cruise control is operated with buttons m, g, and § on the turn signa l stalk .

Do not use the c ruise control if it is not adv isable to maintain a c onstant sp eed

(e.g. in situations presenting a danger to yourself and other road users, in heavy traffic or on winding , slippery or greasy roads).

With automatic transmission 3, only use cruise control in D or in Automatic mode with Easytronic 3.

When the cruise control is active, reaction tim es ma y b e increased due to the d ifferent position of the feet.

9

Warning

Even with cruise c ontrol activated, the driver has full resp onsibility for maintaining an app ropriate speed.

Disregard of these instructions could lead to injury or danger to life.

Control indicator m

Illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on. The system is now ready for operation.

When driving, control indicator m will illuminate as soon as the system is switched on.

To activate

Briefly p ress button m: the c urrent speed is stored and m ainta ined. The accelerator pedal can be released.

Vehicle speed can be increased by depressing the accelerator pedal. When the a ccelerator peda l is released, the previously stored speed is resum ed.

Increa se

With cruise control activ e, hold down button m or briefly press it repea tedly: speed is increased continuously or in steps of 1.2 mph (2 km/h) without using the accelerator pedal.

When button m is released the current speed is stored and m aintained.

Decelerate

With cruise control active, hold down button g or briefly press it repeatedly: speed is reduced continuously or in steps of 1.2 m ph (2 k m/h).

When button g is released the current speed is stored and maintained.


To deactivate

Briefly press button §: Cruise control is switched off, control indicator m extinguishes and the vehic le slowly decelerates. To continue driving, dep ress the ac celerator pedal in the usual ma nner.

For reasons of safety, cruise control deactivates under certain d riv ing conditions.

For example: z if the vehicle’s speed drops below approx. 20 mp h (30 km/h), or z if the brak e pedal is depressed, or z if the clutch pedal is dep ressed, or z if the selector lever of automatic tra nsmission 3 or Easytronic 3 is in N.

Resuming the stored speed

Briefly press button g at a sp eed above

20 mph (30 km/h): the speed selected before the cruise control w as switc hed off is resumed.

The stored speed va lue is deleted when the ignition is switched on.


Parking dista nc e sensors 3

The parking distance sensors mak e reverse parking easier by measuring the distance between the vehicle a nd an obsta cle, and giving a n acoustic signal in the p assenger compartment.

The system registers distance b y means of four sensors in each of the front and rear bumpers.

To activa te

With the ignition switched on, the front and rear parking distance sensors are automatically activa ted when reverse g ear is engag ed.

The parking distance sensors c an also be activa ted a t speed s of less than 15 mph

(25 km/h) b y pressing the r button on the instrument panel.

An illumina ted LED a nd an acoustic signal indicate that it is ready for operation.

If the vehicle approaches a n ob stacle to the front or rea r, a series of signals is audible in the vehicle interior. The interval between the signals becomes shorter a s the d istance is reduced. If the dista nce is less than 30 cm , the signal will b e continuous.

9

Warning

Und er certain circum stances, various reflective surfaces on objects or clothing as w ell as external noise sourc es may cause the system to fail to detect ob stacles. For this reason, care must be ta ken when reversing even if the pa rk ing distance sensors are operational. This is of p artic ular im porta nce when in the vicinity of ped estria ns.

To deactivate

To d eactiva te the system, press button r again, the LED in the button w ill go dark.

The system switches itself off autom atically when the forwards speed exceeds approx.

15 mph (25 k m/h).

Control indica tor r

Illum inates:

Fault in system. The system is not op erational. Have cause of fault remed ied by a workshop. The system’s integ ra ted self diagnostics allows faults to b e quickly remedied.

Flashes:

The fault is d ue to sensors obstructed with snow or ice. The sensors must be undam aged a nd free of d irt, snow and ic e.

Interference due to external sources of ultra sound (e.g . pneum atic drills, rota ry machines). Once the source of interference is removed, the system will operate normally.


Caravan/trailer towing equipm ent 3, carav an/trailer towing

The system automatically detects if a towbar is properly fitted to the vehicle.

When towing, inserting the c aravan/trailer plug in the sock et automatically sw itches off the p arking dista nce sensors for the rear.

Fitting rear load ra cks 3

Rear load rack s, e.g . bicycle rack s, fitted nea r the sensors could disrupt the system .


Autom atic level control 3

Autom atic level control makes it possible to keep the height of the vehicle constant when subjected to different loads in the rea r (e.g. when towing a caravan/trailer).

This significantly improves driving conditions.

The vehic le is automatically ra ised at the rear, increasing the spring tra vel and ground c learance.

The automatic level control system is activated after ap prox. 2 miles (3 k m), depending on the vehicle load ing and the na ture of the road surface.

Head lig ht range adjustment – see p age 131.

Do not use full load in the event of faults.

Have the ca use of the fault rectified straight awa y by a workshop.

Tyre p ressure monitoring system 3

The tyre p ressure monitoring system continuously monitors the pressure of all four tyres while the vehicle is being driven.

A pressure sensor is integrated in each wheel. Once each m inute, the pressure of each tyre is sent to a control unit for compa rison. if the system detects one or more pressure differenc es, control indicator w illum inates or fla shes red. In vehicles with check control 3, the exact pressure of the tyre in question appears on the information display.

In v ehicles with Graphical Information

Display 3 or Colour Inform ation Display 3 and trip c om puter 3, current tyre pressures can b e shown in the inform ation display.

For the system to be operational, all wheels must be eq uipped with pressure sensors and a ll tyres must be inflated to the prescribed pressure. The tyre pressure monitoring system automatically detects if the vehicle is being d riv en with a load of up to 3 persons or a full load.


Once the ignition is switched on, the system is operational and w ill continuously monitor the tyre pressures at speeds of approx. 20 m ph (30 km /h) and a bove.

9

Warning

The tyre pressure monitoring system does not replace manual check s with a suitable gauge.

Check tyre pressures a t least ev ery

14 days and prior to any long journey; the tyres should be checked when cold.

Don’t forget to check the spare 3.

Tyre pressure – see pa ges 213, 299.

Ü

Board Computer

BC 1

BC 2

Timer

Tyres

Display of current tyre pressure 3

Select menu item Tyres from the Board

Comp uter menu.

The current pressure of each tyre is displayed.

Control indicator w in red a s w arning message

Illumination in red whilst driving indicates deviating tyre pressure.

Indicator illuminates red:

Minor tyre pressure differenc e; slow down.

Check tyre pressure a t next opp ortunity with a suitable gauge and correct if nec essary.

Indicator flashes red:

Considerab le pressure d ifference or direct loss of pressure. Stop imm ediately and check tyre and tyre pressure. Fit spare wheel if necessary - see pages 236, 238.


Warning messages in the

Graphical Information Displa y 3 or

Colour Information Display 3

In the model variant with check control 3 differing tyre pressures whilst d riv ing are indicated by m essa ges on the information display. The message appears in abbreviated form depending on the model variant.

For exa mple, the following messages c an be displayed:

Navi active

Tyre pressure

C heck rea r left tyre

(value in bar)

OK

Attention!

Fron t left tyre pressure loss

(va lu e in b ar)

OK

A graphic 3 indica ting the left rear tyre is shown together with the current tyre pressure: Slight pressure deviation. Reduce speed. Chec k pressure at next op portunity with appropriate g auge a nd correct if necessary.

On the Colour Information Display this report will app ear in yellow.

A dia gram 3 appears at the same time, ma rk ing the front left tyre and showing the current tyre pressure: Considerable pressure difference or direct loss of pressure. Exit flow of traffic as soon as possible without obstructing other vehicles, stop and check tyre and tyre pressure. Fit spare wheel if necessary - see pages 236, 238.

On the Colour Information Display this report will appear in red.

Acknowledgem ent of warnings – see page 116.

Control indicator w in yellow as fault message

If control indicator w illuminates yellow whilst driving , there is a fault in the tyre pressure m onitoring system. Fitting a wheel without a pressure sensor (e.g. the spare wheel 3) w ill also generate a fault in the system. Have the ca use of the fault rem edied by a workshop. The system ’s integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to be quickly remedied.

General information

The tyre pressure monitoring system is not ready for operation if the em ergenc y/spare wheel is used and is not fitted with a pressure sensor; the control indica tor w illuminates yellow. The tyre pressure monitoring system rema ins operational for the other three wheels.

If you use a complete set of wheels which are not fitted with sensors for the tyre pressure monitoring system, e.g. four winter tyres or a ftermarket tyres of a different size, no fault messa ge w ill be displayed. The tyre pressure m onitoring system is not ready for operation.

Sensors for the tyre pressure monitoring system can be retro-fitted by a workshop up on request.


When m anually chec king tyre pressure with a pressure gauge, sc rew the adapter onto the valve. Tyre pressure – see p age 213.

Every time a tyre is changed, the va lv e inserts and tyre pressure monitoring system sealing ring s m ust be rep laced by a workshop.

The use of commerc ially ava ila ble liquid filled run-flat systems or repair kits can impa ir the function of the system.

Vauxhall-approved systems can be used.

Rad io transmitters (e.g. radio headphones, walk ie-talkies) operated in the area could cause interference in the tyre pressure monitoring system.


Brake system

The effectiveness of the brakes is a n important factor for traffic safety.

To improve effectiveness, do not b ra ke unnecessarily hard for the first 125 miles

(200 km) after new brake pads have been fitted.

Brake pad wear must not exceed a specified limit. Regular maintenance as detailed in the Service Book let is therefore of the utm ost importance for traffic safety.

Hav e worn brak e pa ds replaced by a workshop.

Pads tha t hav e been tested and approved guarantee optimum bra ke p erformance.

Brake assist

If the brak e p edal is slammed on, the vehicle is autom atically brak ed w ith maximum brake force am plifica tion in order to achieve the shortest possib le braking distance w hen full-on brak ing oc curs (braking a ssist).

Mainta in steady p ressure on the brake pedal for a s long a s full-on braking is to continue. When the brak e pedal is relea sed, the maxim um brake forc e amplification is tak en awa y.

Adaptive brake light

During full-on braking, all three b ra ke lig hts flash for the duration of ABS control.

Footbrake

The footbrake comprises two independ ent brak e circuits.

If one brake circuit faults, the vehicle can still be braked with the other brake circuit.

However the brak ing effect will occur at a lower ped al position and considerably more forc e is required. The braking distance is longer. Contact a work shop before continuing to d riv e.

To ensure that full pedal travel – can be utilised, particularly if there is a fault in one of the b ra ke circuits, there m ust be no ma ts in the pedal area - see page 185.

When the engine is not running, the assistance of the brake servo unit disappears once the brak e pedal ha s been depressed once or twice. Braking effect is not red uced, but braking req uires significa ntly greater force. This is especially important to bear in mind w hen towing.


Check the brake lights b efore starting out on a journey. On v ehicles with check control 3 the brake lights are check ed automatically – see page 124.

Shortly after starting each journey the effectiveness of the b ra ke system should be tested at low speed and without inconv eniencing other tra ffic, especia lly if the b ra kes are wet, e.g. after the vehicle has been washed.

The b ra ke fluid level should be check ed reg ularly. If the brake fluid level is too low and the hand brake is not ap plied, control indicator R in the instrum ent cluster illuminates – see pa ge 99. Handbra ke

Alw ays app ly the handbrake firmly without actuating the relea se button; to do this fold up the armrest 3. Apply as fully as possible on uphill or downhill inclines.

The mechanic al handbrake acts on the brakes on the rear wheels. It engages autom atic ally when applied.

To release the handbrake pull the lev er up slightly, press the ratchet knob , and fully low er the lever.

To reduce the operating forces of the ha ndb ra ke, dep ress the footbrak e a t the sam e time.

Brake system control indicator R

The control indicator illuminates when the ignition is switched on if the handbrake is app lied or if the b ra ke or clutch fluid level is too low. B ra ke fluid – see page 276.

9

Warning

If the control indicator illum ina tes when the handbrake is released, stop driving immediately. Contact a workshop.


Anti-lock Brake System (ABS

u

)

ABS continually monitors the brake system and prevents the wheels from locking reg ardless of the type of road surfac e or tyre grip.

It starts to regulate the braking p ressure as soon as a w heel shows a tendency to lock.

The v ehicle remains steera ble, even in the event of very heavy braking, for instance on bends or when sw erving to av oid an obstacle. Even in the ca se of full-on braking, the ABS makes it p ossible to drive round an obsta cle without releasing the brakes.

ABS control is made app arent through a pulse in the brake peda l and the noise of the regulation proc ess.

9

Warning

For optimum b ra king, keep the brak e pedal fully depressed throughout the braking p rocess, despite the fac t that the pedal is pulsating. Do not red uce the pressure on the pedal.

Do not let this special safety feature tempt you into taking risks when driving.

Traffic safety can only be achieved by adopting a responsib le driving style.

Control ind icator u for ABS

It illum ina tes for a few seconds after the ignition is turned on. The system is read y for operation when the control indicator extinguishes.

If the control indicator does not go out after a few seconds, or if it illuminates whilst driving, there is a fa ult in the ABS.

The brake system remains operational without ABS regulation.

Self-check

Each time the ignition is turned on and the engine started , after moving away from a speed of around 2 mph (3 k m/h) the system performs a self-check which may be audible.

Fault

9

Warning

If there is a fault in ABS, the wheels may be subject to locking due to braking that is heavier tha n normal. The ad vantages of AB S are no longer opera tional.

You can continue driving, provided you drive with care and anticipation.

Hav e the cause of the fault elim ina ted by a workshop. The self-d ia gnosis integrated into the system allows rapid fault identification.

Wheels, tyres

See page 297 for suitable tyres a nd restrictions.

Tyres fitted in the factory are a dapted to the c hassis a nd provide optimum driving comfort and safety.

Changing tyre/wheel typ e

Before c hanging to other tyres or wheels, note the necessa ry changes.

If tyres of a different size than those fitted at the factory are used, the electronic speedom eter may require reprogramming to ensure that the correct sp eed is displayed.

9

Warning

Use of unsuitab le tyres or wheels m ay lead to accidents and render the vehicle unroa dworthy.


Vehicles with tyre pressure m onitoring system 3

If you ha ve winter tyres or a ftermarket tyres of a different size fitted, sensors for the tyre pressure monitoring system can b e retro-fitted by a workshop upon request.

Otherwise the system will not display tyre pressure deviations.

Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 – see page 204.


Fitting new tyres

Fit tyres in pairs or in sets, which is ev en better. Ensure that tyres on one a xle are: z the same size, z the same design, z the same make, z and have the same tread pattern.

Fit direc tional tyres such that they roll in the direc tion of travel. The rolling d irection is indicated by a symbol (e.g. a n arrow) on the sidewall.

Tyres fitted opposing the rolling direction

(e.g. when a tyre is chang ed) should be refitted a s soon as possible. This is the only way to obtain full benefit from the design properties of the tyre.

Some b ra nd s of tyres have a b eaded ed ge for a lloy wheels to protect against damage. If wheel trim is used on steel wheels with beaded-edg e tyres, the following procedure must be followed: z Use wheel trims and tyres tha t are approved by Vauxhall for the vehicle in question a nd therefore meet all the requirem ents pertaining to the respective wheel/tyre c om bina tion.

z If the wheel trims and tyres used a re not

Vauxhall-app rov ed, the tyres must not ha ve a beaded edg e.

9

Warning

Use of unsuitable tyres or wheel trims could lead to sudden loss of air and thereby accidents.


Tyre pr essure

Check tyre pressures, including the spare wheel, at least ev ery 14 days and prior to any long journey; the tyres should be check ed when cold. Don’t forget to check the spare.

Use the v alve cap key to make unscrewing the valve caps easier. The key is located on the inside of the tank flap.

In vehicles with tyre p ressure monitoring system 3 there is an ad apter in the valve cap key. Screw adapter to valv e before attaching tyre pressure gauge - see p age 204.

Tyre p ressure - see page 299.

Do not reduce tyre pressure when the tyres are wa rm. Otherwise the pressure may drop b elow the perm issible minimum when the tyres cool down.

After having chec ked the tyre pressures, tig hten the va lv e ca ps using the v alve cap key.

Incorrect tyre p ressures will im pair sa fety, vehicle handling, c om fort a nd fuel econom y and w ill increase tyre wear.

If the pressure is too low , this can result in consid erable tyre warm-up and interna l dam age, lead ing to tread separation and even to tyre blow-out at high speeds.

Hidd en tyre dama ge is not elim inated by adjusting the tyre pressure.

9

Warning

Incorrect tyre pressure could lead to a flat tyre.


Check tyres regularly for dama ge

(p enetrated foreign bodies, punctures, cuts, c ra cks, bulges in side walls). Chec k wheels for dam age. If dam age or unusual wear is found, contact a work shop.

9

Warning

Dama ge m ay lead to tyre blow-out.

Tyre cond ition, w heel condition

Drive over edges slowly and at a rig ht angle if p ossible. Driving ov er sha rp edges can lead to hidden tyre damage a nd wheel dam age which is only noticed later on.

When pa rk ing, ensure that the tyres a re not pressed against the ed ge of the kerb .

Tread d ep th

Check tread depth regularly.

If w ear in the front is greater than that in the rear, m ov e the rear wheels to the front axle and vice versa.

Correct tyre pressure.

For reasons of safety, tyres should be replaced when their tread depth has worn down to 2 to 3 mm (winter tyres: 4 mm).

The legally permissible minimum tread depth (1.6 m m) has been reached when the tread has worn down as far as one of the w ear indicators (TWI 1) ). A number of wear indicators a re spaced at equal intervals around the tyre within the tread.

Their position is indicated by markings on the tyre sidewall.

General information z The danger of aq uap laning is greater if the tyres are worn. z Tyres age, even if they a re used only very little or not at all. A spare wheel which has not b een used for six years should be used w ith ca re. z Never fit used tyres the prev ious history and use of w hich you do not know. z So as not to im pair brake cooling , use only wheel trims app rov ed for use on your vehicle.


Tyre d esigna tions

Meaning s: e.g. 195/65 R 15 91 H

195 = Tyre width in mm

65 = Cross-section ratio

(tyre height to width) in %

R = Belt type: Radial

15 = Wheel d ia meter in inch

91 = Load ind ex e.g. 91 c orresponds to 618 kg

H = Speed cod e letter

Speed code letters:

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 150 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

1) TWI = T read We ar I ndicato r.


Winter tyres 3

For notes on fitting new tyres – see page 212.

See page 299 for restric tions.

Winter tyres im prove safety at tem peratures below 7 °C and should therefore be fitted on all the wheels.

The d esign of summ er tyres mea ns they have limited qualities for winter driving.

If the m aximum p ermissible speed for the winter tyres is less than that of the vehicle, a notic e indicating the maxim um permissib le speed for the tyres must be affixed within the driver’s field of vision 1) .

If you use the spare wheel when it is fitted with a sum mer tyre, the vehic le’s driveab ility may b e affected, esp ecially on slippery road surfaces. Obtain a replacement for the faulty tyre as soon as possible, and have the w heel balanced and fitted to the vehicle.

Wheel trims 3

If the wheel trims and tyres used are not

Vauxhall-approved, ma ke sure that the tyres do not have a beaded edg e - see page 212.

1) Varies from cou ntry to co untry on accou nt o f nation al regulations.

Tyre cha ins 3

Restrictions and further information – see page 299.

Tyre c hains are only permitted on the drive wheels (front axle). They must be fitted to the tyres symmetrica lly in order to achieve a concentric fit.

Always use fine mesh chains that add no more than 10 mm to the tyre tread and the inboard sides (including chain lock).

Wheel trim on steel w heels could com e into contact with parts of the chain and be damaged. R emove the wheel trim – see p age 239.

Tyre chains may only be used a t speeds up to 30 m ph (50 km/h) 1) and, when travelling on roads that are free of snow, they may be used for brief periods only since they are subjec t to rapid wear on a hard road and may snap.


Temporary wheel 3

Tyre chains must not be used on the temporary spare wheel. If you need to use tyre chains after suffering a flat front tyre, fit the temporary spa re on the rear axle and transfer one of the rea r wheels to the front axle.

For notes on the tem porary spare wheel – see page 237.

Wheel changing – see pag e 238.

Correct tyre pressure.

Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 – see page 204.

1) Varies from cou ntry to co untry on accou nt o f nation al regulations.


Roof racks

3

9

Warning

Disreg ard of these notes ca n lead to injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle passengers must b e informed according ly.

For safety reasons and to avoid roof dam age, we recommend using the

Vauxhall roof ra ck system approved for your vehicle.

Fasten the roof rack following the instructions that ac company the system.

Driving hints – see page 184.

Version without roof railing

Fold cov ers of installation openings up wards.

Attac h roof rack at appropriate points - see enclosed roof luggage rack system instructions.

Version with roof ra iling 3

Attach roof rack to roof railing at p oints show n in illustration - see enclosed roof luggage rack system instructions.


Towing equipment

3

9

Warning

Disreg ard of these notes ca n lead to injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle passengers must b e informed according ly.

Only use a ca ra van/trailer tow ing dev ice approved for the vehicle. Hav e a tow ing device fitted by workshop, who will inform you of any possible caravan/trailer load increases. They will hav e the instructions for fitting the device and any necessa ry changes to the vehic le concerning cooling, heat shields or other devices.

9

Warning

The coupling ball bar is to b e removed when not towing .

For installation dimensions of the carava n/trailer towing equipment – see pages 311, 312.

Towing equipment with removable coupling ball bar

3

,

Saloon / Hatch

3

Stowa ge of coupling b all b ar

The coupling ball ba r is stored in a bag strapped to the spa re wheel.

Fitting the coupling b all b ar

Com press the sealing plugs at the ends and pull out of the opening for the coupling ball bar. Stow the sealing plugs in the luggage compa rtm ent. Disengage socket and fold d ow n 3.

6


Checking the tensioning of the c oupling ball b ar: z Red m arking on turn knob points towa rd s green m arking on coupling ba ll bar.

z Gap of approx. 6 millimetres between rotary knob and coupling ball bar.

z Key is in lock.

Otherwise, the coupling ball bar must be tensioned before it is inserted into the coupling housing: z Open coupling ball bar, z Pull turn k nob out and then turn it clockwise as far as it will go – see illustration.

Inserting the coupling b all bar

Insert the tensioned coupling ball bar in the coupling housing and push firmly upwards until you hear the coupling ball ba r eng aging.

The turn knob snaps back into its home position resting a gainst the coup ling ball bar.

9

Warning

Do not touch the turn k nob when inserting the coupling ball bar – risk of injury.

Open coupling ball b ar. Remove key and put on provided protectiv e clip.

When the coupling b all bar is locked the turn knob can no longer b e pulled out.


Imp or tant

Check that the coupling ball bar is correctly installed: z Red mark ing on turn knob p oints towards white marking on coupling ball bar. z No gap between turn k nob and coupling ball b ar. z Coupling ba ll bar must be seated firm ly in coupling housing. z Coupling ba ll bar must be locked and key m ust be rem oved.

9

Warning

Towing is permitted only with a c orrectly fitted towb ar. If the towbar cannot be fitted correctly, contact a workshop.

Eye for b reak-aw ay stopping c able

In the case of carava ns/trailers with brake, attach the break-away stop ping cable to the eye. Eye - see Fig. 17721 J.

Dismounting the coupling b all b ar

Close coup ling ball bar.

Pull the turn knob out and then turn it clockw ise as far as it will go. Pull the coupling ball b ar downwards out of the coupling housing and stow it in the luggage compa rtm ent – see p age 219,

Fig. 17729 J.

Insert the sealing plug in the hole for the coupling ball b ar. Fold away the socket – see page 219, Fig. 17717 J.

Do not use steam -jet cleaners or other high-pressure clea ners to clean the coupling ball b ar.


Towing equipment with pivoting coupling ball bar

3

Folding out the c oup ling b all ba r

The release lever is in the stowage compartment to the left in the luggage compartment.

To open the stowa ge c om partment, push both latches down and open the cover.

Push the release lever down; the LED on the lever is illuminated while the coupling ball bar is not engaged. A wa rning buzzer also sounds and the coupling ba ll bar pivots down.

9

Warning

Mak e sure that no one is in the p iv ot zone of the c oupling b all bar. Risk of b od ily injury.

Swivel the coupling ba ll bar back wards until it engages (see Fig. 17726 J). The LED must g o out a nd the warning buzzer must cease. Otherwise, repeat the proced ure.

Importa nt

Check tha t the coupling ball bar is correctly eng aged: z LED is not illuminated. z No warning buzzer.

9

Warning

Caravan/trailer towing is permissible only when the c oupling ba ll bar is engag ed correctly. If the coupling ball b ar cannot be engaged correctly, the LED does not go out or the warning b uzz er does not go off. Seek the assistanc e of a work shop.

Ca rava n/tra iler with break-a way cable 3

For caravans/trailers with brak es, loop break-away cable around coup ling ball bar.

Stowing the coupling ball b ar

Open the stowage compartment – see p age 222.

Push the release lever down; the LED on the lev er remains illuminated as long as the coupling ball ba r is not engaged .

A warning buzzer also sound s a nd the coupling b all bar piv ots down.

Piv ot the coupling ball ba r to the right and up . The LED must g o out and the wa rning buzzer m ust cease, otherwise repeat the proc edure.


Caravan/trailer towing

Carava n and tra iler loads 1)

The permissib le carav an/trailer load s a re vehicle-dependent and engine-dependent ma ximum v alues which must not be exceeded. The actual carava n/trailer load is the d ifference between the actual gross weight of the carav an/trailer and the actual c oupling socket load with the carav an/trailer atta ched. When the carav an/trailer load is being checked, therefore, only the caravan/trailer w heels – and not the joc key wheel – m ust be standing on the weighing apparatus.

The permissib le carav an/trailer load s for your v ehicle are giv en in the vehicle documents. Unless otherwise stated, they are valid for g ra dients up to max. 12%.

1) Observe n atio nal regulations.


The permissible cara van/trailer load should be fully utilised only by drivers who are adequately experienced in towing large or heav y carav ans/trailers.

The permitted carav an/trailer load ap plies up to the specified incline and up to an altitude of 1000 m etres abov e sea -level.

Since engine power decreases as altitude increases because of the air becom ing thinner, therefore reducing climbing ability, the p ermitted towing weig ht a lso decreases by 10% for every 1000 m etres of additional altitude. The towing weight does not have to be reduced when driv ing on roads with slight inclines (less than 8%, e.g. m otorways).

The actual carav an/trailer load plus the actual gross weight of the towing vehicle must not exceed the maximum permitted tow ing weight. For example, if the permitted Gross Vehicle Weight is utilised , the caravan/trailer load must only b e used until the maximum permitted towing weight is rea ched. The maximum permitted towing weight is shown on the identification plate - see p age 282.

Coup ling socket load

The coupling socket load is the load exerted by the ca ra van/trailer on the coupling ball. It can be va ried by changing the weight distribution when loading the carav an/trailer.

The m aximum permissible coupling socket load (Saloon / Hatch: 78 kg, Estate: 85 k g) is specified on the towing equipment identification plate and in the vehicle documents. Alw ays aim for the maximum load, espec ia lly in the c ase of heav y carav ans/tra ilers. The coupling socket load should never fall below 25 kg.

When measuring the coupling socket load , ma ke sure that the drawbar of the loaded carav an/trailer is at the same height as it will be when the carav an/trailer is coupled with the towing vehic le loa ded. Particularly important for carav ans/trailers with tandem axle.

Rear axle load during tow ing

When the carava n/trailer is coup led up and the towing vehicle is fully load ed, including all occupants, the permissib le rear axle load (for inform ation - see the identification plate or vehicle documentation) may be exceeded by 50 kg. The Gross Vehicle Weight rating must not be exceeded in the process.

On the increased payload version 3, the permissible rear axle load may be exceeded by 65 kg .

If the permissib le rear axle load is exceeded, a maximum speed of 60 mp h

(100 km/h) must be applied. If lower nationa l speed limits are p rescrib ed for vehic les towing caravans/trailers, these must be observed .

Tyre pressure

Ad just the tyre pressure on the towing vehicle to the v alue specified for a full load

- see page 299. Also check the pressure of the carav an/trailer w heels and the sp are wheel.


Trailer Stability Assist 3 (TS A)

TSA monitors vehicle movements when towing a caravan/trailer. If the system detects lurching movem ents, engine power is reduced while the vehicle a nd carav an/trailer com bination is selectively brak ed until the lurching ceases.

TSA is a function of the Electronic Stability

Programme (ESP

®

Plus ) - see page 196.


Driving chara cteristics, tow ing tip s

For caravans/trailers with brak es, attach break-away cable to eye 3 or loop around coupling ball ba r if no eye av ailable.

Before attaching the ca ra van/trailer, lubricate the ball of the caravan/tra iler towing device. However, do not lub rica te the b all if a stabiliser, which acts on the coupling ball, is being used to da mp sna king .

Check cara van/trailer lig hting b efore starting to drive. The fog tail light on the vehic le is deactivated when towing a carava n/trailer.

Ca ra van/trailers with LED turn signals m ust have a provision tha t makes it possible to monitor standard light bulbs.

Turn signal control indicator – see page 98.

The parking distance sensors at the rear 3 are d eactivated when tow ing a caravan/trailer.

Handling is greatly influenced by the loa ding of the carav an/trailer. Loads should therefore be secured so that they cannot slip and be p laced in the centre of the carav an/trailer if p ossible, i.e. above the axle.

In the case of trailers with low driving stability or caravans with a permitted

Gross Vehicle Weight of 1400 k g (Saloon /

Hatch)/1500 kg (Estate), do not exceed a speed of 50 mp h (80 km/h); the use of a friction-type sta biliser is highly recommended.

Do not d riv e faster than 50 mph (80 k m/h) if possible, ev en in countries where hig her speeds are permitted.

Make sure that you have enough room when cornering and a void sud den manoeuvres.

If the cara van/trailer starts to sway, drive more slowly, d o not a ttempt to correct the steering and b ra ke sharply if necessary.

If it is necessary to apply the brak es fully, depress the brak e pedal a s hard as possible.

Remem ber that the braking d istance for vehicles towing carava ns/trailers with and without brake is always greater than that for vehic les not tow ing a carav an/trailer.

When driving downhill, the brakes are under considerably m ore load when towing a caravan/trailer. For this reason, d riv e in the same gear as if driving up hill and drive at a sim ila r speed .

Automatic transm ission 3 or Easytronic 3 in Automatic mode will automatically select the d riv ing programme with the optimum engine b ra king effec t.

If necessary, the gears can a lso be selec ted ma nually.

The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its cooling power is therefore independent of the engine speed.

Since a considerable amount of heat is generated at high engine sp eed s a nd less at slower speeds, d o not shift down when climbing hills whilst the vehicle is still coping with the g ra dient in the higher gea r.

Diesel engines: On rising g radients of 10% or more, do not drive faster than 20 mph

(30 k m/h) in 1st gear or 30 mph (50 km/h) in 2nd gea r; with automatic transm ission 3, do not exceed 25 mp h

(40 k m/h) in position 1.

Starting on inclines

For vehicles with manual transmission, the most favourable engine speed when starting-off on an incline is between 2500 and 3000 rpm for petrol engines and between 2000 and 2200 rpm for diesel engines. Hold engine speed constant, engage clutch gradually (let slip), release ha ndb ra ke and open throttle. If possible, the engine speed should not drop d uring this procedure.


For v ehicles with a utomatic transmission 3 or Easytronic 3 in Autom atic mode it is sufficient to apply full throttle.

Before starting-off under extreme conditions (high combination weight, mountainous terrain w ith steep inclines), switch off all unnecessary electrical loads

(e.g. heated rear window, air conditioning system 3, heated seats 3).

228 Self-help, vehicle care

Self-help, vehicle care

Diesel fuel system, bleeding ............... 228

Bonnet .................................................. 228

Starting ................................................. 229

Towing .................................................. 232

Warning triangle ¨ 3 , first-aid kit + 3.................................. 234

Spa re wheel 3 ...................................... 236

Jac k £ 3 and vehicle tools 3 ............ 238

Changing wheels ................................. 238

Tyre repair kit 3 ................................... 242

Electrical system .................................. 246

Fuses and the most important c ircuits they p rotect ....................................... 248

Bulb replacem ent ................................ 252

Halogen headlight system, dipped and main beam ................................. 253

Xenon headlight system , dipped and main beam ........................................ 255

Adaptive Forw ard Lighting (AFL) system 3 ............................................ 257

Halogen headlight system, Xenon headlight system, parking lights ..... 257

Tail lights .............................................. 258

Numb er plate light .............................. 261

Courtesy lig ht ....................................... 262

Vehicle care.......................................... 264

9

Warning

Disregard of these notes can lead to injuries whic h may be fatal. Vehicle passengers must be informed accordingly.

Diesel fuel system , bleeding

Nev er let the tank run dry. If control indica tor Y illuminates, refuel as soon a s possible. Refuel immediately if it fla shes.

Restarting after running out of fuel is possible, but sta rting b ehaviour will be delayed. Turn on the ignition three times for 15 seconds eac h tim e. Then start the engine for a maxim um of 40 seconds. If it does not start, repeat the p rocess after waiting at least 5 seconds. If the engine still does not start, contac t a workshop .

Bonnet

To open the bonnet, pull the release lever located on the driv er’s side b elow the instrument panel. The bonnet will then be unlocked and will partially open. R eturn release lever to its original position.

There is a safety catch on the underside of the b onnet: lift this upwards and op en the bonnet.

Dirt or snow on the bonnet may drop onto the windscreen when the bonnet is opened and block the air intake.

Air intake – see page 166.

To hold the bonnet open, insert the support loca ted a t the side in the small slot on the underside of the bonnet.

Before c losing, fasten the support in its retainer. Lower the bonnet and allow it to fa ll into its catch.

Check tha t the bonnet is lock ed in position by pulling at its front edge. If it is not engaged, repea t the procedure.

Self-help, vehicle care 229

Starting

Do not sta rt with quick charger

This prevents d amage to electronic components.

Do not sta rt by pushing or tow ing

Because your vehicle is fitted with a catalytic converter, it must not be started by pushing or towing – see page 190.

The v ehicle can only be started using jum p leads – see follow ing page.


Sta rting the engine with jump lea ds 3

A vehicle with a discharged battery can be started using jump lead s and the battery of another vehicle.

Attemp ts to start the vehicle should be mad e at intervals of one minute a nd should not last longer than 15 seconds

9

Warning

Be extrem ely careful when starting with jump leads. Any dev iation from the following instructions can lead to injuries or damage caused by battery explosion or damage to the elec trical systems of both v ehicles. z Nev er expose the battery to naked flam es or sparks. z A discharged ba ttery ca n freeze at temperatures of around 0 ° C. Alwa ys thaw out a froz en batteries in a wa rm room before attaching jum p lead s. z Do not a llow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, fabrics or painted surfa ces. The fluid c ontains sulphuric acid which can c ause injuries and damag e in the event of direct contact. z Wear eye protec tion and protective clothing when handling a b attery. z Use auxiliary battery with same voltage

(12 v olts). Its cap acity (Ah) must not b e consid erably less than that of the discharged battery. Voltag e and capa city inform ation c an be found on the batteries. z Use jump leads with insulated terminals and a cross section of at least 16 mm

(25 m m 2 for diesel engines).

2 z Do not disconnect the d ischarged battery from the vehicle. z Switch off all unnecessary electrical consumers. z Do not lean over the ba ttery during jump starting. z Do not allow the terminals of one lead to touch those of the other lead . z Do not allow the vehicles to touch while jum p sta rting. z Apply handbrak e. M anual tra nsmission or Easytronic 3 in neutral, autom atic tra nsmission 3 in P.

The battery is in a box at the front of the eng ine compartm ent, on the right-hand side as v iewed from the front. To open the box, pull the c ov er forwards and swing it upwards.

Connect the lea ds in the order shown in the illustration:

1. Connect one end of the first jump lead to the positiv e terminal 1 of the battery prov iding the jump start (identified by

"+" sign on battery case or terminal).

2. Connect the other end of this lea d to the positive terminal 2 of the discharged battery ("+" sign).

3. Connect the first end of the other jump lead to the negativ e terminal 3 of the battery prov iding the start ("–" sign).

4. Connect the other end of the second jump lead 4 to ground on the other vehicle, e.g. engine block or screw connection in the engine suspension. z Do not connect leads to negative term inal of discharged battery. z The connection p oint should be as far away from the discharged battery as possible. z Route the lead s so that they cannot catch on rotating parts in the engine compa rtm ent.


z Start the engine of the v ehicle prov iding the jump start. z After 5 minutes, start the other engine.

Start attempts should be made at intervals of 1 minute and should not last longer than 15 seconds. z After starting, allow both eng ines to idle for approx. 3 m inutes with the leads connected. z In order to a void excess voltage in the electric al system, b efore removing a lead, sw itc h on a n electrica l consumer

(e.g. light, heated rear window) in the vehicle receiving the jump sta rt. z Reverse abov e seq uence exac tly when removing leads.


Towing

Towing your own vehicle

To open the cover concealing the towing eye socket at the front right of the vehicle: disengage the cover at the bottom and pull it off downwards.

The front towing eye is located in the compartment containing the jack and vehic le tools underneath the spare wheel in the lugga ge c om partment. Jack and vehic le tools – see page 238.

Screw in the front towing eye anticlockwise as fa r as it will go until it stops in a horizontal position.

Attac h a tow rope 3 – or better still a tow rod 3 – to the eye.

The front towing eye may b e used only for tow ing the vehic le, not for rescuing it.

Switch on ignition to release steering colum n lock and to permit opera tion of brake lights, horn and windscreen wiper.

Manua l transmission or Easytronic 3 in neutra l, automatic transmission 3 in N.

Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily. Excessive tractive force c an damage the vehicle.

9

Warning

For brak ing and steering, significantly hig her forces are required: brake assista nce and steering assistance are effectiv e only w ith the engine running.

To prevent the entry of exhaust fum es from the tow ing vehicle, switch on the air recirc ulation 3 and close the wind ow s.

Vehicles with automatic tra nsmission 3 should b e towed facing forw ards only and must not be tow ed faster than 50 mph

(80 km/h) or further than 60 m iles (100 km).

If the transmission is defective, or if the abov e speed or distance is to be exceeded, the front axle m ust be raised off the ground.


Contact a workshop.

If the autom atic clutch is relea sed manually a fter a p ower failure on vehicles with Easytronic 3 , tow ing is not perm itted - see page 175. In this case, contact a workshop immediately.

After towing, unscrew front towing eye by rotating cloc kwise and insert a nd c lose the cap.

Towing service

Entrust your vehicle only to the towing service of your choice and obtain an estimate on tow ing costs before employing any towing serv ice. In this w ay you a void unnecessary costs and possible insurance problem s during c la im processing .

Tow ing another vehic le

To op en the cover c oncealing the towing eye socket at the rear right of the v ehicle: disengage the cover at the bottom and pull it off d ow nwa rds.

The rea r tow ing eye is located in the compartment containing the ja ck and vehicle tools underneath the spare w heel in the luggage compartment. Jack and vehicle tools – see page 238.

Screw in the rear towing eye anticlockwise as far as it will g o until it stops in a horizontal position.

Attach a tow rop e 3 – or better still a tow rod 3 – to the eye.

The rear towing eye may be used only for towing the vehicle, not for rescuing it.

Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily. Excessive tractive force c an damage the vehicle.

After towing, unscrew rear towing eye by rotating clockwise and insert and close the cap.


Warning triangle

¨ 3

, first-aid kit

+ 3

Saloon / Ha tch

The w arning triangle and first-aid kit/ cushion are stowed in the side panel trim on the left-hand side.

To access press down bar a nd open the cover.

Depend ing on the warning triangle version, move loc king lever upwards and therefore clamp wa rning triangle in position.

When loading v ehicle, always ensure that first-aid cushion or first-aid kit is a ccessib le.

Estate

The w arning triangle and first-aid kit/ cushion are stowed in the side panel trim on the left-hand side.

To op en, push both bars down and open the flap.


When loading v ehicle, always ensure that warning triangle and first-aid cushion or first-aid kit are accessible.


Spare wheel

3

Some vehicles are equipped with a tyre rep air kit instead of a spare wheel.

See page 242.

Saloon / Ha tch

The spare wheel is located in the luggage compartment under the floor cov er. It is secured with a plastic wing nut.

To open the floor cover, p ull up the handle or stra p.

Estate

The spare wheel is located in the lugg age compartment under the load floor. It is secured with a plastic wing nut.

To open the loading floor, fold out release lever b y pushing at the m arked point and raise up the loading floor all the way.

Stowing sta nd ard size tyres in the spare w heel well

The spare w heel well is not designed for all sizes of permissible tyres. If a larger wheel must be stowed in the spa re wheel well after chang ing wheels, place the floor cover on the protruding wheel.

Genera l informa tion

Dep ending on the model variant, the spa re wheel is in the form of an temporary spare wheel 3. Please pay attention to instructions concerning temporary spare wheel in the next colum n and on pages 217, 242, 299.

On vehicles w ith a lloy wheels 3 the spare wheel may have a steel rim.

If you use winter tyres 3, the spare wheel may still be fitted with a summer tyre. If you use the spare wheel the vehicle’s ha nd ling may be altered. Obtain a replacement for the faulty tyre a s soon as possible, and have the wheel b alanc ed a nd fitted to the vehic le.

The spare wheel may have a smaller tyre and a smaller rim tha n the wheels mounted

1) on the vehic le : Using the spare wheel m ay alter vehicle handling. Have the defective tyre replaced as soon as possible, balance the w heel and have it mounted on the vehic le.

Notes on tem porary spare wheel 3 z Using a temporary spare wheel may change the driving b ehaviour of the vehicle, particularly if using winter tyres 3. Replace defective tyre as quickly as possible, ba la nce wheel and fit to vehicle. z Fit only one temporary spare wheel. z Do not drive faster than 50 m ph

(80 k m/h). z Take curves slowly. z Do not use the temporary spa re wheel for a lengthy period. z Replace temporary spare wheel with full specification wheel without delay. z Tyre chains are not permitted on the temporary spare wheel. If tyre chains have to be used after a front wheel puncture, fit temporary spare wheel to the rear axle and fit a rear wheel to the front axle. Check tyre pressure and correct if necessary - see pa ge 299. z Please follow instructions concerning temporary spare wheel on pages 217 and 299.


Notes on directional tyres 3

Direc tional tyres only achiev e their full performa nc e potential when mounted in the prescribed direction of rotation. If after a flat tyre the tyre or sp are wheel is mounted against the prescribed direc tion of rotation, observe the following: z Driv ing conditions may be altered.

Replac e the defective tyre a s soon as possible, balance the wheel and mount it on the vehic le.

z Do not drive faster than 50 mph

(80 km /h).

z Driv e especially carefully in w et or snowy weather.

For further information on directional tyres – see page 211.

1) Co untry-specific versio n: The s pare wh eel is only to be used as a tem po rary spare wheel.


Jack

£ 3

and vehicle tools

3

The jac k and the vehicle tools hav e been specially dev eloped for your vehicle and must only be used on that vehicle. Only use jack for changing w heels.

Vehicles w ith tyre rep air kit 3

The vehicle tools a re stored in the luggage compartment together with the tyre rep air kit in a compartment beneath the floor cover.

Vehicles w ith spare w heel 3

The jack and vehicle tools are loca ted in a compartment in the luggag e compartment, b eneath the spare wheel. To rem ov e the spare w heel - see page 236.

After use, stow away the jack and tools in the compartm ent as shown in illustration.

Changing wheels

There may be a tyre repair kit instead of a spare wheel – see page 242.

To ensure your safety, m ake the following preparations and ob serve the follow ing inform ation when changing wheels: z Park the vehic le on a lev el, firm and nonskid surface. z Switch on hazard warning lig hts, ap ply ha nd brake, automatic transm ission 3 - selector lever in P, manual transm ission or Easytronic 3 - engage 1st or reverse gear. z Correctly set up the warning tria ngle.

Wa rning triangle – see page 234.

z Remove spare wheel from luggage com partment - see page 236. z Before raising the v ehicle, set the front wheels to the straight-ahead position. z Slacken the wheel bolts one half turn before raising the vehicle, but do not totally unscrew the bolts. z Nev er change more than one wheel at once. z Block the wheel d iagona lly opposite the wheel to be cha nged by placing w edge bloc ks or equivalent in front and behind the wheel. z Use the jack only to change wheels.


z If the ground on which the vehicle is standing is soft, a solid board (max. 1 cm thick) should b e placed under the jack 3.

Using a thicker b oard c ould dam age the jack 3 and the vehicle. z No people or animals may be in the vehicle when it is jacked -up. z Never crawl under a jacked-up vehic le. z Do not start or run the engine while the vehicle is on the jac k. z Before inserting the wheel bolts when changing wheels, lightly grease the cone of ea ch b olt. For this reason, c arry som e conventional grease. 1. Prise off the wheel trim using the hook included with the vehicle tools 3 . For vehicle tools - see p age 238.

If the wheel trim ha s visib le w heel bolts 3, the trim ca n remain on the wheel. The retaining washers 3 on the wheel bolts must not be removed .


Alloy wheels 3: Disengage the wheel bolt caps with a screwdriv er and remove.

Protect the wheel by inserting a soft c loth between the screwdriver and alloy wheel.

2. Turn wheel bolts half a turn using the wheel bolt wrench 3, p ushing the wrench 3 on as far as possible.

3. There a re plastic retainers at the front and rea r of the vehic le underbody for positioning the jack. The loca tion of each retainer is indicated by a ma rk on the bottom ed ge of the vehicle.


4. Before a ttac hing jac k 3 set to required height by turning the eye by hand. Fit the ja ck 3 a t the front – or rear – in such a way that the jack head eng ages in the plastic retainer beneath the vehicle.

Check tha t it is properly engaged.

The jack b ase must be on the ground directly b elow the jacking point in a manner that prevents it from slipping .

Attach crank to eye of threaded rod and turn crank to raise v ehicle.

If this is not the case, carefully lower the vehicle imm ediately and reposition the jack.

5. Unscrew wheel b olts and wipe clean with a c loth. Then apply a light coating of grease to the wheel bolts. Do not g rease the thread of the bolts. Do not put the wheel bolts down in a location where they may bec om e soiled.

If the wheel bolts hav e retaining washers 3, they m ust not be rem ov ed.

6. Change the wheel. N otes on sp are wheel – see page 236, notes on temporary sp are wheel – see page 237.

7. Screw in wheel bolts and tighten slightly, inserting the wheel bolt wrench 3 as far as possible.

8. Lower vehicle.

9. Tighten wheel bolts c rosswise, p utting on wheel bolt wrench 3 as far as possible.

6


10. Before refitting the wheel trim, clea n the wheel around the retaining clips. Valve symbol 3 on back of wheel trim must point tow ards valve on wheel.

Align and refit wheel trim or w heel bolt caps 3.

Alloy wheels 3: Align and refit wheel bolt caps 3.

11.Stow away replaced wheel, tools and wa rning triangle in the luggage com partment - see pa ge 238.

12.Check the tyre pressure of the newly m ounted wheel. Correct if necessary.

13.H ave the tightening torque of the wheel bolts on the new wheel checked on the v ehicle using a torque wrench as soon as possible and, if nec essary, c orrected.

Tightening torque – see page 299.

14.Replace the faulty tyre on the wheel that wa s removed.

15.Replace tem pora ry spare wheel 3 with a full specification wheel without delay.

Tyre repair kit

3

Minor dam age to the tyre tread or side wall, e.g . from foreign bodies, can be repaired using the tyre repair kit.

Do not rem ove the foreign body from the tyre.

Tyre damage exc eed ing 4 mm or that is on the rim cannot be repaired with the tyre repair kit.

9

Warning

Driv ing with tyre pressures too low or tyres deflated c an cause invisible damage to the tyre. This damage c annot be eliminated with a tyre rep air kit. Park the vehicle and contac t a workshop .

Im portant information – see pag e 246.

In the ev ent of a flat tyre: z Switch on hazard warning lig hts, apply handb ra ke; for automa tic tra nsmission 3, move selector lever to P; for manual transmission or Easytronic 3, select 1st or rev erse gear.

z Correctly set up the warning tria ngle.

Wa rning triangle – see page 234.


The tyre repair kit is in a c om partment in the spare wheel well of the luggage compartment.

1. Ta ke the pouch with the tyre repair kit from the c om partment. Carefully rem ov e the components from the p ouch.

2. Remove the compressor.

3. Remove the electrical connection cab le and a ir hose from the stow age compa rtm ents on the underside of the compressor.

4. Screw the com pressor air hose to the connection on the sealant bottle.

5. Fit the sealant bottle in the retainer on the compressor.

Set the compressor near the tyre in such a way that the sea la nt bottle is upright.

6. Remov e the valve cap from the d efec tiv e tyre.


7. Screw the filler hose to the tyre valv e.

8. The switch on the comp ressor must be set to § .

9. Connect the compressor plug to the accessory socket or cigarette lighter sock et. Accessory socket – see pag e 93.


To prev ent battery discharge, we recomm end that you leave the engine running.

11.Set the rocker switch on the compressor to I. The tyre is filled with sealant.

12.While the sealant bottle drains (approx.

30 seconds) the pressure indicator on the compressor briefly p oints to 6 bar

(87 psi). Pressure then sinks aga in.

13.All of the sealant is pumped into the tyre. Afterw ards, the tyre is filled w ith air.

14.The prescribed tyre pressure – see pag e 299 should be reached within

10 minutes. Sw itc h off the compressor when the correc t pressure is obtained.

If the specified tyre pressure is not reac hed within 10 m inutes, remove the tyre repair kit. Move the v ehicle through one tyre rotation, approx. 2 metres, in either direction. Reconnect the tyre repa ir kit and continue the filling process for 10 minutes. If the specified tyre pressure is still not reached, the tyre is too bad ly damag ed. Park the vehicle and contact a workshop.


Drain excess tyre p ressure with the button ov er the pressure ind icator.

Do not run the compressor for more tha n 10 minutes - see "Important information" on pa ge 246.

15. Detach the tyre repair k it. Screw the filler hose to the free connection on the sealant bottle. This prevents sealant leak age. Stow the tyre repair kit in the lug gage compartment.

16. Wip e aw ay any sealant spill with a cloth.

17. Disma ntle the w arning triangle and stow it in the luggage compartment – see page 234.

18.The enclosed sticker shows the m aximum permitted speed at which the tyre repair m ay be used. App ly sticker in the driver’s field of vision.

19.Continue driving immediately to allow the sealant to distrib ute evenly throughout the tyre. Stop after approx.

6 miles / 10 km (but no more than

10 minutes) and chec k tyre pressure.

Screw the compressor air hose directly onto the tyre v alve (see Fig. 17256 T).

As long as the tyre pressure is more than 1.3 ba r (19 psi), it may be adjusted to the p rescrib ed v alue. Repeat the proced ure until there is no more pressure loss.

If the tyre p ressure ha s fallen below

1.3 bar (19 psi), the vehicle ma y no longer be used. Contact a w ork shop.

20. Stow the tyre repair k it in the luggage compartment – see pag e 242.


Im portant

9

Warning

Do not d riv e faster than 50 mph

(80 km/h).

Do not use the temporary spare wheel for a lengthy period.

Steerability and d riv ing behav iour m ay be im paired.

The d riv ing characteristics of the repa ired tyre is severely affected, therefore have this tyre replac ed.

If the compressor makes abnorm al noises or heats up greatly, switch it off for at least

30 minutes.

The integrated safety valv e opens a t a pressure of 7 bar (102 p si).

Protect the compressor from m oisture and rain.

The sealant can only be stored for approx.

4 years. After this time, the sealing prop erties can no longer be gua ra nteed.

Heed the exp iration date on the sealant bottle.

The sealant bottle can only be used once.

Replace a used sealant bottle.

The compressor and seala nt c an be used from approx. -30 °C.

Dispose of a used tyre repa ir kit in accordance with applicable legislation.

The adap ter 3 supplied may be used to pump up other objects, such a s b alls, airbeds, d inghies.

This is located on the underside of the compressor. To remove, unscrew the compressor air hose and pull out the adapter.

When using the tyre repair kit, no consumer may be c onnec ted to the front ac cessory socket at the sa me tim e.

Electrical system

9

Warning

Electronic ignition system s generate very hig h voltages. Do not touch the ignition system; high voltage can b e fatal.

Fuses

There are three fuseboxes in the v ehicle:

In the passenger com partment on the fa r left of the instrument panel, in the stowage compa rtm ent on the left in the luggag e compa rtm ent, and at the front of the eng ine compartm ent.


We recommend c arrying a complete set of fuses.

Spa re fuses are kept on b ack of fusebox cover in the instrument panel. For opening cover – see next page.

Before replacing a fuse, turn off the respective switch and the ignition.

A defective fuse (Fig. 17259 T) can be recognised by its melted wire. A new fuse should only be installed after the cause of the fault has been rectified .

There is a fuse extractor on the rear of the fusebox cover in the instrument panel for cha ng ing fuses – see illustration ab ov e.

Only install fuses of the specified rating.

Each fuse has its rating written on it, in add ition the fuses are colour coded.

Fuse, colour

Light brown

Dark brown

Red

Light blue

Yellow

Fuse, rating

5 A

7.5 A

10 A

15 A

20 A

Light green

Orange

Dark blue

30 A

40 A

60 A


Fuses and the m ost important circuits they protect

Fusebox in passenger compa rtment

The fusebox is on the left, on the outside of the instrum ent panel. Open door.

Disengage cover by p ulling firmly and rem ov e.

Spa re fuses, fuse extra ctor – see page 246.

Some circuits may be protected by sev eral fuses.

No. Circuit

1 Infotainment system, radio transport fuse

2 Interior fan, heating, air conditioning system

3 Sunroof

Ra ting

20 A

7.5 A

20 A

4 – –

5 Door module control unit 7.5 A

6 Brake light

7 Bodywork module control unit

8 Front passenger’s door module control unit

9 Central control unit

7.5 A

30 A

30 A

7.5 A

No. Circuit

10 Steering column m odule control unit

Ra ting

7.5 A

11 Diagnostics p lug 7.5 A

12 Battery overload protection 10 A

13 –

14 –

–

–

15 Door module control unit

16 –

17 instruments, information display

30 A

–

15 A

18 –

19 –

–

–

20 Yaw rate sensor (ESP® Plus ) 7.5 A

21 – –

22 Cigarette lighter

23 Interior fan, air conditioning,

Electronic Clim ate Control

24 –

30 A

30 A

40 A

–

7.5 A 25 Heating, air conditioning system

26 Instrum ents, informa tion display

7.5 A

Fusebox in lugga ge compa rtment

The fusebox is loca ted on the left side of the luggag e compa rtm ent, in the stowage compartment.

Saloon / Hatch:

Press the latch down a nd open the cover.

Estate:

Press both latches down and open the cover and interior trim.

Spa re fuses, fuse extra ctor – see page 246.

Some circuits may be protected by sev eral fuses.

No. Circuit

1 –

2 –

3 Electric seat adjustment, driv er’s seat

4 H eated rear wind ow

5 Electric seat adjustment, front passenger’s seat

6 Electric w indow operation, right rear

7 Electric w indow operation, left rear

8 Seat heating, rea r right

9 H orn, Vauxhall ala rm system

10 Fuel p um p

Rating

–

–

40 A

40 A

40 A

30 A

30 A

15 A

15 A

20 A


No. Circuit

11 Battery voltage

12 Seat heating, rear left

13 Towing equipment

14 Tailgate wiper

15 Heated seats, seat clim ate control, left front

16 Seat heating, front right

17 Accessory socket

15 A

15 A

18 Tailgate locking, Estate 30 A

19 Term ina l 30, Tw in Audio 10 A

20 Tank flap loc king

21 Ultrasonic sensor, Vauxhall alarm system

22 Electrically op erated tailgate

23 Glass break age sensor

(Vauxhall alarm system )

24 Battery voltage

25 Electronic chassis

26 Term ina l 15 (starter switch), Twin Audio

27 Seat occupancy recognition, tyre pressure monitoring system, rain sensor, air conditioning system

7.5 A

5 A

30 A

7.5 A

25 A

10 A

25 A

5 A

28 Parking distance sensors 7.5 A

29 – –

Rating

25 A

15 A

20 A

15 A

15 A


Fusebox in engine compa rtment

The fusebox is in the box at the front of the engine compartment.

9

Warning

Switch off engine before op ening the fusebox in the eng ine compa rtm ent, risk of injury.

To open, disengage front b attery c ov er and tilt upwards.

Disenga ge the bar at the front of the cover of fusebox and swing it upwards.

Spare fuses, fuse extractor – see p age 246.

Som e circuits may b e protec ted by several fuses.

No. Circuit

1 Engine electronics, transm ission elec tronics

2 Starter

3 Horn

4 Air conditioning system ,

Electronic Climate Control

5 Wind screen wa sh system, front and rear

6 Diesel fuel filter heating

Rating

20 A

25 A

20 A

10 A

15 A

30 A

No. Circuit

7 Central control unit, ESP® Plus

R ating

15 A

8 Headlights, windscreen wash nozzles

10 A

9 Power steering, brake servo 7.5 A

10 Ad aptive Forward Lighting 10 A

11 Windscreen wiper

12 Central control unit, ESP®

30 A

Plus 7.5 A

13 Headlight w ash system

14 Oxygen sensor

15 Engine control unit 1)

16 ABS

30 A

10 A

10 A

5 A

No. Circuit

17 –

Ra ting

–

18 –

19 Adap tiv e Forward Lighting , headlight range ad justment

–

15 A

5 A

20 H eadlight rang e adjustment 5 A

21 –

22 Windscreen wiper

–

30 A

23 Auxiliary heating 20 A

24 Ba ttery v oltage, terminal 30 30 A

25 Ba ttery v oltage, terminal 30 30 A

26 – –


No. Circuit

31 Vehicle interior module control unit

Rating

27 Easytronic 30 A

28 Tailgate module control unit 60 A

29 ABS 40 A


60 A

32 ABS

33 Vehicle interior module control unit

40 A

60 A


35 Cooling fan 1) 30 A

40 A

36 Cooling fan 1)

Brake servo

37 Adaptive Forw ard Lighting:

Slot for changing to symmetrical dipped beam for driving abroad - see page 136

20 A

30 A

30 A

Insert any maxifuse

38 – –

1) The brake lights are on all the time if the fus e is defective an d the ignitio n is switched on.

1)

Depen ding on engin e.


Bulb replacement

Before replacing a bulb , switch ignition off and switch relevant switch off.

Only hold new b ulb at base. Do not touch the b ulb glass with b are hands, otherwise fingerprints on the glass evap orate.

Residue builds up on the reflector eventually resulting in a dull reflector.

Inadvertently stained bulbs may b e cleaned with a clean non-fluffy cloth, using alcohol or white spirits.

Replacem ent bulb m ust be in accordance with d ata on base of defective bulb. Do not exceed wa tta ge g iv en on bulb b ase.

To c hange the lights on the left-hand side, remove filler neck from windscreen wash system fluid container to gain better access: disengage reta ining c la mp and withdra w filler nec k by pulling upw ards.

Wash fluid may escape if the bottle is full.

9

Warning

Protect the environment. Do not allow wash fluid to seep into the ground or drain into the sewage system.

As the headlight has to be rem ov ed, have the bulb on the rig ht cha nged by a work shop.

Headlight aiming

We recommend that headlight adjustm ent be carried out by a workshop which w ill have special equipment.

Manual headlight range a djustment 3 must be set to 0 when adjusting the hea dlights.


Halogen headlight system , dipped and main beam

Headlights with separate system s for main beam 1 (inner bulbs) and dipped beam 2

(outer bulbs).

Dipped beam

1. Open bonnet.

2. To change the bulb on the left, remove filler neck from windscreen wash system fluid container - see pag e 252. As the hea dlight has to b e removed , have the bulb on the right cha ng ed b y a workshop .

3. Turn the hea dlight cover a nticlockw ise and remove.

4. Push down bulb at bulb hold er.

6


5. Remove the bulb hold er with bulb from the reflector.

6. Detach bulb from bulb mounting.

7. Insert new bulb into bulb m ounting, without touc hing the glass.

8. Insert new bulb so that the two lugs on the bulb mounting engage in the recesses in the reflector.

9. Engage the bulb holder.

10.Reposition the headlight cover a nd turn it c lock wise.

11.After cha ng ing the bulb on the left, insert and engage filler nec k for windscreen wa sh system fluid container

- see p age 252.

Ma in beam

1. Open bonnet.

2. To chang e the bulb on the left, rem ove filler neck from windsc reen w ash system fluid container - see page 252. As the headlight has to be remov ed, ha ve the bulb on the right changed by a workshop.

3. Turn the headlight cover anticlockwise and rem ov e.

4. Detach plug connector from bulb .


5. Press spring wire clip forwards, diseng age to the right and open.

6. Remove bulb from reflector housing.

7. When fitting a new bulb, engage the lugs in the recesses on the reflector without touc hing the glass.

8. Engage spring wire clip, plug connector onto bulb.

9. Reposition the headlight cover a nd turn it c lock wise.

10.After cha ng ing the bulb on the left, insert and engage filler nec k for windscreen wa sh system fluid container

- see p age 252.

Xenon headlight system, dipped and main beam

Headlights with separate systems for main beam 1 (inner bulbs) and dipped beam 2

(outer bulbs).

Dipp ed beam

9

Warning

The dipped beam work s with very hig h electric al voltage. Do not touc h, risk of fatal injury. Have bulbs changed by a workshop.

6


Main bea m

1. Open bonnet.

2. To cha nge the bulb on the left, remov e filler neck from windscreen wa sh system fluid container - see page 252. As the headlight has to be removed, hav e the bulb on the right changed by a work shop.

3. Turn the headlight cover anticlockwise and remov e.

4. Detach plug connector from b ulb.

5. Press sp ring w ire clip forwards, disengage to the rig ht and open.

6. Remove bulb from reflector housing.

7. When fitting a new bulb, eng age the lugs in the rec esses on the reflector without touching the g lass.

8. Engag e sp ring wire clip, p lug connector onto bulb .

9. Reposition the head lig ht cover and turn it clockwise.

10. After changing the bulb on the left, insert and eng age filler neck for windscreen wash system fluid container

- see page 252.


Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) system

3

Xenon headlight system for main and dipped beam together with curve illumination b ased on steering ang le.

9

Warning

Xenon headlights operate at very high volta ge. Do not touc h, risk of fatal injury.

Only hav e bulbs for dipped beam, main beam , turn lig hting, parking lights and turn signal lights c hanged by a work shop.

Halogen headlight system,

Xenon headlight system, parking lights

1. Open bonnet.

2. To change the bulb on the left, remove filler neck from windscreen wash system fluid container - see pag e 252. As the hea dlight has to b e removed , have the bulb on the right cha ng ed b y a workshop .

3. Turn the hea dlight cover a nticlockw ise and remove.

4. Remov e pa rk ing light bulb holder from reflector.

6


5. Remove bulb from socket.

6. Insert new bulb, without touching the glass.

7. Insert socket in reflector, position headlight cover and turn clockwise.

8. After changing the bulb on the left, insert and engage filler neck for windscreen wash system fluid container - see pa ge 252.

Halogen headlight system,

Xenon headlight system, front turn signal lights

Have bulbs changed by a workshop.

Side turn signal lights


Front fog lights

3


Tail lights

Sa loon / Hatch

1. To open the stowage compa rtm ent, press down bar and op en the cov er.

2. Detach plug connector from b ulb mounting.

3. Press the two retaining lugs on outer edges of bulb mounting towa rd s each other and rem ove b ulb mounting.

Lights from top to bottom:

Turn sig nal light

Tail light/brake light

Tail light

Fog tail light

Reversing light


5. Insert new bulb without touching the glass. Fit bulb mounting into bulb housing. Connect plug. Close stow age compa rtm ent.


Estate

1. Open the com partment on the left or right-hand side by pressing the latch down – see pag e 235.

2. Hold the b ulb housing from the outsid e, use a w heel bolt spanner 3 to loosen the retaining nuts and unscrew them by ha nd . Remove the bulb housing to the rear. Wheel bolt spanner 3 – see vehicle tools on page 238.

3. Detach the cab le from the bulb housing .

6


4. Und o the three screws using a screwdriver and deta ch the bulb mounting.

5. Remove bulb from socket. Bulb s in b ulb holder:

1 = Brake/tail lig ht

2 = Turn signal light

6. Fit a new bulb without touching the glass. R efit the b ulb mounting a nd screw it into plac e. Position the bulb housing in the v ehicle b od y and screw it into place.

Close the compa rtm ent in the side trim.

Tailgate lights

Due to the large am ount of effort required, bulbs should b e replaced by a workshop.

1. Use a screw driver to p rise off the plastic plugs in the tailgate panelling to the right and left of the tailgate lock .


2. Und o screws in handle of inner panelling with torx screwdriver.

3. Remove the inner panelling and clip s from the tailgate.

4. Unscrew c orresponding holder:

1 = Reversing light

2 = Fog tail light

3 = Reversing light


6. Fit a new bulb without touching the glass. Refit the mounting in the tailgate.

7. Refit the inner panelling to the tailgate using the clips. Tighten the sc rew in the handle. Refit the plastic plugs in the openings.

Lights in electrically operated ta ilg ate 3

Have bulbs replaced by a workshop.

Number plate light

1. Insert screw driver vertically in b ulb insert as shown in illustration. Press to the side and release spring.

6


2. Remove bulb housing downw ards, ta king care not to pull on the cable.

3. Lift flap and disconnect plug from bulb socket.

4. Rotate bulb holder to left and disengage.


6. Insert new bulb, without touc hing the glass.

7. Insert light holder in b ulb housing and eng age by rotating clockwise.

8. Connec t plug to bulb socket.

9. Insert and engage bulb housing.

Courtesy light

Front courtesy light, read ing lights 3

To ensure that no power is supp lied to the lights, close the doors before removing.

1. Lever the lens out of the housing recesses.



3. Insert new bulb, without touching the glass.

4. Mount lens and engage in position.

Rear courtesy lights 3,

rear reading lights 3

Hav e bulbs changed by a workshop .

Glove comp artm ent lighting, luggag e c om partment lighting,

footwell lig hting 3

To ensure that no power is supplied to the lig hts, close the doors or hold the contact switch depressed before removing.

1. Prise the lig ht out with a screwdriver.

2. Press b ulb slightly towards spring clip and rem ov e.

3. Insert new b ulb, without touching the glass.

4. Insert light in opening and engage in position.

Instrum ent illumina tion,

inform ation disp lay illumina tion 3

Hav e b ulbs changed by a workshop.


Vehicle care

When caring for your vehicle, observe all nationa l environmental regulations, particularly when washing it.

Regula r, thorough care helps to imp rov e the a ppearance of your vehicle and maintain its value ov er the years. It is also a p rerequisite for warranty claims for any paint or corrosion dam age. The following pages contain tip s for vehicle care which, if used properly, w ill help comba t the unavoidable damag ing effects of the env ironment.

Vehicle ca re a ids 3

Vehicle wash: z Wash brush, z Car Shampoo, z Car Sponges, z Insect Removal Sponge, z Wheel Cleaners, z Engine Cleaners, z Glass Clea ners, z Cham ois Lea ther.

Vehicle care: z Paintwork Cleaner, z Paintwork Polish, z Cream Polish, z Metallic Paintw ork Wax, z Hard wax, z Touch-up pens, z Touch-U p/Aerosol Paint, z Wheel Preserver, z Insect Remover, z Window Cleaning Spray, z Lock Cylinder Grease, z Alloy Wheel Cleaner, z Alloy Wheel Preserver, z Rust Preventa tiv e, z Vauxhall De-icer Spray, z Vauxhall Wind screen Wash Solvent, z Silicone Oil for Rubber Seals.

Interior care: z Interior/Upholstery Cleaner.

Washing

The paintwork of your vehicle is exposed to env ironmental influenc es, e.g. c ontinuous changes in w eather conditions, industrial waste gases and dust or thawing salts, so wash a nd wax your vehicle regularly. When using autom atic car wa shes, select a programm e w hich includes w axing.

Bird d ropp ings, dead insec ts, resin, pollen and the like should be cleaned off imm ediately, a s they contain aggressive constituents which can ca use paint dam age.

Plea se follow the wash system ma nufacturer’s instructions when using wash systems. The windscreen wip er and the automatic wiper with rain sensor 3 and the rear window wiper 3 must be switched off - see pages 11, 126. Unscrew the antenna rod 3 and the roof rac k 3, standing on the door sill to make them easier to rea ch.

If you wash your vehicle by hand, make sure that the insides of the wings are also thoroughly rinsed out.

Clean edges and folds on opened doors and flaps as well as the areas they cover.

Thoroughly rinse off and leather-off the vehic le. R inse leather frequently. Use separate lea thers for pa int a nd window surfaces: remnants of wa x on the windows will impa ir vision.

Observe na tional regulations.

Waxing

Wax your vehicle regularly, in particula r after it ha s b een washed using Car

Shamp oo and at the latest when water no longer forms beads on the paintwork, otherwise the paintwork will dry out.

Also wax edges and folds on opened doors and flaps as well as the areas they cover.

Polishing

Polishing is necessa ry only if the paint has become dull or if solid deposits have become attached to it.

Pa intwork polish with silic one form s a protective film , ma king waxing unnec essary.

Plastic body parts should not be treated with wax a nd polish.

Use Metallic Paintw ork Wa x on vehic les with a metallic-effect paint finish.

Wheels

Use a p H-neutral wheel clea ning a gent to clean the wheels.

Wheels are painted a nd can be treated with the sam e agents as the body. For a lloy wheels we recommend use of Alloy Wheel

Preserver.


Paintw ork d amag e

Repair minor paintwork da mage such as stone chips, scratches etc. immediately using the Touch-up pen or Touch-Up/

Aerosol Paint before rust forms. If rust has already formed, hav e a workshop elimina te the cause. Also check the surfac es and edges facing the road surface on which rust may hav e develop ed for some tim e unnoticed.

Exterior lights

Headlight and other protectiv e light bezels are made of plastic. If they require add itional cleaning after the vehicle has been wa shed , clean them w ith Car

Sham poo. Do not use any a brasiv e or caustic agents, do not use an ice scraper, and d o not clean them dry.


Plastic and rubb er p arts

For additiona l cleaning of plastic and rubber parts use Interior/Upholstery

Cleaner. Do not use any other ag ent, and in particular do not use solvents or petrol.

Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners on plastic and rubber parts.

Wheels and tyres

Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners on wheels and tyres.

Interior and upholstery

Clean the v ehicle interior, includ ing the instrument panel facia, using Interior/

Upholstery Cleaner.

The instrum ent panel should only be cleaned using a soft damp cloth.

Clean fabric upholstery with a vacuum cleaner and b rush. To rem ove stains, use

Interior/U pholstery Clea ner that is suitable for both fabrics and vinyl.

Do not use cleaning agents such a s acetone, tetrachloride, p aint thinner, paint rem ov er, na il varnish remover, washing powder or bleach. Petrol is also unsuitable.

Open Velcro fasteners on clothing could dam age seat upholstery. Mak e sure that

Velcro fasteners are closed.

Seat belts

Alw ays keep seat belts clean and dry.

Clea n only w ith lukewarm water or Interior/

Upholstery Cleaner.

Wind ows

When cleaning the heated rear w indow, make sure that the hea ting element on the inside of the window is not dama ged.

Use a soft lint-free c loth or cham ois leather in conjunction with Window Cleaning Spray and Insect Remover.

Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent is suitable for de-icing windows.

For mechanical rem oval of ice, use a commerc ia lly availab le sharp-edg ed ice scraper. Press the scraper firmly ag ainst the glass so that no dirt c an get under it and scra tch the glass.

Windscreen wiper b lades

Wax, such as that used in car w ashes, can cause strea king on the windscreen when the wiper is used.

Smearing wiper blades c an be cleaned with a soft cloth and Vauxhall Wind screen

Wash Solvent, and rep la ced if necessary – see page 277.

Locks

The locks are lubricated with a high-quality

Lock Cylinder Grease in the fa ctory. Only use de-icer in urgent cases, since it has a de-greasing effect and affects the operation of the locks. Hav e the locks regreased in a workshop after using de-icer.

Engine compa rtment

Area s of the eng ine compartment that are painted in the same colour as the vehicle must b e look ed after like any other painted surfac e.

It is ad visab le to wa sh the engine compa rtm ent before and after winter and preserve it with wax. Cover alternator and brak e fluid reservoir with plastic sheets before washing the engine.

When washing the engine w ith a steam jet, do not direct the jet at components of the

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS), the air conditioning system 3, the Electronic

Clim ate Control system 3, the auxiliary heater 3 or the belt drive or its components.

Engine washing also rem ov es subsequently applied protec tiv e wa x. Therefore after washing, have a workshop protect the engine, parts of the b ra king system in the engine bay, axle elements with steering , body elements and cav ities, thoroughly with protective wax.

An engine wash can be performed in the spring in ord er to remove dirt that has adhered to the engine compartment, which may also ha ve a high sa lt content.

Check p rotective wax layer and make good if necessary.

Do not use high-pressure jet clea ners in the engine compartment.

Underbody

Your vehicle has a factory-app lied PVC undercoating in the wheel arches

(including the longitudinal mem bers) which prov ides permanent protec tion and needs no special maintenance.

The surfaces of the vehicle underb od y not covered by PVC are provided a durable protective wax coating in critic al areas.

On vehicles which are washed frequently in autom atic car washes with underbody washing facility, the protective wax coating may b e impaired by d irt-dissolv ing additives, so check the underbody after washing and ha ve it waxed if necessary.

Before the start of the cold weather season, check the PVC c oa ting a nd protective wax coating and, if necessary, have them restored to perfect condition.


Caution - c om mercially available bitumen/ rubber materials can damage the PVC coating. We recom mend that you ha ve underbody w ork carried out by a work shop which knows the p rescrib ed materials and has experienc e in the use thereof.

The underbody should be washed following the end of the cold weather season to remov e any dirt adhering to the underbody since this may also contain salt.

Check p rotective wax c oa ting and , if nec essary, have it restored to perfec t condition.

268 Service, maintenance

Service, maintenance

In our experience, the most com mon cause of all complaints is the result of misunderstanding or lack of communication betw een the customer a nd the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.

Inspection system ................................ 270

Genuine Vauxhall Parts and

Accessories ........................................ 271

A note on safety .................................. 271

Checking and topping up fluids ......... 271

Engine oil .............................................. 272

Diesel fuel filter .................................... 274

Coolant ................................................. 274

Brake fluid ............................................ 276

Wind screen wiper ................................ 277

Wind screen and headlight wash systems 3........................................... 279

Battery .................................................. 280

Protecting electronic components ..... 280

Vehicle decomm issioning.................... 281

Vehicle recommissioning..................... 281

We sincerely hope you will never have cause to complain ab out your vehicle.

However, if things do go wrong, the best course of action for you to ta ke is to contact your Vauxhall Authorised

Repairer’s Serv ice Reception Staff and exp la in the difficulty you are having. We are confident they will d o their utmost to resolv e the problem to your complete satisfaction.

Sometim es, howev er, despite the best of intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your prob lem has not been resolved to your satisfaction, please make an appointment to discuss the matter with the M ana ger of the department c oncerned.

The majority of areas of concern can be quic kly resolved in this way.

Should you wish to pursue the matter further, the Principal of the Vauxhall

Authorised Repairer should be made aware of your concern. It is ad visab le in cases such as this to write to him to confirm your problem and the solutions that have been offered.

You can be assured the Authorised

Repairer’s Principal w ill only be too anxious to fully inv estigate your prob lems and correct any errors mad e. After all, he has a large investment in his business a nd is proud of his reputation and professionalism and fully realises that satisfied customers are his key to success.

In the unlikely event that you are still not happy with the answer your Vauxhall

Authorised Repa irer has given, or the action he proposes to c orrect the problem , you m ay contact the Custom er Care

Department 1) where a team of Customer

Care Consultants will spare no effort to ensure your complete satisfaction.

Vauxhall Motor s Ltd.

Customer Care,

Griffin House,

Osborne Road

LUTON ,

Beds., LU1 3YT

Telephone: 0845 090 2044

They w ill review all the facts involved. Then if it is felt some further action can be tak en, the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer will b e adv ised accordingly. In any case, your contact will b e ac knowledged confirm ing

Vauxhall Motors’ position in the m atter.

If you are not satisfied with the outcome, you ca n if you wish, seek advice from an independent third p arty suc h as:

Autom obile Association (A.A.)

Fanum House, Basing View,

BASINGSTOKE,

Hants., R G21 4EA

1) Calls may be mon itored and recorded for training purpo ses.

Royal Autom obile Club (R.A.C.),

R.A.C. Motoring Services Ltd.

89-91 Pall Mall,

LON DON, SW1Y 5HS

The Customer Rela tions Depa rtm ent,

Society of Motor Manufacturers and

Traders Ltd. (S.M.M.T.),

Forbes House, Ha lk in Street,

LON DON, SW1X 7DS

Customer Complaints Serv ice,

Scottish Motor Trad e A ssocia tion,

(S.M .T.A.),

3 Palmerston Place,

EDINBURGH, EH12 5AQ

The N ationa l Conciliation Service,

Retail Motor Ind ustry Fed era tion,

9 North Street,

RUBGY, CV21 2AB

If you have a p roblem w hilst abroa d:

The Service Departments of Adam Opel

GmbH and General Motors branches everyw here will provide information and assistance:

In Luxemb ourg please contact the

General Motors Service Department in

Antwerp – Belg ium

Telephone: 00 32-34 50 63 29

General Motors Austria GmbH

Groß-Enzersdorfer Str. 59

1220 Vienna – Austria

Tel. 00 43-1-2 88 77 444 or

00 43-1-2 88 77 0

General Motors Belgium N.V.

Noordelaan 401 - Haven 500

2030 Antw erp – Belgium

Tel. 00 32-34 50 63 29

General Motors Southeast Europe org. slož ka

Olbrachtova 9

140 00 Prague – Czech Republic

Tel. 00 420-2 39 004 321

General Motors Danmark

Jaegersborg Alle 4

2920 Charlottenlund – Denm ark

Tel. 00 45-39 97 85 00

Vauxhall M otors Ltd .

Customer Ca re

Griffin House, Osborne Road

Luton, Bedfor dshire, LU1 3YT – Engla nd

Tel. 00 44-845 090 2044

General Motors Finland Oy

Pa juniityntie 5

00320 Helsinki – Finland

Tel. 00 358-9 817 101 47

General Motors Franc e

1 – 9, avenue du M arais

Angle Qua i de Bezons

95101 Argenteuil Cedex – France

Tel. 00 33-1-34 26 30 51

ADAM OPEL Gm bH

Bahnhofsp la tz 1

65423 Rüsselsheim – Germ any

Tel. 00 49-61 42-77 50 00 or

00 49-61 42-7 70

Service, maintenance

General Motors Hellas S.A.

56 Kifisia s Av enue & Delfon str.

Amarousion

151 25 Athens – Greece

Tel. 00 30-1-6 80 65 01

General Motors Southeast Europe Ltd.

Szabadsag utca 117

2040 Budaörs – H ung ary

Tel. 00 36-23 446 100

General Motors India

Sixth Floor, Tower A

Global Business Park

Mehra uli – Gurgaon Road

Gurga on 122 022, Haryana – India

Tel. 00 91-124 280 3333

General Motors Ireland Ltd.

Opel House, Unit 60, Heather Road

Sa ndyford , Dublin 18 – Ireland

Tel. 00 353 1-216 10 00

General Motors Italia Srl

Piazza le dell’Industria 40

00144 Rome – Italy

Tel. 00 39-06-5 46 51

General Motors Ned erland B.V.

Lage Mosten 49 – 63

4822 NK Breda – N etherla nds

Tel. 00 31-76-5 44 83 00

General Motors Norge AS

Kjeller-Vest 6

2027 Kjeller – Norw ay

Tel. 00 47-23 50 01 04

General Motors Poland Sp. z o. o.

Wołoska 5

06- 675 Wa rsa w – Pola nd

Tel. 00 48-22-606 17 00

269


General Motors Portugal

Quinta d a Fonte

Ed ificío Fernão M agalhães, Piso 2

2780-190 Pa ço d’Arc os – Portugal

Tel. 00 351- 21 440 75 00

General Motors Southeast Europe org. z ložk a

Apollo Business Centre

Mlynské Nivy 45

821 09 Bra tislava - Slovakia

Tel. 00 421-2 58 275 543

General Motors España S.L.

Paseo de la Castellana, 91

28046 M adrid – Spa in

Tel. 00 34-902 25 00 25

General Motors N orden AB

Årstaä ngv ägen 17

100 73 S tockholm – S weden

Tel. 00 46-20 333 000

General Motors Suisse S.A.

Stelzenstraße 4

8152 Glattbrugg – Switzerland

Tel. 00 41-44 828 28 80

General Motors Türkiye Ltd. Sti.

Kemalpa sa yolu üz eri

35861 Torb ali / Izmir – Turkey

Tel. 00 90-2 32-8 53-14 53

In Alb ania, Bosnia-H erzegovina ,

Bulga ria, Croatia, Estonia, La tvia ,

Lithuania, Macedonia, Romania ,

Serbia -Monteneg ro and Slovenia please contact the

General Motors Service Department in

Budaörs – Hungary

Tel. 00 36-23 446 100

Inspection system

In order to guarantee econom ical and safe vehicle operation and to m ainta in the value of your v ehicle, it is of vital importanc e that all maintenance work is carried out at the proper intervals.

For vehicles with strict engine oil c hange and service intervals, before servic ing is due the disp la y InS P appea rs on the od om eter disp la y after the ignition ha s been sw itched on and off: Ha ve your next service carried out by a workshop within one week or 300 miles (500 km ).

The service interval display takes account of off-the-road p eriods during which the battery is d isconnected.

For vehicles with flexible oil change and service intervals, the length of these intervals is based on sev eral para meters stemming from usage.

For this reason, various engine-spec ific data is continually gathered and is used to calculate the remaining distanc e until the next service.

The remaining distanc e can be seen in the odometer display when the ignition is off:

Press the reset button next to the trip odometer. InSP and the remaining distance will be displayed.

If the rema ining d istance is less than

1000 miles (1500 km ), InSP is displayed with a remaining distance of 600 miles

(1000 k m) when the ignition is switched on.

InS P is displayed for several seconds if the remaining distance is less tha n 300 miles

(500 km ). Have service work that is d ue carried out within one week or 300 miles

(500 km ). Have this work carried out by a

Vauxhall Authorised Repairer in order to av oid inv alidation of warranty claims.

Further information on maintenance and the inspection system can be found in the

Service Booklet, found in the glove compa rtm ent.

Hav e ma intena nce work – and repair work on the body and the eq uipm ent – carried out professionally by a work shop. We recommend using your Vauxhall

Authorised Repa irer, who has excellent knowledge of Vauxhall v ehicles and has the necessary special tools and up-to-date

Service Instructions from Vauxhall. It is particularly a dvisable to use a Vauxhall

Authorised Repa irer during the wa rra nty period in order to prevent loss of w arra nty.

Further information can b e found in the

Service Booklet.

Service, maintenance 271

Separ ate anti-cor rosion service

Hav e this work carried out according to the intervals spec ified in the Service Booklet.

Genuine Vauxhall Parts and

Accessories

We recommend that you use "Genuine

Vauxhall Parts a nd Accessories" and conversion parts approved expressly for your vehicle type. These parts have undergone special tests to establish their reliab ility, safety and specific suitability for

Vauxhall vehicles. Despite continuous market monitoring, we cannot assess or guarantee these attributes for other products, ev en if they have been granted approva l by the relevant authorities or in som e other form.

"Genuine Vauxha ll Pa rts and Ac cessories" and conversion parts approved by

Vauxhall can be obtained from your

Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who can provide expert a dvice on permitted tec hnical c hanges and ensure correct installation.

A note on safety

To avoid injury from moving p arts a nd cables conducting ignition volta ge, only carry out engine compartment checks

(e.g. checking brake fluid or engine oil level) when the ignition is switched off.

9

Warning

The cooling fan is controlled by a thermoswitch and ca n therefore start unexp ectedly even if the ignition is switched off. Risk of injury.

Electronic ignition systems generate very high voltages. Do not touch the ignition system; hig h voltage can be fatal.

N ever carry out any repairs or adjustment and m aintenance work on the vehicle yourself. This especially applies to the eng ine, chassis and safety parts. You may unwittingly infringe the p rov isions of the law and, by not performing the work properly, endanger yourself and other road users.

Checking and topping up fluids

To aid identification, the cap s used when topping up engine oil, coolant and wash fluid as well as the oil dipstick handle may be coloured yellow.


Engine oil

Information on engine oils is found in the

Service Booklet.

Eng ine oil level and consum ption

Ev ery engine consumes engine oil for tec hnical reasons. The engine oil consump tion cannot be assessed until a fairly long distance has been driv en, a nd may be a bove the specified value when the vehic le is first b eing driven (run-in period ).

Frequent d riv ing at high revs increases engine oil consumption.

9

Warning

Do not allow the engine oil to drop below the minimum level.

In vehicles with engine oil level monitoring 3 , the engine oil level is monitored automatically - see page 103.

It is advisable to check the oil lev el b efore setting out on long journeys.

9

Warning

Imp ortant: It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the correct level of a n appropriate quality oil in the engine.

Engine oil level check, topp ing up engine oil

The illustrations on this p age show examples of the checks for various petrol and diesel engines. Fig. 17780 J on the next pag e shows the check s for engine

Z 30 DT 1) .

The oil level must be checked with the vehicle on a level surface and w ith the eng ine (which must be at operating temperature) switched off. Wait at least

5 minutes before chec king the level to allow the norm al engine oil accumulation in the engine to d rain into the oil pan.

1) Sales des ignation – see page 284, 285.


To check the engine oil level, insert wiped oil dipstick into dipstick tube as far as it will go. Top engine oil up if the lev el has dropped into the range of the top -up m ark

MIN .

The engine oil level must not exceed the upper mark M AX on the dipstic k. Excess engine oil must be drained off or extracted.

If the engine oil level is above the MAX mark there is a risk of damage to the engine or the ca ta lytic converter.

The a mount filled must be between the M IN and MAX marks – see p age 308.

Top up with the same brand of engine oil that was used during the previous oil cha ng e, following the instruc tions in the

Serv ic e Booklet.

To close, position the cap and screw it into place.

Capacities – see page 308.

Engine oil change, oil filter chang e

Cha nge oil at a work shop according to the service interva l shown on the display.

We recommend that you use g enuine eng ine oil filters.

9

Warning

Wa ste engine oil cannot b e disposed of with domestic refuse. Observ e the lega l requirem ents for d isposal of old oil and filters to protect the environment and your health.


Diesel fuel filter

On each engine oil change, have the fuel filter checked for any water residue by a workshop.

For engines 1) Z 19 DT, Z 19 DTL and

Z 19 DTH , control indica tor A illuminates if there is water in the diesel fuel filter.

Hav e fuel filter checked at shorter intervals if the v ehicle is subjected to extrem e opera ting conditions such as hig h humidity

(primarily in coastal areas), extrem ely high or low outside temperatures a nd sub stantially v arying daytim e a nd nig httime temp eratures.

Coolant

The glycol-ba sed coolant provides exc ellent corrosion protection for the heating and cooling systems as well as anti-freeze protection down to ap prox.

-28 °C. It remains in the cooling system throughout the year and need not b e cha ng ed.

Use of certain a nti-freezes ca n lead to engine dam age. We therefore rec om mend that you use only approved anti-freezes.

9

Warning

Anti-freeze is a danger to health; it m ust therefore be k ept in the original conta iner and out of the reach of children.

Anti-freeze a nd corrosion protection

Before the start of winter, have a work shop check the anti-freeze protection. The antifreeze level must guarantee protection down to a pprox. -28 °C. Insufficient antifreeze will reduce the frost p rotection level and the corrosion protection. If necessary add anti-freeze.

If c oolant loss is topped up with wa ter, have concentration checked and a dd antifreeze if necessary.

1) Sales designation – see page 28 4, 285.

Coola nt level

Hardly any losses occur since the cooling system is sealed and it is thus rarely necessary to top up the c oolant.

4-cylinder petrol and diesel engines: When the cooling system is c old , the c oolant level in the expansion tank should be slightly above the KALT/COLD mark. Coolant level can be read off from the outsid e of the expansion tank.

For V6 petrol and d iesel engines, the exp ansion tank must be opened in ord er to check coolant level. When the c ooling system is cold, the coolant should be up to the COLD mark on the filler opening.

9

Warning

Allow engine to cool down before rem oving coola nt filler cap . Rem ov e filler cap carefully so that p ressure can escape slow ly, otherwise there is a risk of scalding.


When the engine is at op erating temperature, coolant lev el rises. It falls aga in when the system cools. If it falls below the KALT/COLD mark when the system is cold, top up to the mark.

Top up a nti-freeze. If no anti-freeze is av ailable, top up with clean tap water. If tap water is unavailable, distilled water can b e used.

After filling with tap water or d istilled water, measure the anti-freeze concentration and ad d anti-freez e if required. H ave a workshop establish the cause of the coolant loss.

Too low a coolant level can cause engine dam age.

To close, position the cap and screw it into place.

6


Coola nt temperature

If the temperature ga uge enters the righthand (wa rning) z one or control indic ator W illuminates, check the coolant level immediately. z Coolant level too low:

Top up coolant, noting the instructions given under "Anti-freeze and corrosion protection" and "Coolant level". H ave the cause of the coolant loss rectified by a workshop. z Coolant level OK:

Have the cause of the elevated coolant temperature rectified. Contac t a work shop.

Brake fluid

Brake fluid level

9

Warning

Brake fluid is poisonous and corrosiv e. Do not allow it to come into contact with eyes, skin, fab ric or painted surfaces.

Direct contac t could cause injury and dam age.

The fluid lev el in the reservoir must be neither higher than the MAX mark nor low er than the M IN m ark.

Use of certain brake fluids can lead to dam age or reduced braking effect. We therefore rec om mend that you use only high performa nce app roved b ra ke fluid.

Extrem e cleanliness is needed when topping up, since contamination in the brak e fluid can c ause brake system ma lfunctions.

After c orrecting the brak e fluid level, have a work shop eliminate the cause of the brak e fluid loss.

Brake fluid chang e

Brake fluid is hygroscopic, i.e. it absorbs water. If the brakes b ecome hot, suc h as when d riv ing on long downhill stretches, vap our bubb les can occur in the w ater, which can have an extrem ely adverse effect on braking power (depending on the proportion of w ater).

The fluid change intervals specified in the

Service Booklet m ust therefore be observed.

9

Warning

Have the brak e fluid changed by a work shop. Observe the legal requirements for disposal of brake fluid to protect the environment and your health.

Windscreen wiper

Clea r vision is essential for safe driv ing.

Perform regular checks on the windscreen wiper a nd headlight wash system 3 to ensure they are operating correctly. We recommend wiper blade rep la cement at least once a year.

If the windscreen is dirty, operate the wind screen wash system before switching on the windscreen wiper or setting the wiper to automatic operation with the rain sensor 3. This will avoid w iper blad e wear.

Do not switch on the wind screen wiper or set the wiper to automatic operation with the rain sensor 3 if the w indscreen is iced up as this could da mage the wiper blades or the wiper system.


If the wiper bec om es frozen on to the glass, we recomm end that it be released with the aid of De-icer Spray.

Smearing wiper blades c an be cleaned with a soft cloth and Vauxhall Wind screen

Wash Solvent.

Wiper blades whose lips have become hardened, crack ed or covered with silicone must be replac ed. This may be necessary as a result of the effects of ic e, thawing salt or hea t, or the incorrect use of cleaning agents.

Switc h off the windsc reen w ip er or automatic w ip er with rain sensor 3 in car washes - see pa ges 11, 264.

Windscreen w ip er blad e m aintenanc e - see page 266.

6


To ensure proper operation of the ra in sensor 3, the sensor a rea must be free from dust, dirt and ice. The windscreen w ash system m ust also be operated at regular intervals and the sensor a rea m ust be de-iced. Vehicles with rain sensor c an be identified by the sensor area near the top of the w indscreen.

Service setting for front wind sc reen wip er

(e.g. for cha nging or cleaning the front wiper b la des).

Within 8 seconds of switching off the engine b ut with the key in the starter switch, press the windscreen wiper stalk downwards. Release the stalk as soon as the wiper blades are v ertical.

Wiper blades on the windscreen

Activating serv ic e position - see p receding column. Lift wiper arm. Press the release lever a nd detac h the wiper blade.

Windscreen and headlight wash systems

3

The filler neck of the windsc reen wash system a nd headlight wash system fluid container 3 is at the front left of the eng ine compartment next to the b attery. The fluid lev el in the reservoir ca n be read off from the level indicator. Do not fill above 1 /

1

.

Ca pacities – see p age 308.

Fill only with clean water to prev ent the nozz les from clogging. To im prov e cleaning efficienc y, w e recommend tha t you ad d a little Vauxhall Windscreen Wash

Solvent.


The wind screen wash system and hea dlight wash system will not freeze in winter:

Frost protection down to

- 5 °C

- 10 ° C

- 20 ° C

- 30 ° C

M ixture ratio of

Vauxhall

Windscreen

Wash Solvent to

Water

1 : 3

1 : 2

1 : 1

2 : 1

When closing the reservoir, press the lid firmly ov er the bea ded edge all the way round.


Battery

The b attery is m aintenanc e-free.

9

Warning

Have the ba ttery changed by a work shop. Observe the legal requirements for disposa l of old ba tteries to protect the environment and your health.

Retro-fitting of electrical or electronic accessories can discharge or add extra load to the battery. Take adv ic e on the tec hnical p ossibilities, e.g. use of a more powerful ba ttery.

Laying up the v ehicle for m ore than

4 weeks can lead to battery discharge, whic h may reduce the service life of the battery. Disconnect battery from on-board power supply b y detaching negative terminal.

The Vauxhall a larm system 3 siren must be deactiv ated a s follows: switch the ignition on then off, disconnec t the vehicle’s battery within 15 seconds.

Ensure that ignition is switched off before connecting battery. Then perform the following actions: z Setting date and tim e in the inform ation display – see pages 110, 113, 118.

z Activate window and sunroof electronics 3 if necessary – see pages 47, 49.

In order to prevent the battery from discharging, some consumers such as the courtesy light autom atically switch off after approx. 20 minutes.

Disc onnecting/connecting the batter y from/to the elec trica l system

Disconnect b attery from v ehicle power supply before charging : disconnect negative cable first, then the positive cable.

The polarity of the battery, i.e. the positiv e and negativ e terminal connections, must not b e switched. Always connect the positive cable first, then the negative cable.

Protecting electronic components

In order to prev ent faults in elec tronic components in the electrical system, never connect or d isconnect b attery w ith engine running or ignition switched on. Nev er start eng ine with battery disconnected, e.g. when starting using jum p lead s.

To av oid damaging the vehic le, d o not ma ke a ny modifications to the electrical system, e.g. connecting ad ditional consum ers or tampering with electronic control units (chip tuning).

9

Warning

Electronic ignition system s generate very hig h voltages. Do not touch the ignition system; high voltage can b e fatal.

Vehicle decomm issioning

Observe na tional regulations.

If the vehicle is to be parked for severa l months, to avoid da mage have the follow ing work performed by a workshop. z Wash and preserve the vehicle – see pa ge 264. z Check corrosion protection in engine com partment a nd on underbody a nd repair if necessary.

z Clean and preserv e rubber seals on bonnet and doors.

z Change engine oil – see page 273.

z Check anti-freeze and c orrosion protection – see page 274.

z Check the coola nt level, top up with antifreeze if nec essary – see pag e 275.

z Empty windsc reen w ash system and headlight wash system 3 . z Inc rease tyre pressure to value sp ecified for full load – see page 299.

Vehicle storag e z Park vehicle in dry, well v entilated plac e.

With manual transmission or

Easytronic 3 , enga ge 1st or rev erse gear. With automatic transm ission 3, selector lever in P. Use chocks or the like to prevent the vehicle from rolling .

z Do not apply handbrake.

z Disconnect battery by disengaging neg ativ e terminal from vehicle electrical system – see page 280.


Vehicle recommissioning

Observe national regulations.

Perform the following work before recommissioning the vehicle: z Connect ba ttery – see page 280.

z Check tyre pressure and correc t if necessary – see page 299.

z Fill up w indscreen wash system a nd headlight wash system 3 – see page 279.

z Check engine oil level – see p age 272.

z Check the coolant level; top up with antifreez e if necessa ry – see pa ge 275. z Fit the num ber p la te if necessary.

282 Technical data

Technical data

Vehicle docum ents, identification plate................................................... 282

Vehicle identification d ata.................. 283

Coolant, b ra ke fluid, oils ..................... 283

Engine data.......................................... 284

Performance......................................... 286

Fuel consump tion, CO

2

emissions ...... 288

Weights, payloa d and roof load ........ 293

Tyres ..................................................... 299

Electrical system .................................. 307

Ca pacities ............................................ 308

Dimensions........................................... 310

Vehicle documents, identification plate

The tec hnical d ata is determined in accordance with European Community standards. We reserve the right to make modifications. Specifications in the vehic le docum ents alwa ys have priority ov er those given in this manual.

The identification plate is affixed to the front right door frame.

Information on identification plate:

6

7

4

5

1

2

3

8

Manufa cturer

Type approval numb er

Vehicle Identification Number

Gross Vehicle Weight rating

Permissib le Gross Train Weig ht

Maxim um perm issible front axle load

Maxim um perm issible rear axle load

Vehicle-specific or country-specific data

Vehicle identification data

The Vehicle Identification Numb er is stamped on the identification plate and beneath a cover on the floor of the vehicle between the front door and driver’s seat.

In other model variants, the id entifica tion plate may also be affixed to the instrument panel.

Engine code and engine number: stamp ed on left-ha nd side of engine on crankcase.

Technical data 283

Coolant, brake fluid, oils

Only use app rov ed fluids.

Use of unsuitab le fluids can cause serious dam age to the vehicle.

Engine oils

Information on engine oils is found in the

Service Booklet.


Engine data

Sales designation

Eng ine identifier code

1.8

Z 18 XE

Numb er of cylinders 4

Piston displacement (cm 3 ) 1796

Engine power (k W)

at rpm

90

6000

Torque (Nm )

at rpm

Type of fuel

167

3800

Petrol

Octane requirement (RON) 1) unleaded or unleaded or unleaded

95

98

91

2)

2)3)

Max. permissible engine speed, continuous opera tion (rpm) ap prox. 6500

Engine oil consumption (l/1000 km ) 0.6

1.8

Z 18 XER

4

1796

103

6300

175

3800

Petrol

95

98 2)

91 2)3)

6500

0.6

2.0 Turb o

Z 20 NET

4

1998

129

5500

265

2500 to 3800

Petrol

2.2

Z 22 SE

4

2198

108

5600

203

4000

Petrol

95

98

91

2)

2)4)

6200

0.6

95

98

91 2) 4)

6500

0.6

2)

2.2 DIRECT

Z 22 YH

4

2198

114

5600

220

3800

Petrol

95

98

5)

2)

– 6)

6500

0.6

2.8 V6

Z 28 NEL

6

2792

169

5500

330

1800 to 4500

Petrol

95

98 2)

91 2)3)

6700

0.6

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

Stan dard high-quality fuels , e.g. unleaded DIN EN 228; value printed in bold: reco mmended fuel.

Kn ock contro l s ys tem automatically adjus ts ignition tim ing according to type o f fuel used (octane nu mber).

Slight reduction in engine ou tput and to rque if 91 RON is used.

If no unleaded P rem ium fuel is available, 91 RON can be used taking care to avoid high engine load or full load as well as for driving in m ountaino us terrain with a caravan /trailer load o r high paylo ad.

The use o f fuel that is at leas t 95 RON is prescribed.

91 octane fu el m ust not be used.


Engine data

Sales designation

Eng ine identifier code

2.8 V6

Z 28 NET

Numb er of cylinders 6

Piston displacement (cm 3 ) 2792

Engine power (k W)

at rpm

Torque (Nm )

at rpm

Type of fuel

Octane requirement (RON) 1) unleaded or unleaded or unleaded

Cetane requirement (CN) 1)

184

5500

350

1800 to 4500

Petrol

95

98

91

–

2)

2)3)

Max. permissible engine speed, continuous op eration (rpm) approx. 6700

Engine oil consumption (l/1000 km ) 0.6

95

98

4)

2)

– 5)

–

6700

0.6

VXR

Z 28 N ET

6

2792

206

5500

355

1800 to 4500

Petrol

1.9 CDTI

Z 19 DTL

4

1910

74

3500

260

1700 to 2500

Diesel

1.9 CDTI

Z 19 DT

4

1910

88

3500 to 4000

280

2000 to 2750

Diesel

1.9 CDTI

Z 19 DTH

4

1910

110

4000

320

2000 to 2750

Diesel

3.0 CDTI

Z 30 DT

6

2958

135

4000

400

1900 to 2700

Diesel

–

–

–

49 (D) 6)

5100

0.6

–

–

–

49 (D) 4)

5100

0.6

–

–

–

49 (D) 4)

5100

0.6

–

–

–

49 (D) 4)

5000

0.6

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

Stan dard high-quality fuels , e.g. unleaded DIN EN 228, Diesel DIN EN 590; D = Diesel; value printed in bo ld: recom mended fuel.

Kn ock contro l s ys tem automatically adjus ts ignition tim ing according to type o f fuel used (octane nu mber).



91 octane fu el m ust not be used.

A lo wer value is pos sible with w inter fu els.


Performance

(approx. mph / km/h), Saloon / Ha tch

Z 18 XE Eng ine 1)

Maximum speed 2)

Manual tra nsmission

Sports transmission

Easytronic

Automatic transmission

–

–

126/203

127/205

Eng ine 1)

Maximum speed 2)


Sports transmission

Easytronic


Z 28 NET

155/250 3)

–

–

155/250 3)

Z 18 XER Z 20 NET

130/210

130/210

129/207

–

–

143/230

–

–

Z 28 NET VXR Z 19 DTL

155/250

–

–

155/250

3)

3)

116/186

–

–

–

Z 22 SE

134/216

–

–

130/210

Z 19 DT

–

–

124/200

–

Z 22 YH

135/218

135/218

–

130/210

Z 19 DTH

135/217

–

–

130/210

Z 28 N EL

155/250

–

–

155/250

Z 30 DT

143/230

–

–

140/226

1)

2)

3)

Sales designation – see pages 284, 285.

The maxim um s peed indicated is achievable at kerbweight (with out driver) plu s 200 kg payload. Optional equipm ent cou ld reduce th e s pecified maximu m speed of th e vehicle.

The maxim um s peed is limited electro nically.


Performance

(approx. mph / km/h), Esta te

Eng ine 1)

Maximum speed 2)


Sports transmission

Easytronic


Eng ine 1)

Maximum speed 2)


Sports transmission

Easytronic


Z 28 N ET

155/250 3)

–

–

155/250 3)

Z 18 XE Z 18 XER

–

–

–

124/199

126/203

130/209

128/207

–

Z 28 N ET VXR Z 19 DTL

155/250 3)

–

–

155/250 3)

113/182

–

–

–

Z 20 N ET

–

–

–

139/224

Z 19 DT

–

–

121/195

–

Z 22 YH

130/210

130/210

–

129/208

Z 19 DTH

130/210

–

–

129/208

Z 28 N EL

152/245

–

–

152/245

Z 30 DT

140/225

–

–

137/221

1)

2)

3)


The maxim um s peed indicated is achievable at kerbweight (with out driver) plu s 200 kg payload. Optional equipm ent cou ld reduce th e s pecified maximu m speed of th e vehicle.

The maxim um s peed is limited electro nically.


Fuel consumption, CO emissions

by 2004/3/EC) has applied for the measurement of fuel consumption since 1996.

2

Directive 80/1268/EEC (last c hanged

The direc tiv e is oriented to actual driving practices: Urba n driving is rated at approx.

approx.

1 /

2 /

3 and extra-urb an driving with

3

(urban and extra-urban consumption). Cold sta rts a nd acceleration phases are also taken into considera tion.

The specification of CO

2

emission is also a constituent of the directive.

The figures given m ust not be taken as a guarantee for the actual fuel consumption of a p artic ular vehicle.

All values are b ased on the EU base model with standard equipment.

The calculation of fuel consumption as spec ified by directive 2004/3/EC takes acc ount of the v ehicle’s kerbweight, ascertained in accordance with these regula tions. Optional extras ma y result in slightly higher fuel consumption and CO

2 emission lev els than those quoted.

To convert l/100 k m into mpg, divide 282 by num ber of litres/100 km.

Saving fuel, p rotecting the environm ent – see page 186.


Fuel consumption

(approx. l/100 km )

, CO

2

Eng ine 1)

emissions

(approx. g/k m)

, Saloon 4-door

(tyre width up to 225 mm )

Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 S E Z 22 YH

Manual/sports/Ea sytronic/a utomatic transm ission urban extra-urban

tota l

CO

2

Eng ine 1)


tota l

CO

2

Z 28 NEL

15.4/–/–/17.1

7.3/–/–/ 7.3

10.3/–/–/10.9

247/–/–/ 262

10.4/10.7/–/–

5.5/ 5.8/– /–

7.3/ 7.6/– /–

175/ 182/–/–

Z 28 NET

15.4/–/–/17.1

7.3/–/–/ 7.3

10.3/–/–/10.9

247/–/–/ 262

10.1/ 9.9/ 9.7/–

5.5/ 5.6/ 5.4/–

7.2/ 7.2/ 7.0/–

173/173/168/–

Z 19 DTL

7.4/–/–/–

4.7/–/–/–

5.7/–/–/–

154/–/–/–

–/12.5/–/–

–/ 6.3/–/–

–/ 8.6/–/–

–/ 206/–/–

Z 19 DT

7.4/–/–/–

4.7/–/–/–

5.7/–/–/–

154/–/–/–

– /11.4/–/13.3

– / 6.2/–/ 6.5

– / 8.1/–/ 9.0

– / 194/–/ 216

Z 19 DTH

7.4/– /–/ 9.4

4.7/– /–/ 5.3

5.7/– /–/ 6.8

154/– /– /184

10.3/10.3/–/11.3

6.0/ 5.9/– / 6.1

7.6/ 7.5/– / 8.0

182/ 180/–/ 192

Z 30 DT

9.8/– /– /10.2

5.2/– /– / 5.3

6.9/– /– / 7.1

186/–/– / 192


(approx. l/100 km )

, CO

2

Eng ine 1)

emissions

(approx. g/k m)

, Saloon 4-door


Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 S E Z 22 YH


tota l

CO

2

Eng ine 1) Z 28 NEL

10.5/10.8/–/–

5.6/ 5.9/– /–

7.4/ 7.7/– /–

178/ 185/–/–

Z 28 NET

10.2/10.0/ 9.8/–

5.6/ 5.7/ 5.5/–

7.3/ 7.3/ 7.1/–

175/ 175/170/–

Z 19 DTL

–/12.6/–/–

–/ 6.4/–/–

–/ 8.7/–/–

–/209/–/–

Z 19 DT

– /11.5/–/13.4

– / 6.3/–/ 6.6

– / 8.2/–/ 9.1

– / 197/–/ 218

Z 19 DTH

10.4/10.4/–/11.4

6.1/ 6.0/– / 6.2

7.7/ 7.6/– / 8.1

185/ 182/–/194

Z 30 DT


tota l

CO

2

15.5/–/–/17.2

7.4/–/–/ 7.4

10.4/–/–/11.0

250/–/–/264

15.5/–/–/17.2

7.4/–/–/ 7.4

10.4/–/–/11.0

250/–/–/264

7.5/–/–/–

4.8/–/–/–

5.8/–/–/–

157/–/–/–

7.5/–/–/–

4.8/–/–/–

5.8/–/–/–

157/–/–/–

7.5/– /–/ 9.5

4.8/– /–/ 5.4

5.8/– /–/ 6.9

157/– /– /186

9.9/– /– /10.3

5.3/– /– / 5.4

7.0/– /– / 7.2

189/–/– / 194

1) Sales designation – see pages 284, 285.



(approx. l/100 km )

, CO

2

emissions

(approx. g/k m)

, Hatch 5-door

(tyre width up to 225 mm)

Eng ine 1) Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 N ET Z 22 SE

Manual/sports/Ea sytronic/a utomatic tra nsmission urban extra-urban

tota l

CO

2

Eng ine 1)


tota l

CO

2

Eng ine 1)


tota l

CO

2

10.4/10.7/–/–

5.5/ 5.8/–/–

7.3/ 7.6/–/–

175/ 182/–/–

Z 22 YH

10.3/10.3/–/11.3

6.0/ 5.9/–/ 6.1

7.6/ 7.5/–/ 8.0

182/ 180/–/ 192

Z 19 DTL

7.4/–/–/–

4.7/–/–/–

5.7/–/–/–

154/– /–/–

10.1/ 9.9/ 9.7/–

5.5/ 5.6/ 5.4/–

7.2/ 7.2/ 7.0/–

173/173/168/–

Z 28 NEL

15.4/–/–/17.1

7.3/–/–/ 7.3

10.3/–/–/10.9

247/–/–/ 262

Z 19 DT

7.4/–/– /–

4.7/–/– /–

5.7/–/– /–

154/–/–/–

–/12.5/– /–

–/ 6.3/–/–

–/ 8.6/–/–

–/ 206/– /–

Z 28 N ET

15.4/–/– /17.1

7.3/– /–/ 7.3

10.3/–/– /10.9

247/–/– / 262

Z 19 DTH

7.4/–/–/ 9.5

4.7/–/–/ 5.4

5.7/–/–/ 6.9

154/– /–/186

– /11.4/–/13.3

– / 6.2/–/ 6.5

– / 8.1/–/ 9.0

– / 194/–/ 216

Z 28 NET VXR

15.4/–/–/ 2)

7.3/–/–/

10.3/–/–/

247/–/–/

2)

2)

2)

Z 30 DT

9.8/–/– /10.2

5.2/–/– / 5.3

6.9/–/– / 7.1

186/–/–/ 192

1)

2)


Values no t available at tim e of printing.



(approx. l/100 km )

, CO

2

emissions

(approx. g/k m)

, Hatch 5-door

(tyre width up to 235 mm)

Eng ine 1) Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 S E


tota l

CO

2

Eng ine 1)


tota l

CO

2

Eng ine 1)


tota l

CO

2

10.5/10.8/–/–

5.6/ 5.9/–/–

7.4/ 7.7/–/–

178/ 185/–/–

Z 22 YH

10.4/10.4/–/11.4

6.1/ 6.0/–/ 6.2

7.7/ 7.6/–/ 8.1

185/ 182/–/ 194

Z 19 DTL

7.5/– /–/–

4.8/– /–/–

5.8/– /–/–

157/–/– /–

10.2/10.0/ 9.8/–

5.6/ 5.7/ 5.5/–

7.3/ 7.3/ 7.1/–

175/ 175/170/–

Z 28 NEL

15.5/–/–/17.2

7.4/–/– / 7.4

10.4/–/–/11.0

250/–/–/ 264

Z 19 DT

7.5/– /–/–

4.8/– /–/–

5.8/– /–/–

157/–/– /–

–/12.6/–/–

–/ 6.4/–/–

–/ 8.7/–/–

–/ 209/–/–

Z 28 NET

15.5/– /–/17.2

7.4/–/–/ 7.4

10.4/– /–/11.0

250/– /–/ 264

Z 19 DTH

7.5/–/–/ 9.6

4.8/–/–/ 5.5

5.8/–/–/ 7.0

157/–/–/189

– /11.5/–/13.4

– / 6.3/– / 6.6

– / 8.2/– / 9.1

– / 197/–/ 218

Z 28 N ET VXR

15.4/–/– / 2)

7.3/– /–/

10.3/–/– /

2)

2)

247/–/– / 2)

Z 30 DT

9.9/–/–/10.3

5.3/–/–/ 5.4

7.0/–/–/ 7.2

189/– /–/ 194

1)

2)





(approx. l/100 km )

, CO

2

Eng ine 1)

emissions

(approx. g/k m)

, Estate


Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 YH


tota l

CO

2

Eng ine 1) Z 28 NET

– /11.0/–/–

– / 6.1/–/–

– / 7.9/–/–

– / 190/–/–

10.3/10.4/10.0/–

5.9/ 6.1/ 5.7/–

7.5/ 7.7/ 7.3/–

180/ 185/ 175/–


–/12.7/–/–

–/ 6.5/–/–

–/ 8.8/–/–

–/ 211/–/–

Z 19 DT

10.6/10.6/–/11.5

6.3/ 6.2/– / 6.3

7.9/ 7.8/– / 8.2

190/ 187/–/ 197

Z 19 DTH


tota l

CO

2

15.5/–/–/17.4

7.4/–/–/ 7.6

10.4/–/–/11.2

250/–/–/ 269

15.5/–/–/ 2)

7.4/–/–/ 2)

10.4/–/–/ 2)

250/–/–/ 2)

7.5/– /–/–

4.8/– /–/–

5.8/– /–/–

157/–/– /–

7.5/–/–/–

4.8/–/–/–

5.8/–/–/–

157/–/–/–

7.5/–/– / 9.6

4.8/–/– / 5.5

5.8/–/– / 7.0

157/–/– /189


(approx. l/100 km )

, CO

2

Eng ine 1)

emissions

(approx. g/k m)

, Estate


Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 YH


tota l

CO

2

Eng ine 1)


tota l

CO

2

Z 28 NET

15.6/–/–/17.5

7.5/–/–/ 7.7

10.5/–/–/11.3

252/–/–/ 271

– /11.1/–/–

– / 6.2/–/–

– / 8.0/–/–

– / 192/–/–

10.4/10.5/10.1/–

6.0/ 6.2/ 5.8/–

7.6/ 7.8/ 7.4/–

182/ 187/ 178/–


15.5/–/–/ 2)

7.4/–/–/ 2)

10.4/–/–/ 2)

250/–/–/ 2)

7.6/– /–/–

4.9/– /–/–

5.9/– /–/–

159/–/– /–

–/12.8/–/–

–/ 6.6/–/–

–/ 8.9/–/–

–/ 214/–/–

Z 19 DT

7.6/–/–/–

4.9/–/–/–

5.9/–/–/–

159/–/–/–

10.7/10.7/–/11.6

6.4/ 6.3/– / 6.4

8.0/ 7.9/– / 8.3

192/ 190/–/ 199

Z 19 DTH

7.6/–/– / 9.7

4.9/–/– / 5.6

5.9/–/– / 7.1

159/–/– /192

Z 28 N EL

15.5/–/– /17.4

7.4/– /–/ 7.6

10.4/–/– /11.2

250/–/– / 269

Z 30 DT

9.8/–/–/10.3

5.2/–/–/ 5.4

6.9/–/–/ 7.2

186/– /–/ 194

Z 28 N EL

15.6/–/– /17.5

7.5/– /–/ 7.7

10.5/–/– /11.3

252/–/– / 271

Z 30 DT

9.9/–/–/10.4

5.3/–/–/ 5.5

7.0/–/–/ 7.3

189/– /–/ 197

1)

2)



Weights, payload and roof load

The p ayload is the difference between the permitted Gross Vehic le Weight (see identification plate on page 282) and the

EC kerbweig ht.

To ca lc ulate the kerbweight, enter the data for your vehicle below: z Kerb weight from

Ta ble 1, p ages 294 to

296 + .............. kg z Ad ditional w eight of equipment versions from Ta ble 2, page 297 + .............. kg z Weight of heavy accessories from

Ta ble 3, p age 298

Total

+ .............. kg

= .............. kg is the EC k erbweight.

Optional equipment and accessories increase the kerbweight, w hich means that the p ayload will also change slig htly.

Pay attention to weight ranges in v ehicle documents and on identifica tion plate.

The combined total of front a nd rear axle loa ds must not exceed the perm issible

Gross Vehicle Weight. For exam ple, if the front axle is bearing its m aximum permissib le load, the rear axle can only bear a load that is eq ua l to the Gross

Vehicle Weight m inus the front axle load.

When the carav an/trailer is coupled and the towing vehic le fully loaded (including all occupants), the perm issible rear axle loa d (see identification plate or v ehicle docum ents) may be exceeded by 40 kg. If the perm issible rear axle load is exceeded, a maximum speed of 60 mph (100 km /h) applies. If na tional regulations specify a low er ma ximum speed for vehicles towing a carava n/trailer, this must be observed .

See the identification plate or v ehicle docum ents for permissib le axle loads.


Roof loa d

The permissib le roof load is 90 kg, a nd

100 k g for Estate with roof railing 3 . The roof load is the c om bined weight of the roof rack a nd the load.

Driving hints – see page 184.

Roof rack – see page 218.


Weights

(kg)

: Table 1, Kerbweight

1)

, Saloon

Model Eng ine 2) 4-door

Ma nual transmission

Vec tra w ith

Elec tronic Climate

Control 3

Z 18 XE

Z 18 XER

Z 20 NET

Z 22 SE

Z 22 YH

Z 28 NEL

Z 28 NET

Z 19 DTL

Z 19 DT

Z 19 DTH

Z 30 DT

1395

1395

1505

1460

1460

1565

1565

1505

1505

1503

1635

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Easytronic

–

–

–

1395

Automatic tra nsmission

–

–

–

1490

1490

1590

1590

–

–

1523

1660

1)

2)

According to EC D irective, inclu ding ass umed weights for driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all flu ids (tank 9 0% fu ll).


Weights

(kg)

: T able 1, Kerbweight

1)

, Hatch

M odel Engine 2) 5-d oor

Manua l transmission

Vectra with

Electronic Clim ate

Control 3

Z 18 XE

Z 18 XER

Z 20 NET

1393

1393

1503

Z 22 SE

Z 22 YH

Z 28 NEL

Z 28 NET

Z 19 DTL

Z 19 DT

Z 19 DTH

Z 30 DT

1475

1475

1580

1580

1503

1503

1523

1650

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Easytronic

–

1393

–


Automatic tra nsmission

–

–

–

1505

1505

1605

1605

–

–

1548

1675

1)

2)

Acco rdin g to EC Directive, in cludin g assum ed weights for driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90% full).

Sales designation – see pages 284, 285 .


Weights

(kg)

: Table 1, Kerbweight

1)

, Estate

Model Engine 2) Estate

M anual tra nsmission

Vectra w ith

Elec tronic Climate

Control 3

Z 18 XE

Z 18 XER

Z 20 N ET

Z 22 YH

Z 28 N EL

Z 28 N ET

Z 19 DTL

Z 19 DT

Z 19 DTH

Z 30 DT

1475

1475

1570

1523

1613

1613

1585

1585

1600

1685

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Easytronic

–

1475

Automatic transm ission

–

–

–

1553

1638

1638

–

–

1613

1710

1)

2)

According to EC D irective, inclu ding ass umed weights for driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all flu ids (tank 9 0% fu ll).



Weights

(kg)

: Table 2, Additional weight of equipment versions

Saloon / Ha tch

Eng ine 1)

Z 18 XER

Z 20 NET

Life 16 16

Exclusiv

Design/Elite

SRi

32

31

28

32

31

28

Z 22 SE

16

32

31

28

Eng ine 1)

Life

Exclusiv

Design/Elite

SRi

Z 22 YH

16

32

31

28

Z 19 DTL

16

32

31

28

Z 19 DT

16

32

31

28

Estate

Eng ine 1)

Life

Exclusiv

Design/Elite

SRi

Z 18 XE,

Z 18 XER

5

22

27

23

Z 20 N ET

5

22

27

23

Z 22 YH

5

22

27

23

Z 28 NEL

5

22

27

23

Z 28 NET

5

22

27

23

Z 19 DTL

5

22

27

23

Z 19 DT

5

22

27

23

Z 28 NEL

16

32

31

28

Z 28 NET

16

32

31

28

Z 19 DTH

16

32

31

28

Z 30 DT

6

22

21

26

Z 19 DTH

5

22

27

23

Z 30 DT

3

20

25

26



Weights

(kg)

, Table 3, Heavy accessories

Saloon / Ha tch

Accessories Sunroof

Weight 17

Estate

Accessories

Weight

Sunroof

18

Towing equip ment

23

Towing equip ment

33

Tyres

Not a ll tyres ava ila ble on the market currently meet the structural requirem ents.

We recommend that you consult a

Vauxhall Authorised Repairer concerning suitab le tyre mak es.

These tyres have und ergone special tests to establish their reliab ility, safety and specific suitability for Vauxhall vehicles.

Despite continuous ma rk et monitoring, we are unab le to assess these attributes for other tyres, ev en if they hav e been g ra nted approva l by the relevant authorities or in som e other form.

Further information – see pa ge 211.

Winter tyres

3

Tyres of size 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 18 and

235/35 R 19 are not to be used as winter tyres.

Only the winter tyres sp ecified on p age 306 may b e used on vehicles factory-fitted with

235/35 R 19 tyres.

For Vectra VXR, tyres of size 225/45 R 17 on a Vauxhall-approved alloy wheel with designation 7x17, ET39 as well as tyres of size 235/40 R 18 are permissible as winter tyres.

If winter tyres are in use, the spare wheel may still be fitted w ith a summ er tyre. Use of the spare w heel may a lter vehicle ha ndling. Obtain a replacement for the fa ulty tyre as soon as possible, and hav e the wheel balanced and fitted to the vehicle.


Tyre chains

3

Tyre c hains may be used on the front wheels only.

We rec om mend the use of fine-link tyre cha ins which am ount to max 10 mm on the tread a nd tyre inner wall with chain lock

Tyre chains are not perm itted on tyre sizes

115/70 R 16, 215/50 R 17, 225/45 R 18,

235/40 R 18 a nd 235/35 R 19.


Wheels

Wheel bolt tightening torque: 110 N m.

Spare wheel

3

On vehicles with alloy w heels 3 the spare wheel may ha ve a steel rim .


Depending on the model variant, the sp are wheel is designed to be an emergency wheel 3: Using a spare wheel may change the vehicle’s ha nd ling. Repla ce defective tyres a s quickly as possib le, bala nce wheel and fit to v ehicle.

The spare wheel ma y be fitted w ith a smaller tyre 1) and a sm aller rim than the wheels fitted to the vehicle: Using the spare wheel m ay change the v ehicle’s handling.

Tyre pressure in psi/bar

2)

The specified tyre pressures are valid for cold tyres. The increased tyre pressure resulting from extensiv e d riv ing must not be reduced. The tyre pressures specified on the following pages ap ply to both summer and w inter tyres.

Always inflate the spare wheel to the tyre pressure for full load - see tables on following pages.

Temporary spare wheel tyre pressure 3 – see tables on the following p ages.

In v ehicles with tyre pressure monitoring system 3 there is an adapter in the v alve cap key. Screw a dapter to valve before attaching tyre pressure gauge – see page 213.

Further inform ation – see p ages 211 to 217.

1)

2)

Co untry-specific version: Th e spare w heel is only to be used as a tempo rary spare wh eel.

1 bar correspon ds to 100 kPa / 14.5 psi.


(ctd.)


Saloon / Hatch Tyre pressure for load of up to

3 people

Engine 2) Tyres Front

Z 18 XE,

Z 18 XER

195/65 R 15,

205/55 R 16,

215/55 R 16,

215/50 R 17,

225/45 R 17,

225/45 R 18

29/2.0

Z 20 N ET 205/55 R 16 3) 35/2.4

Rear

32/2.2

35/2.4

33/2.3

33/2.3

Z 22 SE,

Z 22 YH all

215/55 R 16,

215/50 R 17,

225/45 R 17,

225/45 R 18

195/65 R 15,

205/55 R 16

215/55 R 16,

215/50 R 17,

225/45 R 17,

225/45 R 18

T 115/70 R 16 4)

33/2.3

32/2.2

61/4.2

33/2.3

32/2.2

61/4.2

Tyre pressure

ECO 1) loa ded with up to 3 people

Tyre pressure for full loa d

Front Rear Front Rear

35/2.4

38/2.6

35/2.4

42/2.9

– – 36/2.5

44/3.0

38/2.6

38/2.6

35/2.4

42/2.9

–

36/2.5

–

–

36/2.5

–

35/2.4

33/2.3

61/4.2

42/2.9

41/2.8

61/4.2

1)

2)

3)

4)

To reduce fuel co nsum ption as much as po ssible.

Sales designation – s ee pages 284, 28 5.

Only permitted as winter tyres.

For notes on the temporary spare w heel – see page 237.

(ctd.)


Saloon / Hatch

Engine 1)

Z 28 N EL,

Z 28 N ET

Vectra VXR all


Tyres Front

215/55 R 16 2) 35/2.4

215/50 R 17

225/45 R 17

225/45 R 18

2) ,

2) ,

2)

38/2.6

215/55 R 16 3) 36/2.5

215/50 R 17

225/45 R 17

225/45 R 18

3) ,

3) ,

3)

235/35 R 19,

235/40 R 18

225/45 R 17 4)

T 115/70 R 16 5)

Tyre pressure for load of up to

3 p eople

39/2.7

42/2.9

41/2.8

61/4.2

Rear

35/2.4

35/2.4

33/2.3

35/2.4

38/2.6

36/2.5

61/4.2

Tyre pressure for full load

Front

38/2.6

41/2.8

39/2.7

42/2.9

45/3.1

44/3.0

61/4.2

Rear

45/3.1

48/3.3

46/3.2

49/3.4

51/3.5

51/3.5

61/4.2

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)


Versio n with manual transm is sio n.

Versio n with au tom atic transm iss io n.

Only permitted as winter tyres o n Vau xh all-appro ved alloy wheels.

For notes on the temporary spare w heel - see page 237.


(ctd.)


Saloon / Hatch

Engine 2)

Z 19 DTL,

Z 19 DTH

Z 19 DT

Z 30 DT all

Tyres

195/65 R 15,

205/55 R 16

215/55 R 16,

215/50 R 17,

225/45 R 17,

225/45 R 18

195/65 R 15,

205/55 R 16

215/55 R 16,

215/50 R 17,

225/45 R 17,

225/45 R 18

215/55 R 16,

215/50 R 17,

225/45 R 18

225/45 R 17

T 115/70 R 16 3)

Tyre p ressure for loa d of up to

3 people

Tyre pressure

ECO 1) loaded w ith up to 3 p eople


Front Rear Front

35/2.4

35/2.4

–

Rear

–

Front

36/2.5

Rea r

44/3.0

33/2.3

33/2.3

38/2.6

38/2.6

35/2.4

42/2.9

33/2.3

33/2.3

– – 35/2.4

42/2.9

32/2.2

32/2.2

36/2.5

36/2.5

33/2.3

41/2.8

36/2.5

33/2.3

–

38/2.6

35/2.4

–

39/2.7

35/2.4

–

61/4.2

61/4.2

–

–

–

–

–

39/2.7

39/2.7

41/2.8

61/4.2

46/3.2

46/3.2

48/3.3

61/4.2

1)

2)

3)




(ctd.)


Estate

Engine 2) Tyres

Z 18 XE,

Z 18 XER

195/65 R 15,

205/55 R 16,

215/55 R 16,

215/50 R 17,

225/45 R 17,

225/45 R 18

Z 20 N ET 205/55 R 16 3)

Z 22 YH,

Z 22 SE all

215/55 R 16,

215/50 R 17,

225/45 R 17,

225/45 R 18

195/65 R 15 3)

205/55 R 16

,

215/55 R 16,

215/50 R 17,

225/45 R 17,

225/45 R 18

T 115/70 R 16 4)



3 people

Tyre pressure



Front Rear Front Rear Front Rea r

29/2.0

32/2.2

35/2.4

38/2.6

35/2.4

42/2.9

35/2.4

35/2.4

– – 36/2.5

44/3.0

33/2.3

33/2.3

38/2.6

38/2.6

35/2.4

42/2.9

33/2.3

33/2.3

–

61/4.2

61/4.2

–

–

32/2.2

32/2.2

36/2.5

36/2.5

33/2.3

41/2.8

–

35/2.4

61/4.2

42/2.9

61/4.2

1)

2)

3)

4)






(ctd.)


Estate

Engine 1)

Z 28 N EL,

Z 28 N ET

Vectra VXR all


3 p eople

Tyres Front

215/55 R 16 2) 36/2.5

Rear

33/2.3

215/50 R 17

225/45 R 17

225/45 R 18

2) ,

2) ,

2)

39/2.7

215/55 R 16 3) 38/2.6

215/50 R 17

225/45 R 18

3) ,

3)

225/45 R 17 3)

39/2.7

41/2.8

235/35 R 19,

235/40 R 18

225/45 R 17 4)

T 115/70 R 16 5)

42/2.9

41/2.8

61/4.2

35/2.4

35/2.4

35/2.4

36/2.5

38/2.6

36/2.5

61/4.2


Front

39/2.7

42/2.9

Rear

46/3.2

49/3.4

41/2.8

42/2.9

44/3.0

45/3.1

44/3.0

61/4.2

48/3.3

49/3.4

51/3.5

51/3.5

51/3.5

61/4.2

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

Sales designation - see pages 284, 285 .

Versio n with manual transm is sio n.

Versio n with au tom atic transm iss io n.

Only permitted as winter tyres o n Vau xh all-appro ved alloy wheels.


(ctd.)


Estate

Engine 2)

Z 19 DTL,

Z 19 DTH

Z 19 DT

Z 30 DT all

Tyres

195/65 R 15,

205/55 R 16

215/55 R 16,

215/50 R 17,

225/45 R 17,

225/45 R 18

195/65 R 15,

205/55 R 16

215/55 R 16,

215/50 R 17,

225/45 R 17,

225/45 R 18

215/55 R 16

215/50 R 17,

225/45 R 18

225/45 R 17

T 115/70 R 16 3)



3 people

Tyre pressure



Front Front Rear

35/2.4

35/2.4

–

Rear

–

Front

36/2.5

Rea r

44/3.0

33/2.3

33/2.3

38/2.6

38/2.6

35/2.4

42/2.9

33/2.3

33/2.3

–

36/2.5

33/2.3

–

38/2.6

35/2.4

–

–

32/2.2

32/2.2

36/2.5

36/2.5

33/2.3

41/2.8

–

–

35/2.4

39/2.7

39/2.7

42/2.9

46/3.2

46/3.2

39/2.7

35/2.4

– – 41/2.8

48/3.3

61/4.2

61/4.2

61/4.2

61/4.2

61/4.2

61/4.2

1)

2)

3)





(ctd.)


Saloon / Hatch, Esta te with 19-inch wheels

Engine 1)

Z 18 XE,

Z 18 XER,

Z 22 SE,

Z 22 YH

Z 20 N ET,

Z 19 DTL,

Z 19 DTH

Z 28 N EL,

Z 28 N ET

Z 30 DT all

Tyres

235/35 R 19

215/55 R 16

225/45 R 17

205/50 R 17

2) ,

2) ,

2)

235/35 R 19

215/55 R 16

225/45 R 17

2) ,

2)

205/50 R 17 2)

235/35 R 19

215/55 R 16

225/45 R 17

2) ,

2)

205/50 R 17 2)

235/35 R 19

215/55 R 16

225/45 R 17

2) ,

2)

205/50 R 17 2)

T 115/70 R 16 3)

1)

2)

3)

Sales designation - see pages 284, 285 .




3 p eople

Front

39/2.7

Rear

35/2.4

33/2.3

33/2.3


Front

41/2.8

36/2.5

Rear

48/3.3

44/3.0

42/2.9

42/2.9

39/2.7

42/2.9

61/4.2

39/2.7

33/2.3

39/2.7

42/2.9

41/2.8

38/2.6

38/2.6

36/2.5

38/2.6

61/4.2

35/2.4

33/2.3

35/2.4

38/2.6

36/2.5

45/3.1

45/3.1

42/2.9

45/3.1

61/4.2

41/2.8

36/2.5

41/2.8

45/3.1

44/3.0

51/3.5

51/3.5

49/3.4

51/3.5

61/4.2

48/3.3

44/3.0

48/3.3

51/3.5

51/3.5


Electrical system

Battery Voltage

Amp hours

12 Volt

55 Ah / 60 Ah 3 / 66 Ah 3 / 70 Ah 3 /

72 Ah 3 / 85 Ah 3

Battery for remote control of central locking system CR 20 32

Battery for remote control of auxiliary heater/ventilation AAA LR 06


Capacities

(approx. litres)

Eng ine 1)

Fuel tank (nominal content)

Saloon / H atch

Estate

Engine oil with filter change between MIN and M AX on dipstick

Wind screen wash reserv oir with headlight wash system

61

60

4.25

1.0

2.9

5.6

Z 18 XE Z 18 XER Z 20 NET Z 22 SE

61

60

4.5

1.0

2.9

5.6

61

60

6.0

1.0

2.9

5.6

61

60

4.75

0.75

2.9

5.6

61

60

5.0

1.0

2.9

5.6

Z 22 YH Z 28 NEL,

Z 28 NET

61

60

6.0

1.0

2.9

5.6


Capacities

(approx. litres)

Eng ine 1)

Fuel tank (nominal content)

Saloon / H atch

Estate

Engine oil with filter change between MIN and M AX on dipstick

Wind screen wash reserv oir with headlight wash system

Z 19 DTL

61

60

4.3

1.0

2.9

5.6

Z 19 DT

61

60

4.3

1.0

2.9

5.6

Z 19 DTH

61

60

4.3

1.0

2.9

5.6


Z 30 DT

61

60

7.5

1.0

2.9

5.6



Dimensions

(approx. mm)

Overall length

Overall w id th

Width with two exterior mirrors

Overall height 1)

Length of luggage compartment floor

Lug gage compartment width maximum between the wheel arches

Height of lugg age compartment opening

Wheelb ase

Turning c ircle diam eter 3)

1396

972

614 2)

2700

11.50

Sa loon / Hatch Estate

4611

1798

4839

1798

2036

1460

1047

2036

1500

1176

1079

1060

767

2830

11.50

1396

972

614

2700

11.50

Saloon / Ha tch VXR Estate VXR

4642

1798

4870

1798

2036

1460

1047

2036

1500

1176

1079

1060

767

2830

11.50

1)

2)

3)

At kerbweight w ith driver.

4-door Saloon 324 mm .

In metres.

Installation dimensions of caravan/trailer towing equipment with removable coupling ball bar

3

,

Saloon / Hatch

All dimensions refer to fac tory-fitted towing equipm ent.

F

G

D

E

H

B

C

Dimension

A mm

334

1061

492.5

486.5

218

495

492.5

201

9

Warning

Only use towing eq uipm ent approved for your vehicle. We recommend entrusting retro-fitting of towing equipment to a work shop.



Installation dimensions of caravan/trailer towing equipment with pivoting coupling ball bar

3

,

Estate

All dimensions refer to fac tory-fitted towing equipm ent.

F

G

D

E

I

H

B

C

Dimension

A

J mm

396.5

157.5

386

74

630

590

491

486

480

379.5

9

Warning

Only use towing eq uipm ent approved for your vehicle. We recommend entrusting retro-fitting of towing equipment to a work shop.


314 Index

Index

A

Ac cessories....................................... 77, 234

Ac cessory socket ............................... 60, 93

Ad aptive brake light ............................. 208

Ad aptive Forward Lighting (AFL) 132, 133

Bulb replacem ent .............................. 257

Driving abroad ................................... 136

Ad justing the incline

Seats ..................................................... 51

Air conditioning system ........................ 140

Air intak e................................................ 166

Air outlet ................................................ 166

Air qua lity sensor ................................... 157

Air recirculation system ......... 148, 153, 161

Air vents ................................................. 142

Airba gs..................................................... 81

Ala rm ........................................................ 40

Ala rm system ........................................... 38

Alterna tor ................................................. 99

Antenna ................................................. 137

Anti-corrosion service............................ 271

Anti-freeze ............................................. 274

Anti-freeze protection................... 274, 279

Anti-knock q ua lity of fuel ..................... 188

Octane number.......................... 284, 285

Anti-loc k Brake System (ABS)............... 210

Anti-theft alarm system .......................... 38

Anti-theft locking system ........................ 30

Anti-theft protection ............................... 16

Aquaplaning.......................................... 215

Armrest .................................................... 57

Ashtray............................................. 94, 135

Automatic air recircula tion m od e........ 161

Automatic anti-dazz le interior mirror.... 44

Automatic level control system ............ 204

Automatic transm ission.......................... 14

Automatic mode ............................... 177

Driv ing programmes ......................... 178

Fault ................................................... 182

Interruption of p ow er supply............ 183

Kickd ow n............................................ 180

Manual mode .................................... 178

Selector lev er........................ 14, 177, 178

Selector lev er lock .............................. 177

Winter programme............................ 180

Automatic wiping ............................ 12, 127

Auxiliary heating ................................... 163

Program ming..................................... 164

Remote control .................................. 165

B

Battery ................................... 185, 280, 307

Interrup tion of power supply........................ 47, 175, 183

Battery discharge p rotection................ 136

Before sta rting-off ..................... 15, 16, 126

Belt force limiters ..................................... 73

Belt tensioners.......................................... 73

Bleeding, d iesel fuel system.................. 228

Board Information Disp la y ................... 108

Bonnet .................................................... 228

Boot, see Lug gage compartment .... 34, 65

Brake assist ............................................ 208

Brake light .............................................. 208

Brake system ............................................ 99

Brakes

ABS...................................................... 210

Bra ke assist ........................................ 208

Bra ke fluid .......................................... 276

Bra ke lig hts......................................... 258

Bra ke servo unit ................................. 184

Footbrake ........................................... 208

Handbrake ......................................... 209

Bulb replacem ent .................................. 252

Bulbs ....................................................... 252

C

Capacities .............................................. 308

Car Pass ................................................... 26

Carava n/trailer towing .......................... 184

Care ........................................................ 264

Catalytic conv erter ........................ 195, 229

CDC (Continuous Da mping Control).... 198

Central lock ing system ............................ 30

Centre console lighting ......................... 135

Changing the b attery

Remote c ontrol .................... 29, 165, 307

Changing tyre/wheel typ e .................... 211

Changing wheels ................................... 238

Chassis num ber, see Vehic le Id entific ation N umber ..... 283

Check control ................................... 20, 124

Child restraint system.............................. 77

Child safety lock s............................... 41, 46

Cigarette lighter .............................. 93, 135

Climate control ...................................... 140

Climate control system ......................... 156

Clutch operation.................................... 185

CO

2

emissions ................................ 287, 288

Cold start ............................................... 185

Colour Information Display .................. 108

Continuous Damping Control (CDC).... 198

Contra st.................................................. 119

Index 315

Control indicators.............................. 10, 98

Adaptive Forward Lighting ...... 104, 133

Airb ag .................................................. 86

Anti-lock Bra ke System (ABS)........... 210

Belt tensioners ..................................... 74

Brake system...................................... 209

Engine elec tronics.............................. 192

Electronic Stability Programme ........ 196

Exhaust............................................... 192

IDS+ ..................................................... 199

Immobiliser........................................... 27

Parking dista nce sensors ... 202 133, 203

Tyre pressure monitoring system ..... 207

Cool box................................................... 61

Coolant .................................................. 274

Coolant level .......................................... 275

Coolant tempera ture display............... 106

Cooled glove compartm ent ................. 143

Cooling ........................................... 149, 154

Correcting time.............................. 112, 118

Coupling socket load ............................ 224

Courtesy light ........................................ 134

Courtesy lights

Bulb replacement .............................. 262

Cruise control......................................... 200

Curtain airbag s ....................................... 85

Curv e lighting (AFL) ........................ 22, 132

316 Index

D

Dashb oa rd, see Instrument panel ............ 6

Data .................................................. 26, 282

Date ................................................ 110, 113

Daytime running lig hts .......................... 128

Dec om missioning .................................. 281

Dem isting and defrosting

Windows ............................................. 147

With climate control system.............. 159

With air conditioning system .... 150, 155

Diesel fuel filter ...................................... 274

Diesel fuel system .......................... 228, 274

Diesel particle filter....... 102, 143, 185, 194

Dimensions............................................. 310

Dipped beam ............................................. 7

Bulb replacement....................... 253, 255

Display............................................ 107, 108

Display mode ......................................... 120

Door locks......................................... 26, 266

Doors ...................................................... 100

Door-to-door lighting ............................ 133

Drink holders ............................................ 97

Driver’s seat with climate control ......... 144

Driving abroad ............................... 188, 269

Headlights .......................................... 136

Toll system .......................................... 138

Driving hints ........................................... 184

E

Easytronic ......................................... 14, 168

Driving programm es ......................... 171

Interruption of power supply ............ 175

Kic kdown ............................................ 172

Selector lever........................................ 14

Starting-off......................................... 170

Winter programm e............................ 172

Economical driving ................................ 186

Elec tric seat adjustment.......................... 52

Elec tric sunroof ........................................ 47

Elec tric windows ...................................... 45

Elec trica l system .................... 246, 280, 307

Elec tro-hydraulic p ow er-assisted steering................................... 10, 103, 184

Elec tronic com ponents .......................... 280

Elec tronic imm obiliser ............................. 27

Elec tronic Stability Programme ............ 196

Engine c od e ........................... 283, 284, 285

Engine c ontrol indicator........................ 192

Engine oil ................................................ 272

Engine oil c hange .................................. 273

Engine oil level and consump tion 103, 272

Engine oil filter ....................................... 273

Engine oil p ressure .................................. 98

Engine speed ......................................... 185

Engine w ash ........................................... 266

Env ironmental protection ............. 264, 273

ESP (Electronic Stability Programm e) .. 196

Exhaust c ontrol indicator ..................... 192

Exhaust g ases........................................ 193

Exhaust system ...................................... 193

Exterior mirrors ............................ 6, 43, 143

F

Fan......................................... 145, 152, 271

Filling station

Capacities................................... 308, 309

Engine oil level ................................... 272

Fuel .................................... 188, 284, 285

Opening the bonnet .......................... 228

Tyre pressure.............................. 187, 299

Vehicle data ....................................... 283

Windscreen wash system .................. 279

First-aid k it, ............................................ 234

Flat tyre .................................................. 242

FlexOrganizer .......................................... 69

Fog tail light ........................................... 131

Bulb replacement............................... 258

Footbrak e............................................... 208

Front fog lights ...................................... 130


Front pa ssenger’s airbag........................ 81

Fuel ........................................ 188, 284, 285

Fuel consump tion ......... 186, 188, 287, 288

Fuel filter................................................. 274

Fuel gauge ............................................. 106

Fuel system, diesel ................................. 228

Fuses ....................................................... 246

G

Gears ........................................................ 14

Generator, see Alternator ....................... 99

Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories ................................... 271

Glov e com partment ................................ 95

Cooled ................................................ 143

Glov e com partment lighting ................ 135


Gra phic al Inform ation Display ............. 108

Gross Vehicle Weight ............................ 293

Index 317

H

Halogen headlight system ................... 253


Driv ing abroad .................................. 136

Handb ra ke....................................... 16, 209

Haz ard warning lights .......................... 131

Head restraints........................ 5, 19, 55, 56

Headlight flash...................................... 129

Headlight range adjustment........ 131, 252

Headlight switch ....................... 7, 128, 129

Headlight wash system .......... 12, 127, 279

Headlights .................................................. 7

Daytime running lights...................... 128

Driv ing abroad .................................. 136

Front fog lights .................................. 130

Reversing lig hts.................................. 131

Wa rning device.................................. 126

Heated exterior mirrors .................. 13, 143

Heated front sea ts ................................ 144

Heated rear seats ................................. 144

Heated rear w indow ....................... 13, 143

Heating .................................. 140, 146, 154

Seats................................................... 144

With clima te control system ............. 158

With air c onditioning system .... 150, 155

Height adjustm ent

Seat belts ............................................. 76

Steering wheel ........................................ 6

High-pressure cleaners ......... 221, 266, 267

Horn.......................................................... 11

318 Index

I

Identification plate ................................ 282

IDS+ (Interactive Driving System) . 196, 198

Ignition logic .................................. 113, 120

Ignition system ............................... 271, 280

Imm ob iliser............................................... 27

Information display ............................... 108

Infotainm ent system .............................. 137

Inspection system .................................. 268

Instrument display................................. 105

Instrument illum ination ......................... 134


Instrument panel ....................................... 6

Instruments .............................. 98, 105, 137

Interactiv e Driving System (IDS+) . 196, 198

Interior mirror ....................................... 5, 44

Univ ersal remote control ..................... 41

Interruption of power supply .. 47, 122, 125

Easytronic ........................................... 175

Elec tric wind ow s................................... 47

Selector lever lock .............................. 183

ISOFIX....................................................... 79

J

Jack ......................................................... 238

Jump starting......................................... 230

K

Keys

Extending ............................................. 26

Ignition lock ................................ 6, 15, 27

Locking doors ...................................... 30

Remov e ................................................ 16

Starting the engine.................... 6, 15, 27

L

Langua ge selection....................... 113, 118

Lashing eyes ............................................ 69

Leather trim ........................................... 266

Level control system .............................. 204

Light switch ................................................ 7

Lighting ...................................... 7, 100, 128

Driv ing abroad ................................... 136

Loa ding .................................................. 223

Loc king doors ...................................... 2, 30

Loc king from the inside........................... 31

Loc ks....................................................... 266

Lub rica nts ...................................... 272, 283

Lug gage compartment


Extension .............................................. 65

FlexOrga nizer....................................... 69

Lashing eyes ........................................ 69

Lighting .............................................. 135

Loading ...................................... 223, 293

Locking ................................................. 34

Safety net ............................................. 67

Lug gage compartment cover ................ 66

Lum bar sup port ................................. 51, 53

M

Main bea m......................................... 7, 129

Bulb replacem ent ...................... 254, 256

Control indicator................................ 101

Maintenance.......................................... 268

Air conditioning system ..................... 167

Anti-freeze protec tion ....................... 274

Brake fluid .......................................... 276

Brakes................................................. 208

Catalytic converter ............................ 195

Engine oil .................................... 272, 273

Fuel consum ption .............................. 187

Tyre pressure...................................... 213

Tyres ................................................... 214

Windscreen wiper .............................. 277

Manua l transmission ............................... 14

Mirrors ............................................ 5, 43, 44

Misted windows ....................... 13, 147, 159

Mobile telephone................................... 139

Motorwa y lighting (AFL)................. 22, 132

Muffler, see Exhaust system ................. 193

Index 319

N

N um ber plate lights


N um ber plate lighting .......................... 261

N um ber plates....................................... 281

320 Index

O

Octane numbers................... 188, 284, 285

Odometer ............................................... 105

Oil chang e.............................................. 273

Oil filter change ..................................... 273

Oil level and consum ption .................... 272

Oil pressure .............................................. 98

Oils .......................................................... 272

Operating temperature......................... 185

Outside temperature ga uge ................. 109

Overrun........................................... 185, 187

P

Pa intwork damage................................ 265

Pa rk ing ............................................. 16, 202

Pa rk ing distance sensors ...................... 202

Pa rk ing lights ..................................... 7, 134


Pa rts ....................................................... 271

Pedals ..................................................... 185

Perform ance .................................. 287, 288

Petrol ...................................... 188, 284, 285

Pinking .................................................... 188

Pollen filter ............................................. 166

Position mem ory................................ 43, 54

Power steering, see electro-hyd ra ulic power-assisted steering ...................... 184

Preheating.............................................. 102

Pushing, towing ..................................... 229

Q

Quic kheat .............................. 146, 154, 158

R

Radio ...................................................... 137

Radio equipment (CB)........................... 139

Radio reception ..................................... 137

Rain sensor.......... 12, 47, 48, 127, 264, 277

Reading lights........................................ 135

Rear light cluster.................................... 128


Rear window wa sh system .................. 12, 127, 264, 279

Refuelling ................................................ 189

Fuel filler cap ...................................... 188

Remote control

Auxiliary heating................................ 165


Steering wheel.............................. 21, 137

Univ ersal remote control ..................... 41

Replacem ent keys ................................... 26

Reversible carpet ..................................... 69

Reversing lights


Roof load .................................. 71, 184, 187

Roof rack ........................................ 187, 218

Running-in

Bra kes ................................................. 208

S

Safeguard against unauthorised use 6, 16

Safety accessories ........................... 77, 234

Safety net ................................................. 67

Saving energy ........................................ 186

Sea t adjustment ............................ 3, 50, 52

Sea t belts ................................... 72, 76, 266

Sea t height adjustm ent ...................... 3, 51

Sea t occupancy recognition ................... 87

Sea t position ...................................... 52, 53

Sea ts ............................................... 3, 50, 51

Extending the lug gage compartment 65

Heated ................................................ 144

With climate control .......................... 144

Selector lev er.................................. 169, 177

Selector lev er lock ............................ 14, 177

Self-diagnosis .................................... 74, 86

Self-help ................................................. 228


Electric sunroof .................................... 49

Electric windows................................... 47

Information disp la y........................... 110

Remote c ontrol .................................... 29

Serv ic e interv al display ......................... 270

Serv ic e work ........................................... 270

Side airbags ............................................. 83

Spare fuses............................................. 247

Spare keys................................................ 26

Spare wheel ................................... 236, 238

Index 321

Speed ..................................................... 186

Fuel consumption ...................... 186, 187

Speedometer ......................................... 105

Sport mode .................................... 101, 198

Sta rter switch................................. 6, 15, 27

Sta rting the engine ............... 6, 15, 27, 229

Self-help ............................................. 229

Steam-jet cleaners ................ 221, 266, 267

Steering column lock ........................... 6, 16

Steering w heel a djustment ........................ 6

Steering w heel remote control ....... 21, 137

Stowa ge c om partments ............. 57, 95, 96

Sunblind ................................................... 49

Sunroof..................................................... 47

Sunsha de ................................................. 49

System settings.............................. 112, 117

322 Index

T

Tables....................................................... 62

Tachometer............................................ 105

Tail lights ................................................ 128


Tailgate .................................................... 34

Tailgate wiper ........................................ 127

Technical d ata ....................................... 282

Telephone, see Mobile telephone ........ 139

Tem perature regulation................ 145, 158

Tem porary spare wheel ................ 217, 237

The first 600 miles.................................. 184

Thigh support .......................................... 53

Tightening torque.......................... 242, 299

Time ................................................ 110, 113

Toll systems............................................ 138

Tools ....................................................... 238

Towing .................................................... 232

Towing eq uipm ent ................................ 219

Towing eye..................................... 232, 233

Trailer/caravan towing .......................... 184

Trailer Stability Assist (TSA).................. 225

Transm ission display ..................... 168, 176

Tra nsmission, automatic ........................ 14

Automatic mode................................ 177


Fault.................................................... 182


Kic kdown ............................................ 180

Selector lever.............................. 177, 178

Selector lever loc k .............................. 177


Tra nsmission, Easytronic ...................... 168



Kic kdown ............................................ 172

Selector lever................................ 14, 170


Tra nsmission, m anual ............................. 14

Tra vel Assistant ................................. 22, 58

Tread d epth ........................................... 214

Trip computer .......................... 20, 114, 120

Trip odometer ........................................ 105

Triple Information Display .................... 108

TSA (Trailer Sta bility Assist) .................. 225

Turn lighting (AFL) .......................... 22, 132

Turn signal lights ....................................... 7


Tw in Audio ....................................... 21, 138

Tyre c hains..................................... 217, 299

Tyre c ondition ........................................ 214

Tyre p ressure ......................... 204, 213, 299

Tyre p ressure monitoring system ......... 204

Tyre repair kit ........................................ 242

U

Units of mea sure ........................... 113, 119

Unlea ded fuel ................ 188, 190, 284, 285

Used oil .................................................. 273

V

Valve cap k ey ........................................ 213

Vauxhall alarm system ........................... 38

Vauxhall Service .................................... 268

Vehicle care ........................................... 264

Vehicle decom missioning ..................... 281

Vehicle Identification Number ............. 283

Vehicle keys, see Keys ............................ 26

Vehicle recomm issioning ...................... 281

Vehicle tools .......................................... 238

Ventilation ..................... 140, 146, 153, 160

W

Warning buzzers.................................... 126

Warning messages ........................ 111, 116

Warning triangle,................................... 234

Wash fluid reservoir, windscreen wash system ..................... 279

Wheels, tyres .......................................... 211

Wind ow s

Demisting and defrosting .... 13, 147, 150, 155, 159

Wind screen wash system ................ 12, 127

Anti-freeze protection ....................... 279

Capacities................................... 308, 309

Wash fluid reservoir ........................... 279

Wind screen wiper .................... 11, 126, 277

Winter mode

Starting -off aid .................................. 172

Winter operation

Battery ................................................ 185

Coolant, anti-freeze........................... 274

Fuel consumption .............................. 187

Fuel for d iesel engines....................... 188

Heating .............................. 140, 150, 155

Locks ................................................... 266

Tyre chains ................................. 217, 299

Window demisting and defrosting ... 147

Windscreen wash system, anti-freeze protection........................ 279

Winter programme ................................ 172

Winter tyres.................................... 216, 299

X

Xenon headlight system ....................... 255


Driving abroad ................................... 136

Index 323

324 Index

©Copyright by Vauxhall Motors Ltd., England.

Reproduction or translation, in whole or in parts, is not permitted without prior written consent from

Vauxhall Motors Ltd.

All rights as understood under the copyright laws are explicitly reserved by Vauxhall Motors Ltd.

All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this manual are based on the latest production information available at the time of publication.

The right is reserved to make changes at any time without notice.

Edition: July 2007.

TS 1557-A-08

Owner’s Manual

VECTRA

Operation, Safety and Maintenance